THE MUTINEET{^ 
 
BY THE SAME AUTHORS. 
 Uniform in style and price wilh this Volume. 
 
 A FIRST FLEET FAMILY: 
 
 A Hitherto Unpublished Narrative 
 of certain Remarkable Adven- 
 tures Compiled from the 
 Papers of Sergeant 
 William Drew 
 of the Marines. 
 With Map 
 
The Mutineer^ 
 
 A ROMANCE OF 
 PITCAIRN ISLAND 
 
 LOUIS BECKE 
 
 <jLr^ 
 
 ii 
 
 AND 
 
 WALTER JEFFERY 
 
 LONDON 
 
 T. FISHER UN WIN 
 
 PATERNOSTER SQUARE 
 MDCCCXCVIII 
 

 rt^ 
 
 {All rights rescnxcf\ 
 
MAiU 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 ^ 
 
 PART I 
 
 CHAP. 
 
 
 PAGE 
 
 I. 
 
 THE HEART OF A SAVAGE 
 
 I 
 
 II. 
 
 THE CUTTING OF THE CABLE 
 
 lO 
 
 III. 
 
 WHITE MEN AND BROWN WOMEN 
 
 . 22 
 
 IV. 
 
 THE FIRST SAILING OF THE " BOUNTY " 
 
 31 
 
 V. 
 
 THE LAST STRAW 
 
 • 37 
 
 VI. 
 
 THE RUBICON . . . . 
 
 43 
 
 VII. 
 
 MUTINY .... 
 
 • 57 
 
 VIII. 
 
 ■ 
 
 "hurrah for Tahiti!" 
 
 67 
 
 hx. 
 
 THE council in THE CABIN . 
 
 ' 74 
 
 X. 
 
 PIPIRI THE AREOI 
 
 83 
 
 XI. 
 
 TOGETHER AGAIN 
 
 . 89 
 
 XII. 
 
 THE END OF PIPIRI 
 
 103 
 
 XIII. 
 
 FAREWELL TO TUBUAI 
 
 . "3 
 
 XIV. 
 
 THE LAST SAILING OF THE " BOUNTY " . 
 
 118 
 
 968.507 
 
viii CONTENTS 
 
 PART II 
 
 CHAP. PAGE 
 
 XV. THE SEARCH FOR A RESTING-PLACE . . IZJ 
 
 XVI. THE FLIGHT OF THE KANAPU . . 139 
 XVII. THE STORY OF AFITA . . . I48 
 
 XVIII. BOUNTY BAY . , . . I 56 
 
 XIX. HEWERS OF WOOD AND DRAWERS OF WATER . 1 64 
 
 XX. MAHINa's FIRST-BORN . . I78 
 
 XXI. THE FIRST TO DIE . . . . 186 
 
 XXII. A LOYAL FRIEND . . . I93 
 
 XXIII. THE OPPRESSOR .... I98 
 
 XXIV. THE QUARREL . . . . .210 
 XXV. THE REVOLT OF TALALU . . . 2l6 
 
 XXVI. NAHl's MESSAGE .... 222 
 
 XXVII. ALREMa's SONG .... 228 
 
 XXVIII, "his heart's desire" . . . 235 
 
 XXIX. the TONGUE OF A WOMAN . . . 242 
 
 XXX. AFTER THE STORM . . . ZjC 
 
 XXXI. "mine the hand!" . . 25c 
 xxxii. nahi's revenge .... idi 
 
 XXXIII. the brew OF death . . . 271 
 
 XXXIV. "try TO FORGET THE PAST " . . 28 
 XXXV. THE LAST SHOT ON AFITA . . .29 
 
PART I 
 
 CHAPTER I 
 
 THE HEART OF A SAVAGE 
 
 IT was night at Tahiti, in the Society, Iskrid^. The 
 trade-wind had died away-^ and a bright ilcod, ct 
 shimmering moonlight poured dowji ypcn; the slumber- 
 ing waters of a little harbour a few miles distant from 
 Matavai Bay, and the white curve or beach that 
 fringed the darkened line of palms shone and glistened 
 like a belt of ivory under the effulgence of its rays. 
 For nearly half a mile the broad sweep of dazzling 
 sand showed no interruption nor break upon its surface 
 save at one spot ; there it ran out into a long narrow 
 point, on which, under a small cluster of graceful 
 cocos, growing almost at the water's edge, a canoe 
 was drawn up. 
 
 Seated upon the platform ot the outrigger, and con- 
 versing in low tones, were a man and woman. 
 
 The man was an European, dressed in the uniform 
 of a junior naval officer at the end of the last century. 
 He was of medium height, with a dark, gipsy-like 
 
 2 
 
2 THE MUTINEER 
 
 complexion and wavy brown hair, and as he drew the 
 woman's face to him and kissed her, her skin showed 
 not so dark as his. 
 
 The woman, or rather girl, was a pure-blooded 
 native, wearing only the island pareu of tappa cloth 
 about her loins and a snow-white teputa or poncho 
 of the same material over her gracefully-rounded 
 shoulders. The white man's right arm was round her 
 waist, she held his left hand in hers, and with her head 
 against his bosom looked up into his face with all the 
 passionate ardour of a woman who loves. 
 
 For a few moments the man ceased speaking and 
 ■ Looked anxipusly^ over his shoulder at a number of 
 white tents, pitched in a grove of breadfruit trees 
 :S()me fei\ hundred yai-ds away. 
 'As lielooked,th<i' moonlight shone upon the musket 
 barrel of a sentry, whose head could just be discerned 
 above the beach as he paced slowly to and fro before 
 the tents. 
 
 Bending her head of wavy, glossy black hair, the girl 
 pressed her lips softly upon the white man's hand, and 
 raising her face again, her eyes followed his, and as she 
 noticed his intent look, a curious, alarmed expression 
 came into her own lustrous orbs. 
 
 " What is it ? " she murmured. " Does the soldier 
 see us ? " 
 
 The man smiled reassuringly and shook his head ; 
 then still clasping the girl's waist within his arm, he 
 gazed earnestly into her beautiful face and sighed and 
 muttered to himself. 
 
 " Mahina," he said hesitatingly in the Tahitian 
 
THE IMAGE 3 
 
 tongue and speaking very softly, " you are a beautiful 
 woman." 
 
 The girl's lips parted in a tender smile, her eyes 
 glowed with a soft, happy light, and again she took 
 his hand in hers and kissed it passionately. 
 
 " My white lover," she murmured, " would that I 
 could tell thee in thine own tongue how I love thee. 
 But the language of Peretane ^ is hard to the lips of 
 us of Tahiti ; yet, in a little time, when thou hast learned 
 mine, thou wilt know all the great love that is in my 
 heart for thee, and then thou shalt tell me all that is in 
 thine for me." 
 
 The man drew her slender figure to his bosom again ; 
 although he spoke her tongue but indifferently and she 
 knew little of his, the ardent love which shone in her 
 eyes and illumined her whole face, made her meaning 
 plain enough. For a minute or so he remained silent, 
 then again the girl's eyes sought his and her hand 
 trembled as she noted the troubled, anxious look 
 deepening upon his features. 
 
 " Kirisiani," she said, stroking his sun-bronzed cheek, 
 "what is in thy mind to make this cloud come to thine 
 eyes ? " 
 
 " Mahina," he answered in English, " the time is 
 near now for us to part " ; then seeing that the girl did 
 not quite cornprehend, he repeated his words in the 
 native language. 
 
 " And wilt thou leave me who loveth thee, to sail 
 away with the white y/r/V,2 thy enemy ? " 
 
 "How can I help it? Am I not the King's officer ? 
 
 ' Britain. ^ An officer, a captain, or chief. 
 
4 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Did I yield to my love for thee and let the ship sail 
 without me, then in mine own land I should be held 
 up to scorn as a false man, and those of my name 
 would be shamed." 
 
 The girl slowly bent her head and put her hands 
 over her face ; then came a sudden, silent gush of tears. 
 For a while she sobbed softly, as only women sob when 
 some bright dream of love and happiness passes away 
 for ever. Then with a quick movement she freed 
 herself from the man's encircling arms, flung herself 
 upon her knees on the sand, raised her tear-dimmed, 
 starlike eyes to his, and spoke. 
 
 " Yet thou knowest we love thee ; and if thou wilt 
 remain with us my people will take thee to their 
 hearts, and thou shalt become a chief among us. For 
 see, I, Mahina, am of good blood, and there is no other 
 woman in the land that loves thee as I do. And thou 
 shalt have as many slaves as Tina, our chief, and like 
 him, be carried upon men's shoulders wherever thou 
 goest, so that thy feet shall not touch the ground." 
 
 The man took her hands from his knees and, passing 
 his arms around her, tenderly lifted her up to her seat 
 again. Then with his forehead resting upon his hand 
 he sat and thought. 
 
 " No, Mahina. It cannot be as thou desirest ; for 
 I am the King's servant, an y/r/7, and it would be 
 death to me were I to yield to my love for thee and flee 
 from the ship like one of the common sailors. Some 
 day I may return — when I am no longer serving in a 
 King's ship." 
 
 He was on the point of rising and bidding her return 
 
THE IMAGE 5 
 
 to her home in the native village which lay some 
 distance back from the cluster of tents, when she 
 sprang to her feet and stood before him with one hand 
 pressed to her panting bosom. 
 
 Barely eighteen years of age, her tall, slender figure, 
 as she stood in the flood of moonlight, showed all 
 the grace and beauty of perfect womanhood. Unlike 
 the generality of the Polynesian women (who possess in 
 their youth a faultless symmetry of figure rivalled by no 
 other race in the world, yet too often have somewhat 
 flattened faces), her features were absolutely perfect in 
 their oval regularity and beauty, and through the olive 
 skin of her cheek there now glowed a dusky red, and 
 her lover saw that her frame was shaking with over- 
 mastering passion as she strove to speak. Only once 
 before had Fletcher Christian seen her look like this — 
 when some of her girlish companions had coupled his 
 name with that of Nuia, the sister of Tina, the chief. 
 
 " Mahina," said her lover, stepping forward and 
 essaying to take her hand. 
 
 She drew quickly back, and made an almost 
 threatening gesture. 
 
 Christian paused irresolutely, for the look of scorn 
 and fury in the girl's eyes daunted and shamed him. 
 Then he spoke. 
 
 " Mahina, this is folly. Why art thou so angered 
 with me ? " 
 
 "Thou false white man!" she answered, and the 
 strange, hoarse break in her young voice startled him 
 — its melody and sweetness were changed into the 
 jarring accents of rage and wounded pride ; " touch 
 
6 THE MUTINEER 
 
 me no more," and here a quick, sobbing note sounded 
 in her throat. " Am I nothing to thee ? Is all my 
 beauty so soon dead to thee, and wilt thou put such 
 shame upon me r " 
 
 " Nay, Mahina, but listen " 
 
 " Why should I listen to thee, now that thou art 
 about to cast me off? Dost thou think that I am a 
 Tahitian woman, to be played with till thou hast tired 
 of me ; and then be given, with a laugh, to some 
 other white man on the ship — as I have seen done ? 
 Did I not tell thee once that though I was born in this 
 land of Tahiti my mother's mother came from the far 
 distant island of Afita — the island that springs up like 
 a steep rock from the blue depths of the unknown sea ? 
 And by her was my mother taught to despise these 
 dog-eaters of Tahiti ; and as my mother was taught, so 
 she taught me." 
 
 For the hundredth time since he had fallen under 
 the spell of the girl's beauty and succumbed to the 
 witchery of her ways and to the sound of her melting 
 voice, her white lover again felt that her presence 
 would overcome his resolution to part with her and 
 return to his hateful duty ; and for the hundredth 
 time he struggled to resist a fascination he knev/ 
 was fatal. So, not daring to look into the danger- 
 depths of her now tear-dimmed eyes, he spoke again 
 with seeming calm, but yet his face paled and flushed 
 and paled again at the sound of his own cold words. 
 He loved her, he said, but how could he escape from 
 the ship ? The punishment would be death. 
 
 " Death," she said ; " nay, not so, my lover, but life 
 
THE IMAGE 7 
 
 for us both. Listen to me, and I will show thee that 
 we shall never part again. And heed not the hot 
 words of anger that leapt from my heart " ; and then 
 with all the eloquence of her passionate nature she 
 unfolded to him a plan of escape, and as she spoke her 
 eyes and hands and lips came to the aid of her soft, 
 low voice. 
 
 "Mahina," and he turned from her abruptly and 
 walked to and fro upon the sand, with working face 
 and clenched hands, "let this end, girl ; I cannot do as 
 you wish." 
 
 "Ah," and again the tender voice became harsh and 
 the red spark came into the dark eyes, " then there is 
 some painted woman in thine own land whom 
 thou lovest — a woman such as is she whom we saw 
 on the ship — and it is for her thou hast cast me off." 
 
 "Why, you pretty fool," said the man in English, 
 with a laugh, as he took her hand, " are you like your 
 mother — offended at a silly jest ? Did not you cry with 
 the other girls, ' Huaheine no Peretane tnaitai^ '^ and 
 when you were told that it was but a figure of wax 
 did you not laugh with them ? " 
 
 "Ay," replied the girl, and her voice had a sullen 
 tone, " but how know I that this image, which thou 
 sayest was made by one of the sailors of the ship, is 
 not the image of one thou lovest in Peretane ? And 
 my mother hath told me that this image of the woman 
 with the hair like the sun and eyes like the ocean blue 
 is carried on the ship as a spell to keep the white 
 men's hearts hard to us women of Tahiti." 
 
 ' " The Englishwoman is good " (to look at). 
 
8 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " Nay," said the man, in Tahitian, " I tell thee no 
 lies, Mahina ; 'twas but a silly jest of the sailors. The 
 thing was the waxen head and shoulders of a woman, and 
 the sailors, to make the people laugh, made unto it a 
 body and wrapped it in garments and made pretence 
 that it was an Englishwoman. Thy countrymen knew 
 it was but a jest — but thy mother, who, lacking keen 
 vision, for she is old, was foolish enough to believe in 
 it ; so when she placed presents of mats and food at its 
 feet, all who saw laughed at her ; and because she was 
 angered at this hath she told thee this silly tale." 
 
 " Then, if the thing lives not, how is it that the 
 man who showed it to our people carries it with 
 him?" 
 
 " Thou silly little one ! know that in my country 
 there be men who are workers and dressers of men's 
 and women's hair, and such images as that which thou 
 hast seen are placed outside their dwellings so that 
 men may know their trade. And this man on the 
 ship dresses and curls and whitens the false heads of 
 hair that some of us wear by placing them on the head 
 of the image — for then is his task easy." 
 
 " Ah," she said in a whisper, " forgive me ; but tell 
 me that thou wilt not leave me." 
 
 " No, no, Mahina, tempt me not again ; it cannot 
 be. Good-night. Go to thy mother's house — and try 
 to forget me." Then, not daring to look into her 
 agonised face, he hurriedly embraced her and walked 
 quickly towards the tents. 
 
 " Go," said the girl, as she sank down with her 
 black mantle ot hair falling over her shoulders, " go. 
 
THE IMAGE 9 
 
 then, and see Mahina no more. It is because I am 
 not white that thou leavest me here with hunger in 
 my heart for thee." And as she heard the sound of 
 his footsteps over the loose pebbles some distance away, 
 followed by the sentry's challenge, she lay prone upon 
 the sand and wet it with a flood of anguished tears. 
 
CHAPTER II 
 
 THE CUTTING OF THE CABLE 
 
 SCARCE two cables' lengths away from the dark 
 fringe of palms which lined the white, shimmer- 
 ing beach, the Bounty lay motionless upon the placid, 
 reef-sheltered waters of the quiet little bay, her hempen 
 cable hanging straight up and down from hawse-pipe to 
 anchor, fifteen fathoms below her forefoot. From 
 the cabin windows a light in the captain's berth shot a 
 dulled gleam upon the darkened water under her 
 cumbrous stern, which the bright rays of moonlight 
 had not yet touched, for though the moon was full it 
 was not high, and the ship lay head to the south-east- 
 ward, with her bows toward the verdured slopes 
 of Orohena Mountain, whose mist-capped summit 
 towered seven thousand feet to the sky. Aloft, the 
 ship's black spars stood silhouetted against the snow- 
 white canvas bent in readiness for her departure ; for 
 in a day or two her long stay at Tahiti would come 
 to an end, and the bows of the little barque would be 
 turned southward for her voyage to the West Indies. 
 In the great cabin, the chief entrance to which was 
 
THE CUTTING OF THE CABLE ii 
 
 from the main deck, the moon-rays sent a stream of 
 li^ht through the open doors, and showed a strange 
 sight to see on shipboard. 
 
 Instead of being fitted up like a King's ship, or indeed 
 as a merchantman, the whole cabin space was filled 
 with young breadfruit plants. Reaching fore and aft 
 from the cabin doors to the transoms were five tiers of 
 stout shelving, built to receive the pots in which the 
 plants were placed ; while sloping upwards towards 
 the after part of the quarter deck from the transoms 
 themselves were five tiers more. Nearly all the 
 plants were fully-leaved, and a stray moonbeam now 
 and then pierced its way through them to strike 
 against and illumine the dark mahogany doors of the 
 rooms on either side of this strangely furnished cabin. 
 
 Nearly nine months before, the Bounty^ of 215 
 tons burden, had left Spithead for Tahiti under the 
 command of Lieutenant William Bligh, who had been 
 sailing-master with the great navigator Cook in the 
 Resolution. The ship which Bligh now commanded 
 was specially fitted to convey specimens of the bread- 
 fruit tree from Tahiti — the Otaheite of Cook — to 
 the West Indies, in the hope that the tree would there 
 take root and flourish and furnish as bountiful a food 
 supply to the negroes of those islands as it did to the 
 light, copper-coloured people of the isles of the Pacific. 
 
 Of the forty-six persons who sailed from Spithead 
 in the Bounty, all, save Fletcher Christian, the senior 
 master's mate, and a guard of four men who were on 
 shore, were at that moment on board ; and all, except 
 the anchor watch, were deep in slumber. 
 
12 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Walking to and fro on the forepart of the upper 
 deck was Edward Young, a square-built, dark-com- 
 plexioned man of twenty-two, and midshipman in 
 charge of the watch. For nearly an hour he had 
 thus paced the deck, glancing now at cloud-capped 
 Orohena, six miles away, and now at the white tents 
 of the shore party with the dark figure of the sentry in 
 the foreground. Presently he stopped and looked 
 intently towards another part of the beach where, an 
 hour before, he had seen two figures seated upon a 
 canoe which was drawn up on the hard, white sand ; 
 they were gone, but his quick eye discerned the smaller 
 of the two disappear among the coconut groves 
 towards the village of Papawa, while the taller person 
 walked quickly over to the largest of the four tents 
 and entered it. 
 
 "Ah," he said to himself, and an amused smile 
 flitted over his sallow features, "Master Fletcher 
 and Mahina, as I thought. He's badly love-smitten 
 with that girl ... no wonder he doesn't grumble at 
 doing duty over the breadfruit plants on shore, with 
 such a woman as that to sit by his side and charm him 
 with her sweet prattle. . . . Better to be at that than 
 doing this cursed dog-trot up and down in the moon- 
 light . . . and yet 'tis dangerous . . . aye, as dangerous 
 for him as it is for me to linger among these people so 
 long." _ 
 
 He sighed, and then baring his left arm, looked at 
 a name tatooed upon it lengthwise ; then with an 
 angry gesture of contempt, pulled down his sleeve, and 
 resumed his walk to and fro. 
 
THE CUTTING OF THE CABLE 13 
 
 " Dangerous ! Aye, indeed it is ! Else why should 
 I, a King's officer, and as proud a man as Fletcher 
 Christian — whom I call a fool — commit such folly as 
 this ? What would my fine uncle say did he know that 
 I had gone so far as to promise this girl, whose name 
 is on my arm, never to leave her. And though I do 
 leave her, is it less dishonourable for me to beguile her 
 with lies because my skin is white and hers is brown ? 
 Well, in a week or so, poor Alrema will have to learn 
 to forget me." 
 
 A cool breath of air touched his cheek, and looking 
 shoreward he saw the plumed palm-tops swaying 
 gently to and fro ; then again a smart puft' rippled 
 the glassy surface of the water between the ship and 
 the shore and swept seaward ; and Young saw the 
 black wall of a rain squall come fleeting down from 
 the dark shadow of the mountain. 
 
 Calling to the watch to stand-by, the young officer 
 picked up his oil-skin, which one of the men brought 
 him, put it on, and waited for the squall to strike the 
 ship. Ouickly it loomed down upon the line of palms, 
 the black cloud paling to a misty white as it drew 
 nearer ; then it rustled, then fiercely shook the waving 
 branches and drenched them with an ice-cold shower 
 ere it hummed and whistled through the Bounty's 
 cordage and sent her sharply astern, to tauten up her 
 cable as rigid as an iron bar. 
 
 " Pretty stiff while it lasts, Tom," said one of the 
 anchor watch to a messmate, as, ten minutes after- 
 wards, the tail end of the squall passed and the bright 
 moonlight again played upon the soaking decks. 
 
14 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " Damme, but I'd like to see a stifFer one come along 
 and part the cable, eh ? " 
 
 As the droning hum of the squall ceased and the 
 palm branches hung pendulous to rest again, a woman, 
 nude, except for the narrow girdle of leaves around her 
 waist, raised herself from the foot of a coconut tree 
 behind which she had crouched, and looked at the 
 ship. In her right hand was an open clasp kjiife. 
 She leant her back against the tree and gazed steadily 
 at the Bounty for nearly a minute, then with an angry 
 exclamation cast the knife from her into the sea. 
 
 " Fool that I was ! Why did I not cut the rope 
 through ? Even though the young Jrii had seen me 
 he would not have raised his hand to harm me, for he 
 too would gladly see the ship cast away and broken 
 upon the reef, so that he need not leave my cousin 
 Alrema." 
 
 An hour later, when daylight broke, Edward 
 Young, after calling the ship's company, again went 
 to the bows to take a look at the cable. It was his 
 last duty before reporting to his relief that all was 
 well, and then turning in. As he peered over the low 
 bows of the vessel he saw the hemp cable stretching 
 away down into the clear depths of the calm water. 
 In a moment his sailor's eye saw that all the strands 
 of the cable but one were parted. 
 
 His sallow face turned white, then flushed again, 
 and quickly walking aft he knocked at the door of 
 the state room occupied by Lieutenant William Bligh. 
 
 " Who is it ? " inquired a sharp, imperious voice ; 
 then ere the young man had given his name the cabin 
 
THE CUTTING OF THE CABLE 15 
 
 door opened and a man of medium height, little more 
 than thirty years old, stood facing the midshipman. 
 His features were clear cut and refined and of 
 singular whiteness — remarkable in one whose occu- 
 pation was the sea — and his complexion contrasted 
 strikingly with the jet black of his hair. 
 
 " The cable is nearly chafed through, sir, or the 
 strands have parted. There was a strong squall just 
 before dayligjit and the ship straijicd very heavily upon 
 it. I think " 
 
 "Keep your opinions to yourself. You are a damned 
 careless fellow, and not fit even to keep anchor watch. 
 Where is it chafed r " 
 
 " About a fathom below the water, sir," answered 
 the young man with an unsteady voice and an angry 
 gleam in his dark eyes. " When I looked just now it 
 was tautened out, and I saw that only one strand 
 remained." 
 
 " Bah," said the commander with a contemptuous 
 laugh; "and you have the audacity to attempt to 
 screen your carelessness by telling me it has chafed — 
 a couple of fathoms down from the hawse-pipe and in 
 fifteen fathoms of water ! The fact is, some of the 
 natives have been off in a canoe and cut it under your 
 nose. You ought to have prevented it. Were you 
 asleep on your watch, Mr. Young ? Answer me 
 quickly." 
 
 " I was not, sir," answered the young man quietly, 
 steadying his voice ; "and I will swear that no canoe 
 has come near the ship since I took charge of the deck. 
 I believe she brought up to her anchor so suddenly 
 
i6 THE MUTINEER 
 
 during the squall that the jerk caused the cable to 
 part." 
 
 " That will do. I will see to this matter myself. 
 You are all alike — every one of you. There is not an 
 officer in the ship that I can trust. Order my boat 
 away." 
 
 The angry, red flush in the commander's pale 
 cheeks and the steady glitter in his light blue eyes 
 boded ill to the young officer, whose own dark features 
 were dyed deep with repressed passion ; but by a 
 powerful effort he overcame the desire to hurl back 
 his superior officer's taunts, and saluting the captain 
 with a hand which trembled with rage, he withdrew. 
 
 In a quarter of an hour Bligh stepped out of his boat 
 on to the beach. Before he had walked a dozen paces 
 he was met with smiles of welcome by Moana and 
 Tina, two of the leading chiefs, as had ever been the 
 case during the many weeks of the Bounty s stay at the 
 island. 
 
 But instead of the outstretched hand of friendship 
 the angry officer gave them but a cold inclination of 
 his head, and passed them by. At the entrance to 
 the principal tent stood Fletcher Christian, who 
 saluted as the commander approached. 
 
 "Mr. Christian," and the moment the master's 
 mate heard the sharp, fierce ring in his captain's tones, 
 his jaw set firmly and his eye looked steadily into 
 Bligh's, " Mr. Christian, the cable has been cut. 
 Most providentially, however, despite the criminal 
 negligence of Mr. Young, the officer of the watch, 
 one strand was not severed. That, fortunately, held 
 
THE CUTTING OF THE CABLE [7 
 
 the ship ; otherwise she would now be lying on 
 the reef. I am determined that the culprit shall 
 be found and made an example of — as, by God ! he 
 shall." 
 
 " Very good, sir. Shall I send word for Tina and 
 the other chiefs to come to you ? " 
 
 "Why so, sir ? What reason have you to jump to 
 the conclusion that this piece of villainy is the work of 
 the natives ? " 
 
 "I cannot imagine, sir, who else should be 
 suspected." 
 
 "That is a matter of opinion. I have mine. But 
 as you have made the suggestion I will at least 
 put your uncalled-for suspicions to the test of 
 investigation." 
 
 " Pardon me, sir " began Christian, when Bligh 
 
 cut him short with an imperious gesture. 
 
 "Send for Tina." 
 
 In another minute a tall, stout, but handsome native 
 whose speaking countenance expressed the most timid 
 deference and respect, joined the captain and Chris- 
 tian. 
 
 "Tina," said Bligh, fixing his keen eyes upon the 
 chief's face, which already showed the deepest 
 concern, " what does this mean ? My ship's cable 
 has been cut. Some of your people have done it. 
 Let them be found instantly." 
 
 Like the simple child of nature that he was, the 
 chief clasped his hands beseechingly together, and the 
 quick tears welled up into his dark eyes ere he could 
 speak. 
 
 3 
 
1 8 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " What man is there of mine, oh friend of Tuti ^ and 
 friend of Tina, who would do thee or thine such wrong 
 as this ? " and then with the utmost distress depicted 
 on his face he beckoned to him a fine, handsome 
 woman of about thirty, and hurriedly spoke a few 
 words to her. As she quickly walked away to do his 
 bidding, he turned to Bligh, and in pleading accents 
 besought him to wait a little till his wife Aitia 
 returned. 
 
 The captain of the Bounty nodded, seated himselr 
 upon a stool which the sentry brought to him, and 
 waited. The chief's house was but a short distance 
 from the tents and soon the woman returned carrying 
 with her a framed picture of a naval officer. It was a 
 portrait of Captain Cook, painted by Webber in 1777, 
 which the great navigator had presented to the 
 Tahitians, and which they treated with as much 
 reverence as if it were a god. 
 
 " See," said the chief, taking the picture from 
 Aitia's hand, and the accents of perfect truth rang in 
 his voice, "see, this is Tuti," and he held it out 
 towards the two officers ; " would I, Tina, whom he 
 knew as Umu - his friend, and whose eyes love to look 
 upon this, his face which speaketh not, would I tell 
 thee lies ? Nay, oh chief, it is my mind that none of 
 my people have done this thing ; but yet who can tell 
 the wickedness that cometh into the hearts of men at 
 times ? And so now will I speak and seek if there 
 be a man among my people with such an evil heart, 
 and if there be then will I myself slay him before 
 
 ' Cook. " His former name of Umu had devolved upon his son. 
 
THE CUTTING OF THE CABLE 19 
 
 thee, so that the bitterness that is in my heart and 
 thine shall die away and be forgotten." 
 
 And then, before the officer could frame a reply to 
 the chiefs impassioned speech, Aitia was at his feet, 
 the tears streaming down her face while she repeated 
 her husband's protestations of love and affection for all 
 who came from the land of Peretane. 
 
 The earnest manner of the chief had its effect upon 
 the quick, impulsive temper of Bligh — a man who 
 could change in a moment from the violence of 
 intemperate passion to the most winning amiability of 
 manner. 
 
 In more gentle tones he replied that he was satisfied 
 that Tina would do his best to discover who had cut the 
 cable, although if the culprit were found he hoped he 
 would not go so far in punishing him as to take his 
 life. Then he turned to Christian, and altering the 
 suave tone in which he had addressed the chief, curtly 
 ordered him to take the boat's crews and load the 
 boats with plants. 
 
 Merely touching his hat, the master's mate repeated 
 the order to the coxswain of the boat near by and 
 turned away. 
 
 In an instant Bligh's pale cheek flushed angrily, and 
 he sprang to his feet. 
 
 " What the devil do you mean by receiving my 
 order in that manner ? Why don't you answer me 
 when I address you ? By heavens, sir, I will teach you 
 the respect due to your superior officer ! " 
 
 Christian turned and faced him ; and Bligh, hot 
 and furious as was his mood now, could not but notice 
 
20 THE MUTINEER 
 
 the repressed passion in his eyes and the paleness that 
 blanched his tanned cheeks, and realise that Fletcher 
 Christian was not a man to drive to desperation. 
 
 For a moment the younger man did not answer, 
 then the pallor of his countenance purpled with the 
 sudden rush of blood to his face, the thick black eye- 
 brows came together and his forehead showed two 
 deep furrows as he replied — and in his voice there was 
 no attempt to disguise the bitterness of heart within 
 him — 
 
 " I treat you, sir, with all the respect that the rules 
 of the Service demand; with the same courtesy" — and 
 here his tones rang with contemptuous sarcasm — " I 
 answer you as you show to me. Nothing, sir, shall 
 induce me to forget that I am compelled by my duty 
 to adopt that courtesy and respect. But, sir, beyond 
 that I will take care to be no more civil to you than 
 your treatment of me demands or justifies." 
 
 "Beware, sir; you are treading on dangerous 
 ground — you are mutinous ! I've half a mind to 
 make a prisoner of you and keep you under arrest until 
 we reach England. By heavens, sir, Fll stand none 
 of your insolence and misconduct ! You and every 
 other officer of the ship shall be brought up to the 
 mark and learn your duties." 
 
 But the master's mate made no reply, and walked 
 quietly away after the boat's crew ; and Bligh, his 
 frame trembling with passion, went towards the house 
 of Tina the chief. 
 
 Aided by the willing hands of the natives, men and 
 women, who had stood by listening with deep concern 
 
THE CUTTING OF THE CABLE 21 
 
 to the angry discussion between the two officers, the 
 boats' crews soon loaded their boats, and Christian was 
 left alone. Suddenly he felt a hand placed upon his 
 and a voice murmured — 
 
 " Kirisiani, dost know who cut the rope ? " 
 
 He started, and turned to meet the beautiful face of 
 the girl he had talked with during the night. 
 
 " Hush, Mahina, tell me not, else must I tell his 
 name to the captain — and that means death." 
 
 She laughed. "Thou knowest that it was I who 
 did it. And yet tell of it if thou so desirest. What 
 is death to me, my beloved, if thou leavest me ? Listen 
 — I will tell thee all. So that I might keep thee near 
 me always, and my eyes look into thine, from sunrise 
 to dark, and my hand lie in thine through the silence 
 of the night, I swam to the ship as the wind and rain 
 swept down from the dark valleys of Orohena, and 
 cut the rope." 
 
 " Mahina, Mahina, 'twas well for thee that the 
 chief of the ship is no friend of mine — even now 
 hot words passed between us — else would I tell him 
 'twas thee. With us, who are servants of the King of 
 Britain, no woman's love must count — our love to 
 him is first of all. Forget that thou hast ever seen 
 me." 
 
 She flung her arms round his neck and drew his 
 face down to hers. " Thou art mine — if thou leavest 
 in the ship then will I curse thee and die." 
 
 Ere he could say more, with an angry sob she had 
 gone. 
 
CHAPTER III 
 
 WHITE MEN AND BROWN WOMEN 
 
 TWO days had passed, and now as the departure 
 of the ship drew near the natives redoubled 
 their kindnesses to the Bounty's people. Christian, 
 with his morbid mind brooding over the scene 
 between himself and his commander, did his duty in 
 a dull, mechanical way and scarce spoke even to 
 Edward Young, the one man to whom his gloomy 
 nature sometimes relaxed. The parting, too, between 
 Mahina and himself had had its effect upon him and 
 he now clearly saw that, untutored savage as she was, 
 she was yet a tender, loving woman whose heart he 
 had cruelly tortured. " But," he reasoned with him- 
 self, "it cannot be helped. She will never see me 
 again, poor child. She will soon cast me out of her 
 memory." 
 
 A mile or two away from where the Bounty rode at 
 anchor, at a little village called Torea, Mahina and 
 Nuia, the handsome sister of Tina the chief, sat to- 
 gether with their arms clasped round each other's 
 waists. Mahina's eyes were wet with tears, but yet 
 
WHITE MEN AND BROWN WOMEN 23 
 
 there was shining through them the light of radiant 
 happiness. 
 
 " See, Nuia, how I have wronged thee ! Always, 
 always was my heart wrung by the idle words of those 
 who said that Kirisiani wavered in his love between 
 thee and mc." 
 
 Nuia laughed, and her bright, starlilce eyes looked 
 honestly into those of her friend. 
 
 " It is false. True, I once coveted him ; but soon 
 I saw it was for thee alone that he cared. And then 
 it was that Stcua ^ told me he loved me, and 'tis he 
 alone that I care for now ; and gladly will I help thee 
 to keep thy lover, even as do I desire to keep mine. 
 And listen now, while I tell thee how this shall be 
 done." 
 
 Then Nuia told her friend how some of the sea- 
 men with whom the women had tender relations had 
 declared for days their intention of deserting to the 
 mountains and there remaining until the Bounty sailed. 
 The women had promised to assist them, even though 
 they knew Tina would resent the act bitterly. They 
 trusted, however, that after Bligh was gone, the chief's 
 love for his sister would procure their pardon. Only 
 the previous day Nuia and Alrema and two other girls 
 named Ohuna and Ahi, who were devoted to two 
 seamen named Millward and Churchill, had arranged 
 to steal the ship's cutter during the night, land some 
 miles down the coast where they would be met by 
 Nuia and her companions, and make their way over 
 the mountains to Taravao — the peninsula that con- 
 ' George Stewart, midshipman. 
 
24 THE MUTINEER 
 
 nects the district of Taiarapu with Tahiti. Here they 
 were to conceal themselves till " the wrath of Tina 
 had ceased." 
 
 " To-night, oh friend of my heart," said Nuia, 
 placing her cheek against the bare bosom of her 
 friend and embracing her lovingly, " this shall be 
 done. Alrema's lover, Etuati, who hateth the chief of 
 the ship as bitterly as does thy Kirisiani, to-night 
 again keepeth the watch. He hath taken the hands 
 of these men in his and sworn to turn away his face 
 when they steal the boat ; and to-night, perhaps, 
 will my Steua escape from the ship and come to 
 me. Then, one by one, all those of the white men 
 that hate to leave this land of ours will hide away, and 
 the Arii Pirai ' will trouble not, for in Taravao it 
 will be hard for him to seek them ? " 
 
 A fierce light shone in Mahina's eyes. " True, how 
 could he ? And yet it would please me better could I 
 see Pirai dead. For ever is he saying bitter words to 
 the man I love." 
 
 Nuia looked at her companion for a moment, then 
 rose, and, going to a corner of the house, reached her 
 hand up to the thatch ; then she took down a pistol 
 and gave it to her friend. 
 
 " See, this is the little gun that Pirai the captain gave 
 to my brother Tina. To-night Alrema gives it to her 
 lover, who hath sworn to kill Pirai some day for the 
 foul words he ever gives him, even as he speaks foul 
 words to thy lover." 
 
 Then the two girls separated — Nuia to give the 
 
 ' Captain Bligh. 
 
WHITE MEN AND BROWN WOMEN 25 
 
 pistol into Alrema's hand for Young, and Mahina to 
 watch for her lover, should Christian come ashore in 
 the evening. 
 
 At one o'clock next morning Edward Young was 
 again keeping anchor watch. It was dark and rainy 
 and no one else was to be seen on deck but the sentry 
 — ^John Millward. Presently Young felt a hand on 
 liis shoulder, and heard the voice of Churchill, the 
 ship's corporal — " Mr. Young ! " 
 
 " For heaven's sake be careful, Churchill ! Are 
 you all ready ? " 
 
 " Yes, we've got the second cutter alongside. 
 Muspratt is in her. We've eight muskets and six 
 bags of powder and ball. Five of the muskets and 
 some ammunition will be hidden by Alrema, who 
 will be watching for you to escape. Why don't you 
 come now, sir r There are half a dozen others ready 
 to do so ! " 
 
 " No, no, not now. I must get away alone. 
 Alrema will let you know when." 
 
 " Goodbye, sir," whispered Churchill. 
 
 The midshipman pressed his hand, and the corporal 
 stepped softly along the deck, till he reached the spot 
 v/here Millward the sentry stood, peering anxiously 
 out into the gloom which enveloped the ship. A 
 quick gesture from Churchill, and the two figures 
 dropped quietly over the side and were gone. 
 
 For some minutes Young looked for the boat 
 through the darkness, as those in her pulled with 
 muffled oars towards the shore. 
 
 " That's satisfactory," muttered the young man to 
 
26 THE MUTINEER 
 
 himself; " that's something for our amiable and worthy 
 commander to think over at breakfast." 
 
 Lieutenant Bligh did think over it at breakfast ; 
 and soon Young was in irons and awaiting a pro- 
 mised flogging for " being asleep on his watch and 
 allowing the damned scoundrels to desert," as his 
 commander forcibly expressed it. 
 
 Four days afterwards, as Christian made his rounds 
 of the ship he came upon Young, still in leg irons, 
 waiting, with deadly hatred in his heart, for Bligh to 
 visit him. 
 
 In the bosom of his shirt lay Tina's pistol, and as 
 the figures of Christian and a seaman darkened the 
 entrance to the stuffy cabin his fingers clutched the 
 weapon savagely. 
 
 " They are all taken, Young," muttered his superior 
 oflScer ; "they gave themselves up to Bligh this morn- 
 ing, and are now on board. I wish with all my heart 
 I could set you free, for Bligh swears he will flog you." 
 
 "And I swear, Christian, that he shall die if he 
 attempts it. My God ! are we Englishmen or slaves ? " 
 
 Christian shook his head gloomingly, and with a 
 pitying look at the young man, went on deck, passing 
 on his way the manacled figures of the three captured 
 men. They lay together in the sail locker, their 
 backs raw and bleeding from the four dozen lashes 
 which they had each received in the morning. 
 
 Their dreams of and dash for liberty had been 
 brief. Landing at the spot agreed upon, Nuia and 
 her two friends, Ohuna and Ahi, met them with the 
 warmest demonstrations of affection and loyalty ; then 
 
WHITE MEN AND BROWN WOMEN 27 
 
 they learned with alarm that Oripah and Tamiri, two 
 of Tina's subsidiary chiefs, had forbidden the people in 
 any way to aid or shelter them ; and that Tina himself 
 had bitterly reproached his sister Nuia for her share in 
 the conspiracy — for by some means the whole plan of 
 escape had been made known to him. Then after a 
 hurried discussion the three deserters, accompanied by 
 Ahi and another girl named Tahinia, set out again for 
 Tetuaroa, a group of low-lying coral islands twenty- 
 eight miles from where the Bounty lay. There they 
 hoped to be free from interference ; for the chief of 
 the islands, Miti, was related to Tahinia. 
 
 But when half-way across a furious squall drove 
 them back to the mainland. Landing at a village 
 called Tetaha the deserters remained hidden till they 
 were surprised by Bligh and a boat's crew ; and although 
 they were prepared to fight to the last, the girls, to 
 their surprise, begged them to surrender. 
 
 " Milwa," said Nuia to Millward, the moment they 
 saw Bligh approaching, accompanied by his boat's 
 crew and Tina, " waste neither these men's blood nor 
 thine. Yield — and I, Nuia, swear that the ship shall 
 not take thee away." 
 
 Relying on the repeated assurances of the girls, 
 who wept in the earnestness of their beseechings, the 
 three deserters came out of the house and stood before 
 Bligh and his party. 
 
 " Surrender, you villains ! " he cried. 
 
 " Aye, aye, sir, we surrender," answered Churchill ; 
 and under his breath he said to his companions — " to 
 be free again before long." 
 
28 THE MUTINEER 
 
 When the men were brought on board, Bligh, 
 whose face was livid with passion, turned to Fletcher 
 Christian. 
 
 " Muster the hands, Mr. Christian. I'll show you 
 and the others like you whether I will tolerate this 
 spirit of mutiny and disregard of my orders." 
 
 Then in sullen silence the ship's company were 
 mustered on the main deck to witness the flogging of 
 the deserters. 
 
 As the bleeding form of Muspratt, the last to be 
 punished, and the greatest sufferer, was led away from 
 the gratings, one of the boatswain's mates named 
 Morrison said to the midshipman Stewart in a low 
 voice : " I'm glad, sir, I wasn't picked on to flog poor 
 Bill Muspratt. My God, sir, how long is this to go 
 on ? The men are bordering on mutiny. Last night 
 the captain took away every present of food given to 
 us by the natives and said that it was his, and that 
 every one on the ship, from the master down, was a 
 damned thief." 
 
 Stewart gave him a warning glance as he answered 
 in a whisper : " Don't talk to me, Morrison ; if the 
 captain sees you it means the cat." 
 
 Ten minutes later, as Christian was employed in 
 hoisting in the cutter, Bligh's imperious tones were 
 heard asking for him. 
 
 " Mr. Christian," said the captain, walking up to 
 where the master's mate stood, and his voice quivered 
 with rage, " I find that you had the audacity to send 
 a coconut to that scoundrel Young to drink just now. 
 By the Lord, sir, do you want me to send you to join 
 
WHITE MEN AND BROWN WOMEN 29 
 
 him ? " And then with a passionate gesture he 
 turned on his heel and again sought his cabin. 
 
 The master's mate, with blazing eyes and face 
 white with anger, turned and looked at the seamen 
 who stood around him with their hands on the boat- 
 falls. Not a word escaped his lips, but in their eyes 
 he read their dangerous sympathy. 
 
 That night Bligh slept ashore at Tina's house, and 
 when all but the anchor watch were asleep a canoe 
 glided gently alongside, and Mahina and Alrema 
 stepped on deck and were met by their lovers. 
 Young had secretly been released from his irons by 
 Christian the moment Bligh had left the ship. For 
 some hours the four conversed earnestly together, then 
 just as the first grey streaks of dawn began to pierce 
 the horizon the girls embraced the two men tenderly 
 and went quietly back to their canoe. 
 
 Down below, as Christian was replacing the hand- 
 cuffs on Young's wrists, the midshipman gripped his 
 companion's arm. 
 
 " Christian," he said, " as God is my judge I intend 
 to keep faith with that girl, even if it costs me my life ; 
 and vou, Christian, are you made of stone ? Can you 
 leave Mahina — to lead such a life as we are made to 
 live ? " 
 
 The master's mate dashed Young's arm aside. 
 " For God's sake, man, don't ask me. My brain is 
 on fire," and for a minute or two he walked quickly 
 to and fro, seemingly oblivious of the other's presence. 
 Then he stopped suddenly and faced Young with a 
 short, bitter laugh. 
 
30 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " That all depends on what happens. If BHgh 
 treats me as a man ... I will pocket his past 
 insults . . . and prove a cruel, heartless scoundrel 
 to that poor girl. If he does not . . ." 
 
 He finished the sentence with a gesture of despair, 
 and went on deck. 
 
CHAPTER IV 
 
 cc 
 
 THE FIRST SAILING OF THE "BOUNTY 
 
 THE time to say farewell had come at last, and 
 from early dawn the beach was crowded with 
 natives. For two days the genial, kindhearted people 
 had entertained their white friends with their simple 
 sports, and the crew of the Bounty — save for those 
 who lay ironed and sweltering in her 'tween decks — 
 were given liberty by their stern captain. Sometimes 
 in the midst of the mirth and song that prevailed 
 during the hivas or dancing of the natives, strange 
 spells of silence would fall, and Tina the chief and his 
 stately wife would, with tears streaming from their eyes, 
 leave the assembled throng and retire to their house. 
 Tender-hearted, simple, and affectionate, they had con- 
 ceived for Bligh, despite his occasional outbursts of 
 passion and his severe treatment of the ship's company, 
 a sincere and lasting respect ; and that evening, when he 
 came ashore dressed in his full uniform, with his sword 
 by his side, smiling in that engaging manner which 
 seemed so natural to him at times, even those few of 
 the natives who feared and disliked him for his 
 
 31 
 
32 THE MUTINEER 
 
 tyranny, demonstrated at least their respect for his rank 
 and position in the most marked and earnest manner. 
 
 Long past midnight the singing and dancing con- 
 tinued, and Bligh, as he stood on the beach, grasping 
 the hands of Tina and Aitia in his, was content. 
 Nearly two-thirds of his crew were ashore, and now 
 as he stood there watching he saw them taking fare- 
 well of their native friends, who with the most extra- 
 vagant demonstrations of sorrow, begged them to 
 remain till the morning. He had no suspicion that 
 this was assumed and that nearly half of his men had 
 whispered to some taio (male friend) or pretty girl, 
 " We will return soon." 
 
 " Good-night," he said to the chief, holding out his 
 white hand again, "good-night, Tina and Aitia. 
 Remember that to-morrow, soon after daylight, we 
 sail. Yet I shall be pleased to see you in the morn- 
 ing." 
 
 Then the boatswain's whistle sounded for the men 
 to return to the boats, and amid the weeping of those 
 of the islanders who did not know what Mahina and 
 the other women knew, Bligh and his men called out 
 their farewells and pulled towards the ship. 
 
 But with the first signs of dawn, those on board, 
 looking shoreward, saw a vast concourse of natives on 
 that part of the beach nearest the Bounty; and every 
 few minutes numbers of people of both sexes were 
 arriving through the palm-groves from inland villages, 
 carrying gifts of fruit and native clothing, intended 
 as parting presents for the voyagers. The waters, too, 
 of the little bay were alive with canoes ; many of them 
 
THE FIRST SAILING OF THE "BOUNTY" 33 
 
 had come from the distant villages of Taiarapu, a 
 day's journey, laden to the water's edge with simple 
 tokens of affection for Bligh and his crew. As the 
 canoes passed under the Bounty s stern on their way to 
 the shore the people in them were much affected 
 when they noted the unmistakable signs of the ship's 
 departure. They had daily heard for a month past 
 from Bligh 'himself that he hoped to sail on the 
 following day, but the continued delays seemed to 
 have inspired them with hope ; the Bounty's people, 
 they believed, had become so attached to their island 
 friends that they could not part from them, and it was 
 even possible, to their simple minds, that Bligh would 
 abandon the mission on which he was sent by the 
 unknown King of England. 
 
 Sitting a little apart from the others and apparently 
 taking no heed of the bustle around them, the girls 
 Mahina and Nuia conversed with each other in low 
 tones. Alrema, although accused by Tina of helping 
 his sister in aiding the seamen to desert, had been 
 forgiven, and was just then, with Aitia, conveying to 
 Bligh a farewell present of two handsome par ah or 
 mourning dresses, which were to be given to King 
 George. 
 
 " Mahina," and Nuia placed her hand on her friend's 
 shoulder, " all will yet be well. Why look so sad ? 
 Dost thou doubt our lovers' promises ? See, only a 
 little while ago, Alrema went on board to see her 
 lover Etuati — he who is now bound with iron rings 
 on his hands and feet — and this he said to her : 'Tell 
 those that love us that we will return to Tahiti ere a 
 
 4 
 
34 THE MUTINEER 
 
 moon has passed.' Come, my friend, let us go to the 
 ship for the last time." 
 
 By this time the Bounty was surrounded by hundreds 
 of canoes, and her decks were thronged with natives 
 who, each man singling out his particular taio., or v/hite 
 friend, pressed upon his acceptance some farewell gift. 
 Bligh, standing on the quarter deck, was conversing 
 with Aitia and her husband, and behind him stood a 
 boatswain's mate holding in his arms two muskets and 
 two pistols, with bags of powder and ball. These 
 were a gift from the commander to Aitia, whose skill 
 as a markswoman rendered the gift specially pleasing 
 and valuable. 
 
 Raising his hat, and addressing her as if she were 
 some great English lady, the captain of the Bounty said 
 that the gifts were in token of his own personal liking 
 for her and her husband, and as a proof of the friend- 
 ship of the king of Great Britain. Then, while a 
 respectful silence fell upon every one on board, the 
 stately Aitia touched her forehead with the weapons 
 one after another, and flinging herself at Bligh's 
 feet clasped them in her hands and wept. 
 
 Gently disengaging her hands the commander 
 straightened his slender figure, and his sharp tones 
 rang out : " Clear the decks, Mr. Christian ; and you, 
 Tina, ask your people to get into their canoes. Aitia, 
 goodbye ; Tina, goodbye." 
 
 Christian, who had just bidden a hurried, passionate 
 farewell to Mahina, sprang to the ship's forecastle and 
 then some of the seamen manned the little capstan ; 
 the fiddler took his seat upon its head and scraped a 
 
THE FIRST SAILING OF THE "BOUNTY" 35 
 
 dismal tune, every now and then breaking off in the 
 middle of a bar to wave his bow to some Tahitian 
 friend whom he knew, as he or she went over the side 
 to a canoe. The ship was already hove short ; and a 
 few fathoms of the great hemp cable flaked upon the 
 deck soon brought the anchor to the cathead. The 
 topsails bellied out as the wind filled them ; the men 
 sprang aloft to man the yards at the word of command 
 from Bligh, who had explained to Tina that with this 
 ceremony and the firing of guns the ships of King 
 George saluted the sovereigns of other nations ; but as 
 the gun-firing might injure the breadfruit plants on 
 board it would be omitted. The sailors aloft gave a 
 last cheer, the water began to ripple and bubble under 
 the bluiF bows of the Bounty and from the crowd of 
 sorrowing people burst a cry of " loarana no ti atua 
 t't " (" May the gods protect thee for ever and 
 ever"). 
 
 A pufF rippled across the bay, the ship lay over to it 
 and sped quickly towards the passage between the roar- 
 ing lines of surf which leapt and seethed upon the 
 shelving ledges of coral reef. In another five minutes 
 the vessel's bows rose and fell to the sweep of the ocean 
 swell, and the Bounty stood out into the open sea. 
 
 Then those who watched from the shore saw her 
 square her yards and head to the south, for Bligh 
 intended to call at the Friendly Islands before proceed- 
 ing to the West Indies. Hour after hour, and still the 
 people watched the lessening canvas of the ship sink 
 below the horizon. Towards noon the breeze failed, 
 gnd not till the green shadows of the mountains turned 
 
36 THE MUTINEER 
 
 into a soft purple under the rays of the setting sun was 
 the white speck lost to sight. 
 
 Then Mahina and Nuia, who were the last to go, 
 turned sadly away and went home to their dwellings 
 of thatch to wait and hope. 
 
CHAPTER V 
 
 THE LAST STRAW 
 
 FOR thirteen days the Bounty had sailed westward 
 over a placid sea, the light south-east trades 
 which filled her canvas scarce causing more than a 
 noiseless ripple under her forefoot. On the morning of 
 the fourteenth day she sailed through a cluster of low- 
 lying, richly-verdured islands — the Namulca Group, 
 and dropped her anchor in ten fathoms, in the clear, 
 motionless waters of a reef-enclosed spot oflF the main 
 island. The day was beautifully fine but intensely 
 hot, and the dying wind gave the ship scarcely way 
 enough to bring her to an anchor. 
 
 In a very short time Bligh had opened communica- 
 tion with the natives of Namuka — a fierce, muscular 
 race, who, however, professed friendship, agreeing to 
 let him procure such supplies as he wanted from the 
 island, and promising their assistance in wooding and 
 watering the ship. The calm and dignified manner 
 of the commander seemed to impress the savage, in- 
 tractable, and treacherous Tongans as it had tiie gentle 
 
 37 
 
38 THE MUTINEER 
 
 and kindly-natured Tahitians ; and Bligh again 
 showed those peculiar phases of his character which 
 made him treat even the most dangerous natives 
 with humanity and forbearance, and yet toward his 
 officers and crew behave with undeserved, terrible 
 severity. 
 
 As soon as the captain returned on board, in sharp, 
 fretful tones he ordered the boats away ; one under the 
 command of Mr. Nelson, the botanist, and another 
 with Christian in charge, to wood and water the ship. 
 
 For some hours the work went on without inter- 
 ference, till the natives, all of whom were armed with 
 spears, clubs, and slings, began to surround the white 
 men and steal everything they could lay their hands 
 upon. Some of them actually took the casks of water 
 from Christian's men and rolled them away into the 
 coconut groves. Every moment their demeanour 
 became more threatening and their insulting gestures 
 and language were so unmistakable that Christian got 
 his men together in order to cover the boats, and 
 then paused irresolutely as to his next course of action. 
 For Bligh had given orders that no matter how the 
 natives behaved they were not to be molested, and on 
 no excuse were they to be fired upon. 
 
 In a few minutes their numbers had so increased 
 that they began to show signs of making a rush upon 
 Christian's scanty force, evidently mistaking his for- 
 bearance for fear ; and soon some hundreds of them 
 attempted to cut him off from the boats. It was only 
 at this juncture that he gave orders to fire a volley 
 over the heads of the now advancing and yelling body 
 
THE LAST STRAW 39 
 
 of savages. To this they responded with derisive 
 jeers, shaking their spears and clubs and calling out 
 '' Mate ! mati ! " ("Kill! kill!"). 
 
 With great difficulty Christian got his men back 
 into the boats without injury being inflicted on either 
 side, and reported himself to Bligh, who severely 
 reprimanded him. 
 
 Wiping the beads of perspiration from his face, the 
 young man replied to his commander's censure : " It 
 is impossible, sir, to carry on the duty unless some 
 steps are taken to prevent the landing party from 
 being cut ofF by the natives." 
 
 " You are a damned cowardly lot of fellows ! " 
 sneered Bligh ; " and is it possible that you, Mr. 
 Christian, an officer in the King's Service, are afraid of 
 a troop of savages while you and your men have fire- 
 arms ? " 
 
 Christian's face paled and his limbs shook as if in a 
 fit of ague : " Our arms are of no avail, sir, while you 
 forbid their use." 
 
 " Carry on the work and don't attempt to argue 
 with me," was the contemptuous answer. 
 
 So with wrath eating his heart out Christian went 
 back to his task, and by almost superhuman endurance 
 and forbearance managed to complete the wooding 
 and watering of the ship. 
 
 At last the work was finished, and the Bounty once 
 more at sea, and on the afternoon of the 26th of April 
 she lay becalmed between Namuka and the island of 
 Tofoa, whose sharp-pointed volcanic cone could be 
 seen thirty miles away, with thin blue curls of smoke 
 
40 THE MUTINEER 
 
 ascending from its hidden fires into the windless 
 atmosphere, while the sea was of glassy calmness and 
 the ship drifted steadily to the eastward. 
 
 Pacing to and fro upon the quarter deck, with the 
 red fury spot showing upon his pale cheeks, the 
 captain presently said, in his quick, angry way, as his 
 eye glanced along the deck — 
 
 " Morrison, send Mr. Christian here." 
 
 It was Fletcher Christian's watch on deck, and he 
 at once responded. 
 
 " Mr. Christian, what has become of the pile of 
 drinking coconuts which was stowed between the 
 guns ? Some scoundrel has taken them. I demand 
 to know who was the person ! " 
 
 " I cannot tell you, sir, what has become of them." 
 
 " You mean you will not. By heavens, sir, you 
 shall ! I have no doubt that whoever took them did 
 so with the sanction of the officers." 
 
 A lump rose in Christian's throat and his voice 
 sounded hoarsely. 
 
 " I think, sir, that you are mistaken." 
 
 " We shall see ! Pass the word for all the officers 
 to come on deck." 
 
 In a few minutes they were all assembled, and 
 Bligh, now in a fever heat of unreasoning passion, 
 attacked them in the same manner. For some seconds 
 no one answered ; then Fryer the master, and Christian 
 and Young assured him each in turn that they had 
 not seen any of the men take the coconuts. 
 
 "Then," said Bligh, and his thin, clean-cut lips 
 curled contemptuously, "you have taken them your- 
 
THE LAST STRAW 41 
 
 selves ! Mr. Elphinstone," turning to the junior 
 master's mate, " bring every coconut in the ship on 
 deck." 
 
 " Now," went on Bligh, as four or five seamen 
 came on the poop carrying bunches of coconuts, 
 which they placed in heaps on the deck, " please tell 
 me, each of you, which of these heaps you individually 
 claim." 
 
 The officers spoke in turn, and then but one heap of 
 coconuts remained — that belonging to Christian. 
 
 " Is this yours, Mr. Christian ? " said Bligh, in a 
 voice trembling with passion. 
 
 " I really do not know, sir. It is difficult to tell 
 one pile of coconuts from another ; but I hope you 
 don't think me mean enough to steal yours." 
 
 " By God, sir, I do ! You must have stolen these 
 from me or you could give a better account of them ! 
 You infernal rascals ! You are all thieves alike and 
 combine with the men to rob me. I will flog you all 
 and make some of you jump overboard before we reach 
 Endeavour Straits." 
 
 Calling Samuel his clerk, Bligh ordered all the grog 
 to be stopped, and only half a pound of yams to be 
 served to each officer's mess in the future — and a 
 quarter of a pound only if a single yam was missed. 
 And then, his handsome features distorted with rage, 
 and muttering curses, he turned upon his heel and 
 went below. 
 
 The officers stood and eyed each other with anger 
 and amazement, and began to complain audibly ; but 
 Christian, with a strange look in his dark eyes, ordered 
 
42 THE MUTINEER 
 
 them in a hoarse and broken voice, some to their 
 duty, others to their watch below. 
 
 When eight bells struck he was relieved by the 
 master and went to his cabin. 
 
 And Edward Young, as he watched Fletcher 
 Christian pass him, with his hands clenched and his 
 face blanched to a deathly white, smiled to himself and 
 said, " It is the last straw." 
 
CHAPTER VI 
 
 THE RUBICON 
 
 WHEN Christian reached his cabin he threw 
 himself upon his ssa-chest — almost the only 
 article of furniture that the place contained — and 
 cursed aloud his wretched existence. He thought of 
 the long voyage before him, each day wearisome 
 enoi'gh even if spent in agreeable companionship with 
 his fellows, but a very purgatory with such a man as 
 Bligh to goad him every hour with foul language 
 and petty insults. 
 
 His gloomy reflections were broken in upon by a 
 Voice asking permission for the speaker to enter. 
 
 "What do you want ? " he asked angrily. 
 
 A seaman drew aside the canvas screen. 
 
 " The captain sends his compliments, sir, ana 
 requests the pleasure of your company to supper." 
 
 Christian sprang to his feet, his face flaming with 
 passion. " Tell him to go to the devil and take his 
 supper in the only company he is fit for." 
 
 Alexander Smith, the sailor who had brought the 
 message, for a moment stared in astonishment, yet 
 
 43 
 
44 THE MUTINEER 
 
 waited in respectful silence. This was the first time 
 during all the long voyage that an officer had so far 
 forgotten himself as to express his feelings about the 
 commander before a common seaman. With the 
 seamen themselves such outbursts were frequent 
 enough, but here was an officer — the senior master's 
 mate, the third man in rank in the ship — ordering a 
 common sailor to tell his commander to go to the 
 devil, the only fit company for him ! 
 
 Smith was a young man of twenty-two, the son of 
 a Thames lighterman ; but he had been born with 
 brains, and had taught himself to read and write, 
 while his mother had brought him up to do his duty 
 and respect his superiors in that old fashion which is 
 good. This was his first voyage in a King's ship, 
 but he knew what was due from Christian to his 
 commander. 
 
 So, instead of smiling, either openly or covertly, at 
 Christian's rage, he thought for a moment, pulled 
 awkwardly at a lock of his hair, gave a slight cough, 
 and said — 
 
 " Begging your pardon, Mr. Christian, did you say 
 that I was to tell the captain you felt too poorly, and 
 kindly asked to be excused ? " 
 
 Christian glanced quickly at him, and then forgot 
 his anger. The sailor was not much to look at, a 
 strongly-built fellow below the middle height, with 
 his face pitted deeply from the effects of small-pox, 
 and his naked chest disfigured with tatoo marks — a 
 coarse, rough seaman in dress and appearance, a 
 gentleman in instincts — and, above all, a man. 
 
THE RUBICON +5 
 
 " Smith, you're a good fellow to bring me up with a 
 round turn like that ! Give me your hand, and deliver 
 your own message, and accept my gratitude ! " And 
 the officer grasped the sailor's hand and wrung it 
 warmly. 
 
 " Aye, aye, sir," and Smith's honest tones 
 trembled with pleasure, for he liked and respected 
 the young man, and felt proud of having thus won 
 his confidence. " A few months longer, sir, and it'll 
 be all serene with us." Then, with a respectful 
 salute, he was gone. 
 
 The master's mate sat down again on the chest, 
 and leant his cheek upon his hands. The last words 
 of Smith — " a few months longer " — had once more 
 set his brooding mind to work. 
 
 He rose to his feet again ; the close, hot atmosphere 
 of his stuffy quarters seemed to oppress and choke him, 
 and his brain was dulled and aching with the misery in 
 his heart. He stepped out, and, gaining the deck 
 quietly, leant upon the bulwarks and looked moodily 
 over the star-lit ocean to where the steep cone of 
 Tofoa upreared its darkened form three thousand feet 
 in the air. It was the first dog-watch, when on ship- 
 board men sing and make merry ; but on this ship 
 came no sounds of violin or choruses of seamen, for 
 all, officers and men alike, were sullen and gloomy, 
 and brooded over the incidents of the past few 
 days. 
 
 The wind was very light, and the ship scarce held 
 steerage way ; everything was still, and the grave- 
 like silence oppressed the man. Now and then a 
 
46 THE MUTINEER 
 
 gleam of red, smoky flame would flash in the sky to 
 the eastward, and a strange, dulled muttering would be 
 borne over the waters as the raging forces pent up in 
 black Tofoa boiled and seethed within its groaning 
 heart. The sight possessed a fascination for him, and 
 for nearly half an hour he stood and watched the 
 shooting dull-red flame and listened to the awful 
 sounds which broke from the mountain in the 
 violence of its convulsions. 
 
 Presently he changed his attitude of dejection, and 
 his eye lightened. 
 
 "Ten miles away," he muttered, gazing at the 
 dark shape of Tofoa, "and there are beaches on the 
 west side where landing is easy, and a network of low 
 islets within another six leagues. By heavens, I'll risk 
 it ! Anything is better than this — better, even, the 
 jaws of a shark ! " 
 
 He went quietly forward and collected a number of 
 boat-oars and some hand-spikes from the racks ; these 
 he brought to a place in the after part of the ship, 
 where he was not likely to be seen, and began to lash 
 them together. 
 
 He was interrupted suddenly by Young. "What 
 the h — 1 are you doing. Christian ? " 
 
 "I am making a raft." 
 
 " A raft ? " 
 
 " Yes, a raft." 
 
 « Why ? What for ? " 
 
 " Because, Young, I can stand this no longer. I 
 am about to try and make Tofoa on this raft." 
 
 " Madness ! You could never reach there, even 
 
THE RUBICON 47 
 
 if there were no sharks. There is a fearful current 
 setting to the westward." 
 
 "I don't care. Sharks are better company than 
 this infernal tyrant. Why, do you know, Young, 
 that the damned, pitiful scoundrel actually invited me 
 to sup with him to-night, no doubt thinking to 
 propitiate me for the insults of this afternoon." 
 
 "Oh, well, you've suffered no more than I. But 
 still, this is sheer madness. Christian. You are not, 
 surely, such a fool as to incur all the odium of 
 becoming a deserter, for what ? — to be turned into 
 shark's meat ! " 
 
 " Don't argue with me, Young," he answered 
 fiercely. " I've made up my mind to get out of this 
 floating hell, and I mean to leave the ship either in the 
 first or middle watch. You know of my intention. 
 If you think it your duty, tell the gentle Bligh." 
 
 Young laughed. " Not I, Christian. I'll not 
 move in the matter, except to dissuade you from 
 such folly." 
 
 " Cease, cease, my dear fellow ; it is too late. 
 Either this, or I put an end to my life. But if your 
 sympathies are with me, do me this favour — go to the 
 steward and on some pretence or other get me food. 
 Put it in a bag with some nails and hoop-iron and 
 beads, or anything likely to take the fancy of the 
 natives, and bring it to me." 
 
 Young at once went away, and procuring a canvas 
 bag put in it food, some bottles of water, and a few 
 articles for barter. But at the same time he told the 
 boatswain's mate of Christian's watch and the officers 
 
48 THE MUTINEER 
 
 in charge of the first and middle watches, and begged 
 them to keep the matter secret, but on no account to 
 give the young man an opportunity of carrying out 
 his rash project, "for," said he earnestly, "Mr. 
 Christian is not in a fit state to leave the ship ; the 
 man is ill in mind and body, and not responsible for 
 his actions." 
 
 Slowly the night passed, and more than once 
 Christian came on deck with the intention of putting 
 his idea of escape into practice ; but he always found 
 some one ready to talk to him, and so no opportunity 
 came. At half-past three he gave up all further 
 attempts, and sick in mind, lay down in his bunk. 
 Then eight bells struck, and he was called by Stewart 
 to take the morning watch. 
 
 As Stewart turned to go on deck he pressed 
 Christian's hand sympathetically, and said in a low 
 voice, " Mr. Christian, I know your design. For 
 God's sake, sir, try to have patience, and give up 
 your intention. If you carry it out, it only means a 
 dreadful death." 
 
 " I will make no further attempt to-night, at least," 
 he answered, in a strange, husky voice ; but he gave 
 the midshipman's hand a firm grip. 
 
 For some minutes he sat upon his sea-chest, with 
 his face buried in his hands, thinking ; and the darkness 
 of the night, the hoarse mutterings and muffled 
 thunder from distant Tofoa, found a responsive echo 
 in his maddened brain. 
 
 The signs of dawn were reddening the horizon as 
 Christian reached the deck ; and the black pall of smoke 
 
THE RUBICON 49 
 
 which had hovered over Tofoa's lofty peak was 
 vanishing before the breath of a light air which was 
 coming over the water from the south-east but had 
 not yet stirred the Bounty's canvas. 
 
 Thomas Hayward, the midshipman of the watch, 
 had mustered his men ; the wheel had been relieved, 
 the look-out stationed, and those of the watch who 
 were not needed had gone forward to lay about the 
 deck to doze or sleep. 
 
 Leaning over the forecastle rail the look-out stood 
 watching the movement of a huge shark that swam 
 to and fro, close to the ship's port side. Presently 
 Young, whose attention was drawn to the monster 
 by the seaman, leant over the waist and watched also, 
 and shuddered as he thought of Christian and his raft ; 
 then, knowing that Christian would not disturb him, 
 he lay down between two guns. 
 
 Pacing to and fro on the starboard side of the little 
 poop the master's mate was waiting for the breeze 
 to reach the ship, to give the order to brace the yards 
 round to meet it. Perhaps had that light, cooling 
 air which was now sweeping away sulphurous smoke 
 from Tofoa's black sides, reached the silent ship and 
 sent the crew hurrying about her decks, the desperate 
 deed that was so soon to follow would never have been 
 done. But as Christian looked aloft, he saw the 
 pendant topsails give a feeble flap or two and then 
 hang limp and dead as before ; a faint breath of air 
 touched his burning temples, and then silence, deep 
 and oppressive, fell upon the ship again. 
 
 " A dead calm still," he muttered to himself ; " I 
 5 
 
50 THE MUTINEER 
 
 wish to God a squall would put us on our beam ends or 
 founder the sliip — anything but this." And then he 
 stepped to the side and watched, with a curious sense 
 of fascination, the sullen massof the burning mountain. 
 
 The utter impossibility of his leaving the ship unless 
 to die by the teeth of the sharks was now forced upon 
 his mind, for there beneath the counter he saw 
 swimming to and fro a brute that would have made 
 short work of him upon the fragile raft on which he 
 had thought to venture his life. But yet — and his 
 hands clenched savagely — submission to his lot was 
 not possible — better death itself than endure it longer. 
 
 Then his thoughts went back to a night on the 
 white beach at Tahiti, the murmuring sway and rustle 
 of plumed palms, and the soft symphony of the 
 throbbing surf on the distant reef, as Mahina's starlike 
 eyes, dimmed with her farewell tears, looked past his 
 own into the cloudless vault of heaven above them ; 
 and her passionate pleadings as she placed her trembling 
 hands upon his arm seemed even now to be borne to 
 him across the sea, and made the quick, hot blood or 
 youth surge madly through his veins. Madness to 
 think of her now ! Yes, he knew that ; but yet 
 she loved him — would give her life for him, even. A 
 savage ! And he a King's officer, yet a slave to a 
 vindictive tyrant — his life one daily round of insult 
 and shame. ... A savage, yet a gloriously beautiful 
 woman, whom only his duty to his King and country 
 made him forget. 
 
 Then his face flushed hotly. Forget her ! What 
 folly to try to deceive himself ! He loved her ! . . . 
 
THE RUBICON 51 
 
 He struck his clenched hand on the rail, and then his 
 brain caught fire, his breath came in short, quick gasps, 
 and the way out flashed into his mind. 
 
 What would be his life at sea ? Bligh, even if 
 suffered until the ship returned to England, was not 
 the only coarse, cruel tyrant in the Service. And it 
 would be at least seven months ere the voyage was 
 ended — seven months of torture, shame and misery. 
 And over there, far beyond the sea-rim lay at least 
 happiness with one who loved him. 
 
 What did it matter after all ? Perhaps after long, 
 long years of service he would be put aside for other 
 and younger men who had influence and social 
 position. But then, he thought, he was an officer, 
 a man of good family. The insults he had received 
 might be forgotten were he one of the rough, coarse 
 seamen for'ard — such a man, for instance, as Quintal 
 who, when brutally flogged by Bligh, swore he would 
 kill his oppressor. But a seaman forgot and forgave a 
 flogging, and an oflScer and a gentleman must forget 
 and — no, not forgive — an insult from his superior. 
 
 So, as he paced to and fro on the little poop and as 
 the dawn began to break he sought to get rid of the 
 devil tempting him ; but he sought in vain. Again 
 and again Mahina's soft voice and choking sobs 
 sounded in his ears. " I will love thee for ever and 
 ever and ever ; how canst thou leave me ? " 
 
 Then the way out came into his heart again. It was 
 so easy of accomplishment, too. He stopped suddenly in 
 his hurried pacing to and fro and his quick mutterings ; 
 for the man at the wheel was regarding him curiously. 
 
52 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " My God ! " he muttered to himself, then cried aloud 
 " I'll do it ! " He stepped to the break of the poop. 
 
 " Hayward," he called in a hoarse whisper. 
 
 Hay ward jumped up from the hatch where he had 
 been lying and came to the foot of the poop ladder. 
 
 " Did you call me, sir ? " 
 
 "Yes" — and his voice seemed like the voice or 
 another man to the speaker himself — "come up here 
 and look after her. I want to go below and lash up 
 my hammock." 
 
 The midshipman looked inquiringly at him. " You 
 are ill, sir," he said ; " better get into your hammock 
 instead. Hallet is sleeping on deck. Let me call him 
 to relieve you." 
 
 " No," and his voice had a strange, sharp ring in it ; 
 "come up here." 
 
 " You are not thinking of that raft again, Mr. 
 Christian ? There's been a shark swimming round 
 the ship all night." 
 
 " Damn you, come up here when I tell you." 
 
 " Very well, sir," said Hayward in a changed voice, 
 and he walked aft to the binnacle without another 
 word. 
 
 Christian ran forward. The men of his watch lay 
 sleeping on the fore-hatch, and among them he was 
 quick to recognise two seamen, Quintal and McCoy, 
 men who had been severely punished for trivial 
 offences by Bligh. Both were good seamen, and, 
 with Alexander Smith, had a particular liking for 
 Christian, who had treated them with a great deal of 
 kindness. The master's mate, now that he had 
 
THE RUBICON 53 
 
 determined to take the plunge, seemed to have rapidly 
 sketched in his mind a feasible plan of action. He 
 stooped down and awakened both of them quietly. 
 
 The men sprang to their feet and would have called 
 the rest of the sleeping watch, but with a warning 
 gesture Christian stopped them. Then he motioned 
 them to follow him to the waist of the ship. 
 
 "Listen," said he, speaking quickly; "I have 
 determined to take charge of this ship. Captain 
 Bligh is no longer fit to command her. You two 
 know him — and you knotu me ! " 
 
 The seamen, half dazed at the suddenness of the ques- 
 tion, hesitated a moment. " My God, men ! " he said 
 hoarsely, " answer me. Heavens ! Why do you 
 hesitate ? Are you men or cowards ? You, Quintal, 
 will you help me ? " 
 
 " Help you, sir ? " and Matthew Quintal, a young 
 man of scarce twenty-one years, seized his jumper on 
 either side with his brawny hands and showed his 
 broad, tattooed chest. " I don't know what you mean, 
 sir, but I'll follow you to hell." 
 
 " Good ; and now, McCoy, you ? " 
 
 A grim smile flickered over McCoy's features. 
 Like Quintal he was tattooed on both chest and 
 arms, and was a broad-shouldered, strongly-made 
 man, with deep-set eyes and a face denoting un- 
 daunted courage and resolution. 
 
 "I am with you, sir, and with Mat Quintal." 
 
 " Go you then, McCoy, and rouse the armourer. 
 Tell him I want the key of the arm-chest to shoot a 
 shark. You, Quintal, rouse up Churchill, Muspratt, 
 
54 THE MUTINEER 
 
 and Millward, and remind them of the flogging Bligh 
 gave them at Tahiti ; then bring them quietly to me." 
 
 The men stepped softly below to the 'tween decks 
 to carry out their orders. As soon as their backs 
 were turned young Smith, who, unobserved by Chris- 
 tian, lay awake upon the main-hatch, rose and came 
 towards the officer. 
 
 " What are you about to do, Mr. Christian ? " he 
 said in whispered tones. " I heard your orders. Stop 
 them, sir, before it is too late, for God's sake ! " 
 
 " Ah, Smith, is that you ? It is too late, too late 
 now. Will you sail under my orders, or will you 
 make me shoot you, as I certainly will do if you give 
 the alarm ? " 
 
 The young seaman's face paled. " Your threat, 
 sir, would not stop me if I had not already decided. 
 I don't like to join in a mutiny, but it is your act, 
 sir, and not mine ; and you will have to answer for it, 
 not me. Captain Bligh is no friend of mine ; and I'll 
 never desert a gentleman like you for him. You can 
 count on me, sir." 
 
 Christian took his hand and gripped it fiercely. 
 Then McCoy returned with the key of the arm- 
 chest, which was kept aft ; following him up the 
 ladder came Quintal, accompanied by a fair-haired lad 
 named Ellison, and Millward, one of the three for 
 whom Quintal had gone below — all in a state of 
 suppressed excitement. 
 
 "It's all right," said Quintal; "Muspratt and 
 Churchill are coming. They are with us, but they 
 are below bringing up some of the others." 
 
THE RUBICON 55 
 
 For one brief moment the madness of the deed 
 flashed across Christian's brain as he saw the figures 
 of the seamen coming up from the 'tween decks ; but 
 the phrase "they are with us" reminded him that he 
 was now a mutineer, and too far on his fatal course to 
 draw back. He set his teeth and, in another minute, 
 followed by his associates in the desperate venture, 
 was serving out weapons to his party from the arm- 
 chest. 
 
 The noise made by the clank of the arms, slight as 
 it was, had by this time wakened all the watch on 
 deck ; and Hayward, sitting on the wheel grating, 
 was suddenly astounded to see Christian running 
 towards him, cutlass in hand, followed by a number of 
 armed seamen. The watch came tramping aft, and 
 Christian, with a maddening sense of triumph in his 
 heart, felt that the supreme moment had arrived. 
 
 Quick as lightning he spoke some hot words to 
 McCoy and Quintal, who repeated them to the 
 thrcnginsr and excited sailors : Quintal and Ellison 
 then rapidly passed weapons to four or five of the 
 watch. These, stepping apart from the others, at 
 once ranged themselves with Christian and his party. 
 
 Still, despite the fierce, eager mutterings and the 
 clash of arm^s from those on deck, there had been no 
 great noise or confusion, and none of those who slept 
 below were awakened ; the mutineers, from ready 
 force of habit, obeying unhesitatingly the orders of 
 the passionate man who was once their officer and 
 now their ringleader. 
 
 There was a moment's pause ; a dozen armed men, 
 
56 THE MUTINEER 
 
 grim and determined, stood around their leader, wait- 
 ing. As the sun leapt, a flaming ball of blood-red 
 fire, from out the sleeping sea, Christian looked into 
 the dark and working faces of the crew and waved his 
 cutlass in the air ; then, following their leader, the 
 desperate men made a dash for Bligh's cabin. 
 
CHAPTER VII 
 
 MUTINY 
 
 ALTHOUGH it was now daylight the great 
 cabin was still in semi-darkness when Christian, 
 followed by Churchill, by Mills, the gunner's mate, 
 and a seaman named Birkett, burst in upon the 
 sleeping commander. 
 
 As a flood of sunlight poured through the widely- 
 opened door Bligh, aroused by the rush of hurrying 
 feet, started up in his bunk to find a musket levelled 
 at his heart, and the li\'id face of Christian looking 
 savagely into his own. 
 
 "What is this?" he said in his quick, imperious 
 way, preparing to spring out of his berth. 
 
 "If you utter another word I'll shoot you," 
 answered Christian, still presenting his piece ; then 
 suddenly he grounded it upon the deck with a crash 
 and turned to his followers. 
 
 " Drag him out and lash his hands behind his 
 back," he cried. Again the commander tried to 
 spring from his bed, his cheek white, not with fear 
 but with suppressed rage ; and again he threw himself 
 
 57 
 
58 THE MUTINEER 
 
 back as Christian, whose eyes gleamed with a deadly, 
 awful hatred, thrust the muzzle of the musket almost 
 into his face. 
 
 In another moment the men sprang upon Bligh, 
 and with savage fury dragged him out of his bunk, 
 and Mills, the instant his captain's feet touched the 
 deck, seized his white, delicate hands and lashed them 
 behind his back with a piece of native cinnet. 
 
 " Drag him up on deck," and Christian stood aside 
 to let the seamen execute his orders. 
 
 The moment the struggling form of Bligh appeared 
 on deck, young Ellison, who had taken the wheel, 
 sprang towards them, tore a bayonet from the hands 
 of a seaman near him, and launched himself upon the 
 captain with an imprecation, but was thrust back by 
 Smith. 
 
 " Stand back, boy ! " said Christian fiercely ; " I 
 alone will deal with him. You, Smith, and you, 
 McCoy, keep guard over him, and if he tries to utter 
 a word shov/ him no mercy — blow his brains out on 
 the spot." 
 
 In grim and ominous silence McCoy and Smith, 
 with loaded muskets and fixed bayonets, stepped out 
 and stationed themselves on either side of the bound 
 man. Christian, hitherto doubtful of the fidelity of 
 his party, noted with a savage satisfaction that 
 McCoy's face was working with passion, and that he 
 at least was prepared to carry out his leader's orders, 
 while Smith's open, ruddy countenance was now 
 set and stern. 
 
 Meanwhile Quintal, accompanied by a seaman 
 
MUTINY 59 
 
 named Williams, who was stripped to the waist and 
 armed with a cutlass, had burst into the cabin of 
 Fryer, the master and senior officer under Bligh, and 
 ordered him on deck. 
 
 Fryer sprang up with a loud cry and reached for 
 his pistols, which were on a rack over his head ; but 
 Quintal was too quick for him and seized him by the 
 wrist in a vice-like grip. 
 
 " Hold your tongue, or, by God ! you are a dead man, 
 Mr. Fryer ! Keep quiet and no one will hurt you ; 
 resist, and I'll run you through," and Williams leant 
 across him and secured the pistols. 
 
 The dangerous look in his eyes as he pointed them 
 at the master's heart told Fryer that resistance meant 
 death, but folding his arms across his chest he stood 
 defiantly facing them both. 
 
 " What are you doing ? " he asked. " Have you 
 taken the ship ? " 
 
 " Yes, we have. Mr. Christian is our captain now." 
 
 "Where is Captain Bligh ? What have you done 
 with him, you villains ? " 
 
 " Keep a civil tongue in your head, Mr. Fryer ; 
 we are desperate men, and yet we don't want to kill 
 you. I'll tell you what we intend doing with the 
 captain," and he laughed grimly ; " we are going to 
 put him in the small cutter and let him try living on 
 three-quarters of a pound of yam a day." 
 
 " The small cutter I Why, her bottom is almost 
 out ; she's worm-eaten and full of holes." 
 
 " The boat is a lot too good for him even if she had 
 no bottom at all," answered Quintal. " Now go on 
 
6o THE MUTINEER 
 
 deck, Mr. Fryer, and mind this, if you make one 
 attempt at resistance you are a dead man." 
 
 As soon as they reached the deck they saw Chris- 
 tian standing on the poop, giving orders to get out the 
 boat. 
 
 " In God's name. Christian, what are you about ? " 
 and Fryer, disregarding the menacing gestures of the 
 mutineers, placed his hand on his shipmate's arm. 
 " Are you mad, man ? Consider the consequences ! " 
 
 " Not a word from you, Fryer ! " and Christian 
 dashed aside his hand fiercely. " I tell you that I 
 have been in hell for weeks past. This dog, this 
 infernal, malignant scoundrel, has brought all this 
 upon himself. Stand back, I tell you — I am 
 dangerous ! " 
 
 " Christian, let me implore you. . . ." 
 
 " Silence, I tell you ! " 
 
 " For God's sake, Christian, let me speak. We 
 have always been friends, and you may trust me. 
 Resist this mad impulse before it is too late. Let 
 the captain go down to his cabin again and leave 
 me to tackle the men." 
 
 With a fearful oath Christian turned upon him and 
 pointed his cutlass at Fryer's heart. " Silence ! I tell 
 you for the last time. I don't want to murder 
 you. Fryer, but, by the God above me, FU run you 
 through if you don't cease ! " 
 
 Fryer's bronzed cheek paled a moment, but his eye 
 never quailed even when the cutlass point touched his 
 breast. " Will you not at least get out a better boat 
 than the cutter ? " he said quietly. 
 
MUTINY 6i 
 
 " No ! by heavens, I will not ! That boat is good 
 enough for such a ruffian," then lowering his weapon 
 he turned away and beckoned to Smith and McCoy 
 to leave their prisoner and come to him, and for half a 
 minute he conversed eagerly with them ; while Bligh 
 managed to get near enough to the master to speak. 
 
 " Mr. Fryer," he said quickly, yet calmly, " there 
 must be some of the officers and men who will not 
 fail me in the hour of need. For God's sake. Fryer, try 
 to find some of them ere this villain murders us all ! " 
 
 But low as were his tones Christian heard him, and 
 stepping up to the captain and Fryer, when within a 
 foot or two of Bligh, he seized him by the shoulder 
 and made as if to run him through. 
 
 " Advance one step nearer, and by the God above 
 us this cutlass goes through your cowardly, brutal 
 heart ! All the officers and men not with me are 
 guarded below ; you can do no good now ; your 
 authority on this floating hell is gone for ever. Here, 
 two of you men take Mr. Fryer back to his cabin and 
 lock him in." 
 
 By this time the cutter was afloat ; but Christian, 
 realising that it would be impossible to crowd all of 
 those who were well-affected to Bligh into her, had 
 also lowered the launch, a six-oared boat measuring 
 twenty-three feet from stem to stern. 
 
 Two officers, Hayward and Hallet, and Elphin- 
 stone, Heywood, and Stewart (midshipmen), Ledward 
 the surgeon. Cole the boatswain, Purcell the carpenter, 
 and some seamen, meanwhile had been secured either 
 below or on deck. One or two of the youngsters, 
 
62 THE MUTINEER 
 
 among whom was Peter Heywood, a lad of fifteen, 
 scarcely understanding what they were doing in the 
 confusion and excitement, had been compelled to lend 
 the mutineers a hand in getting out the launch ; and 
 Bligh's keen eye happened to fall on this boy as he 
 was helping with the boat-falls. 
 
 This was unfortunate for Heywood, who was at 
 once put down by his commander as one of the ring- 
 leaders, and suffered for it later. 
 
 Suddenly Christian sprang upon the poop from the 
 main-deck, and again held a consultation with Smith 
 and McCoy. He turned and gazed savagely at Bligh, 
 who met his look with unflinching calmness. For a 
 few moments the two men regarded each other with 
 looks of deadliest hatred, and then Fletcher Christian's 
 voice rang out. 
 
 "Pass all but Captain Bligh over the side into the 
 boat." 
 
 Then with oaths, struggles, and entreaties some 
 twenty men were dragged along the deck and passed 
 down into the boat. Bligh, who stood near the 
 gangway, now made an appeal to the leader of the 
 mutineers, who was on the poop watching him. 
 
 "If you will stop this even now, Mr. Christian, 
 I will promise nothing more shall come of it," he 
 called out. 
 
 The master's mate, flinging down the cutlass he 
 still held, ran down the poop and faced his enemy ; 
 and the crew drew back as he spoke. 
 
 " Captain Bligh, listen to me. I could kill you as 
 you stand before me now, but I am no murderer. 
 
MUTINY 63 
 
 Tyrant and coward, I and those who have suffered 
 with me have done with you for ever." 
 
 A crimson flush dyed the commander's face from 
 brow to chin, and he clenched his hands together 
 tightly at the insulting words. 
 
 Then the boat was veered astern, and McCoy, 
 making the painter fast to the stern rail, turned to his 
 leader for further orders. 
 
 Going to the stern of the ship. Christian eyed the 
 condition of the boat for a minute in silence, till the 
 boatswain made an attempt to soften his heart. 
 
 "Mr. Christian," he cried, standing up in the boat, 
 " let me plead with you for myself as well as Captain 
 Bligh." 
 
 " No, no, Mr. Cole," Christian answered. " I 
 have been in hell for the past two weeks and am de- 
 termined to bear it no longer. You know. Cole, that 
 during the whole voyage I have been treated like a 
 dog." 
 
 " Will you not let the master, who is an old man, 
 remain on board, and take some of the men out of the 
 boat to lighten her ? " called Bligh, from where he 
 stood at the gangway. 
 
 : I " No ! " was the fierce reply ; " Mr. Fryer must go 
 with you — do you think we are fools ? But some or 
 the men may come out of the boat." 
 
 A brief discussion among those in the boat ended in 
 two or three seamen asking to be taken on board. 
 The boat was hauled alongside under the counter and 
 they ascended to the deck ; and the boatswain, who 
 was a relative of one of them, said to him, " Goodbye 
 
64 THE MUTINEER 
 
 and God bless you, my boy ; but for my wife and 
 children I too would stay with the ship also." 
 
 Again Bligh spoke, and there was now no sharp, 
 imperious ring in his voice. 
 
 " Mr. Christian," he said, " I'll pawn my honour 
 as a King's officer — I'll give you my solemn word, 
 with God as my witness, never to think of this if you 
 will desist from this outrage even now. Consider my 
 wife and family." 
 
 The mutineer laughed mockingly. " No, Captain 
 BHgh. If you had any honour things would not 
 have come to this pass ; and if you had any regard 
 for your wife and family you should have thought of 
 them before, and not have behaved like the heartless 
 villain you are." 
 
 Then, by Christian's orders, Bligh's clothes, his 
 commission, private journal, and pocket-book were 
 passed down, his hands were liberated, and he was 
 ordered into the boat, which was hauled amidships to 
 receive him. Christian handed to him over the side a 
 book of nautical tables and his own quadrant, saying 
 as he did so : " That book is sufficient for every 
 purpose, and you know my quadrant to be a good 
 one." 
 
 Again the boat was veered astern. Bligh, standing 
 up, raised his clenched hand and cursed the mutineers 
 bitterly, swearing vengeance against those on the ship 
 who would not help him to retake her. Laughs and 
 jeers from the group on the Bounty's poop was the 
 only notice taken of him. Then for the last time the 
 mutineers heard his voice and they ceased their gibes 
 
MUTINY 65 
 
 at the dignity of his tones as he spoke to those whom 
 he thought yet faithful to him on board. 
 
 " Never mind, my lads ; you can't all come with 
 me, but I will do you justice if ever I reach England." 
 
 The boat's painter was then cast off by Quintal, 
 and the crew took to their oars, Bligh giving his 
 commands in a calm and collected manner. The 
 ocean was calm and only a faint breeze rippled the 
 surface of the placid sea. 
 
 As the departing commander and his crew dipped 
 their oars into the water they saw Christian leaning 
 on the rail over the stern, regarding them intently. 
 Presently he stood up and gave an order ; the yards 
 were swung round, and a cheer came over to them 
 from the ship — " Hurrah for Tahiti ! " 
 
 And as the crowded boat grows smaller and smaller 
 to the vision of the desperate man who stands gazing 
 at her from the Bounty's stern, so let those in her go 
 out of this story ; they have no further part in it. But 
 the memory of that daring boat voyage will live for 
 ever in our country's annals. Who has not read of 
 Bligh's indomitable courage and resolution, his admir- 
 able forethought for the eighteen suffering beings 
 who braved the venture with him, from the first day 
 when the over-crowded little craft was cast off from 
 the ship until it sighted Timor, forty-one days after ? 
 His successful conduct of that terrible voyage over an 
 all but unknown sea, losing as he did only one of his 
 men, yet encountering the risk of wreck by violent 
 
 6 
 
66 THE MUTINEER 
 
 storms, of massacre by savage islanders, of the pangs 
 of hunger and the agonies of thirst, well entitled him 
 to the honours that his country paid him. In that act 
 of his life he played his part nobly, and all else that he 
 did ill, when measured against such fortitude in the 
 face of danger and death, may well be forgotten. 
 
CHAPTER VIII 
 
 HURRAH FOR TAHITI 
 
 STANDING with folded arms and gloomy face, 
 in which all passion seemed to be dead, the 
 leader of the mutineers watched the launch gradually 
 increase her distance from the Bounty. The last 
 words of Bligh as the boat was cast off still rang in 
 his ears : " I will do you justice if ever I reach 
 England." 
 
 These were ominous words, and they brought 
 vividly before him the horrors of his situation. " If 
 justice is done," he muttered, "what will become of 
 me ? My God ! Why did I not put an end to my 
 life before this madness got the better of me r " 
 
 The wild cheer of " Hurrah for Tahiti ! " from his 
 followers roused him to a sense of his present position. 
 It was evident that to others besides himself a return to 
 Tahiti was one of the inducements for the desperate 
 deed just accomplished. And he was quick to realise, 
 too, that for the safety of them all he must assert him- 
 self and take command of the ship. Even had Bligh 
 not heard that defiant cry as the mutineers swung 
 
 67 
 
68 THE MUTINEER 
 
 round the yards, Tahiti would be the first place 
 thought of by those who would surely come in search 
 of them. How soon would that search begin ? That 
 it would begin sooner or later he never doubted. The 
 possibility of Bligh and those with him not being 
 picked up by some ship, or not reaching some place of 
 safety, never occurred to him. And yet every one but 
 himself realised how small indeed was the chance that 
 those in the frail little launch would escape death in 
 one or other of the lingering and dreadful forms to 
 which he had so mercilessly consigned them. 
 
 The murmuring of voices roused him from his 
 gloomy reflections, and presently McCoy, Quintal, 
 Smith, and others of the more active of the mutineers 
 gathered round their leader, while the rest of the 
 men, forming a group on the main deck, were talking 
 in excited tones of what ought to be done for the best. 
 
 He turned to those near him and spoke, with every 
 trace of excitement absent from his voice and manner. 
 
 " Men, remember that our future safety from death 
 at the yard-arm depends upon the discipline of a well- 
 ordered ship being maintained. Now that the thing 
 is done we have to guard ourselves for the future. 
 Therefore, as you all have to rely upon me for the 
 navigation of the ship, and as I am the only officer left, 
 until we have settled upon some safe island, and got 
 rid of her, you will have to obey my orders. Are you 
 agreed to that ? " 
 
 " Aye, aye, Mr. Christian ; you can depend upon us," 
 they answered. 
 
 " Very well, then. I have decided to take the ship 
 
"HURRAH FOR TAHITI!" 69 
 
 to Tubuai.' It will not be safe for us to remain at 
 Tahiti ; search will be made for the Bounty^ and 
 Tahiti will be the first place a ship will visit. You, 
 Smith, McCoy, and Quintal, who were among the 
 first to stand by me in this undertaking, can arrange 
 with me a plan for our mutual safety. 
 
 " But we want to go back to Tahiti," cried several 
 of the others. 
 
 " Yes," answered Christian quietly, " you want to 
 go back because of the women you have left there. 
 Do not fear, you shall see Tahiti again. Now listen, 
 and I will tell you what my plan is. First, let us go to 
 Tubuai and form a settlement there. Then, when 
 that is finished, I propose to return to Tahiti and bring 
 away as many people as choose to come — that is if 
 these women still run in your minds." 
 
 There was a bitter ring in his last words, and 
 Smith, in a low voice, asked him to humour the men 
 more, " for remember, sir," said he, " you have given 
 them their liberty and you will have to take care 
 how you cross them." 
 
 The caution was needed ; most of the men by no 
 means relished the prospect of delay in returning to 
 the delights of Tahiti, and one of them in no uncer- 
 tain manner expressed his sentiments, adding — " You 
 know Mr. Christian, we have a couple of navigators 
 left, if you can't hit it with us." 
 
 " What do you mean by that ? " asked Christian 
 quickly. 
 
 ' An island nearly due south of Tahiti and distant from that island 
 about 5^ degrees. 
 
JO THE MUTINEER 
 
 " Why, Mr. Stewart and Mr. Heywood are both 
 below." 
 
 " What ! " and Fletcher Christian turned fiercely to 
 Quintal. " Why were these two — one a mere child — 
 not sent away in the boat ? Are you such villains as 
 not to have told me, if you knew it ? " 
 
 "It was just an idea of ours," answered the seaman 
 who had first spoken — Williams, the Guernsey man ; 
 " we thought it just as well to have more than one 
 navigator on board in case anything went wrong 
 with you." 
 
 Christian did not reply. He felt that he had no 
 claim to their obedience other than they chose to 
 admit, and that this was but a reasonable precaution on 
 their parts. 
 
 " Where are these two now ? " he asked. 
 
 " Down below ; kept prisoners until all the row 
 was over," answered Williams, " Shall I pass the word 
 for them to be brought upon deck ? " 
 
 " Yes," replied Christian ; " bring them up." 
 
 Stewart and Heywood — the first-named an acting 
 mate, and the second a mere, ruddy-faced boy on his 
 first voyage to sea — were accordingly brought up, and 
 to the surprise of every one, as they came up the 
 ladder, they were followed by the swarthy-faced 
 Edward Young. 
 
 " What does this mean, Mr. Christian ? " said Stewart 
 as soon as he reached the poop-deck. " Why have we 
 been kept prisoners ? I know that you have taken the 
 ship and turned Captain Bligh adrift with the other 
 officers. Why have we been detained against our wills ? " 
 
"HURRAH FOR TAHITI!" 71 
 
 " It is not my fault you arc here," answered 
 Christian gloomily. "I thought that you were gone 
 in the boat." 
 
 " However that may be," replied Stewart excitedly, 
 " because you have turned pirate that is no reason why 
 we should do so. I would rather die than remain with 
 you and be branded as a mutineer." 
 
 "And I too, Mr. Christian," broke in young Hcy- 
 wood. " I have a family at home, and no act of mine 
 shall bring disgrace on them." 
 
 Christian smiled bitterly at the lad. "These are 
 hard words — but God knows I cannot blame you for 
 them. Yet I hope, my boy, that you will forgive me 
 for the misfortune I have brought upon you ; and I 
 promise that at the first port we reach, if it be a spot 
 where it is likely a ship may touch, you can separate 
 from us." 
 
 " That's fair enough," said a seamen named 
 Thompson. " 'Twas I and Williams who kept you 
 below against your wills ; and I for one will help you 
 to leave the ship by and by." 
 
 " And what have you to say, Mr. Young ? " asked 
 Christian, turning to him ; " how do you come to be 
 among us ? " 
 
 The young man laughed quietly and leant against 
 the skylight as he answered, " I am here of my own 
 free will. I heard what was going on on deck and 
 quietly got out of the way until you had decided 
 matters — and I'm damned glad you have decided 'em 
 this way. Bligh is a good riddance, and while I didn't 
 want to take an active part in the row I wasn't going 
 
72 THE MUTINEER 
 
 to help him ; and so long as you have the command I 
 am ready to serve under you." 
 
 " Well done, sir," cried several of the men at this 
 speech, w^hich was delivered with the utmost coolness, 
 and evoked audible expressions of disgust and con- 
 tempt from Stewart and Heywood ; and then one of 
 the seamen made some coarse jest about Alrema and 
 Tahiti. 
 
 A look of contempt passed over Christian's features 
 as he glanced at his dark, saturnine-faced ally, and for 
 the instant he forgot he was the leader of mutineers, 
 and felt as Stewart and Heywood did towards the 
 young man. Then he remembered the situation, and 
 taking Young by the hand, said in mingled tones of 
 contempt and friendliness : " Thank you, Young. I 
 am glad that I am not the only ' infernal scoundrel ' 
 (mocking Bligh's voice) on board the Bounty."" 
 Then turning to the others he said — 
 
 " Well, men, are you agreed ? Shall we set a 
 course for Tubuai ? Fortunately for us the south- 
 east trades have not yet set in for good, and we ought 
 to make a quick run there." 
 
 " Aye, aye, sir," cried several of the leading spirits 
 among them. " We'll abide by you ; let it be Tubuai." 
 
 " Then keep her east-south-east," said Christian to 
 the man at the wheel, and as the ship's head came to 
 the wind a point or two, the yards were braced up 
 and the little barque began to slip through the water 
 with the now freshening breeze. 
 
 An hour later, when Tofoa was but a pale blue cone 
 on the horizon, an agreement was arrived at that 
 
"HURRAH FOR TAHITI!" 73 
 
 Young, Churchill, Quintal, Smith, and McCoy 
 should, with the new commander, at once settle a 
 definite plan of action for the future ; and the rest of 
 the mutineers, coming aft, shook hands with one 
 another and swore they would faithfully adhere to 
 whatever was decided upon. 
 
 Then, under the direction of Young, the breadfruit 
 plants were taken out of their racks and passed to two 
 seamen, who, standing on the cabin transoms, with 
 many a jest at this ending of the scientific expedition, 
 pitched them out of the stern ports into the sea. 
 
CHAPTER IX 
 
 THE COUNCIL IN THE CABIN 
 
 THE council in the now denuded cabin of the 
 Bounty was conducted in a friendly enough 
 manner. In Smith and Young — both of whom were 
 well-liked by the crew — Fletcher Christian had two 
 powerful allies. Young, disgusted with life at sea 
 under such a tyrannical commander as Bligh, yet 
 without the high spirit that had moved Christian to 
 such a desperate deed as mutiny, was willing and 
 indeed eager to lead the life of luxurious ease that they 
 all anticipated in the future ; for he fully recognised 
 that he, in joining his fortunes with those of Christian, 
 had for ever dissevered himself from all hope of return- 
 ing to England; and while he despised all those around 
 him save Christian, he was yet perfectly agreeable 
 to associate with them now on terms of equality. 
 
 Smith, in his strong devotion to Christian, seemed 
 to have thrown over the teachings of his youth, and 
 showed by his earnest manner that he was ready to 
 stand or fall by his new leader. 
 
 McCoy and Quintal, rough seamen, rrom long 
 
THE COUNCIL IN THE CABIN 75 
 
 habits of obedience and following the lead of Young 
 and Smith, acquiesced in all that was proposed ; the 
 only doubtful supporter was Churchill, who wanted 
 the ship to be headed for Tahiti at once. But 
 obstinate as was the latter, he had no part in the 
 plotting that was already going on among some of 
 the crew to compel Christian to abandon the idea 
 of Tubuai and make for Tahiti instead. 
 
 The first matter decided was that Christian should 
 be treated in every respect as would be a King's officer 
 commanding the ship, until such time as the mutineers 
 had found a place of refuge on some island where they 
 would be safe from discovery or capture. No one of 
 those who sat in council in the cabin for a moment 
 thought of ever returning to Europe to face the 
 ignominious death that would certainly await them ; 
 and Young, in his mocking manner, took care to show 
 the seamen who sat with him at the cabin table that 
 it was better for them all to die of old age on some 
 island than be hanged at the yard-arm in England. 
 
 Following this, it was agreed that Young, being 
 well liked by the crew, should be second in command 
 and take charge of one watch ; while Mills, the 
 gunner's mate, who was the next in rank as well as 
 the oldest man on board, should take charge of the 
 other half of the ship's company. 
 
 Stewart and Heywood were to be regarded as 
 " prisoners at large," and this decision was at once 
 made known to them ; but they both refused the 
 privilege of the freedom of the ship if it involved any 
 assurance on their part of loyalty to the mutineers. 
 
-jS THE MUTINEER 
 
 " Send for them, Mr. Christian," suggested Smith, 
 "and see if you can't get them to join us. They'll 
 listen to you, I am sure." 
 
 Presently the two lads were brought into the cabin, 
 and both frankly stated to Christian their intention 
 of endeavouring, by some means or other, to reach 
 England and doing all in their power to bring him 
 and those with him to justice when they got there. 
 
 A dangerous look came into Edward Young's eyes. 
 Heywood saw it, but although his fresh, boyish face 
 paled a moment, he returned Young's frown with a 
 look of defiance. 
 
 " As you please," said Christian shortly ; " but I tell 
 you, foolish boys, you are treading on dangerous 
 ground. Take my advice and keep your intentions 
 to yourselves, else you will repent your folly. There 
 are men on board the ship who have gone too far 
 to " 
 
 " To hesitate at pitching two damned young fools 
 overboard," broke in Young savagely ; but a look 
 from Christian made him cease. And then the 
 council came to an end. 
 
 The new commander, however, took no steps to 
 prevent Stewart and Heywood from going among the 
 crew, though he knew they were endeavouring to 
 form a party for recapturing the ship. He was con- 
 fident that however some of the men might attempt 
 to frustrate his plan of first making Tubuai, none 
 would be mad enough to risk destruction by listening 
 to any talk about the ship being recaptured. 
 
 But Quintal, McCoy, and Smith, fortunately for 
 
THE COUNCIL IN THE CABIN 77 
 
 the success of the enterprise, did not share their leader's 
 faith, and a few days after they had returned to their 
 old duties as able seamen they found that the daring 
 midshipmen had so far succeeded in alienating some 
 of the crew from Christian that a plot was ripe to 
 retake the vessel. 
 
 One night when the ship was some two or three 
 miles to the southward of Savage Island — an isolated 
 but fertile spot about three hundred miles from Tofoa 
 — Quintal stood at the forward weather rail, gazing at 
 the high cliffs of grey coral rock against whose jagged 
 sides the ocean rollers dashed unceasingly and sent 
 showers of spray high up to the dense foliage which 
 grew on the verge of their summits. Presently he 
 was joined by Smith, who whispered — 
 
 " Heywood and Stewart, with five others, will try 
 to retake the ship to-morrow evening. Don't talk to 
 me now, but follow me aft by and by ; then we can 
 tell Christian. That scoundrel Coleman was the first 
 to join them, and has promised to serve them out arms 
 to-morrow night. All of them, except Coleman, are 
 in the gunner's watch." 
 
 A quarter of an hour later. Christian, with a grim 
 smile, dismissed Smith and Quintal and watched for 
 his chance. About eleven o'clock a furious rain squall 
 swept down from the south-east, and among those 
 who were sent aloft to take in sail by the gunner's 
 mate, who was in charge of the watch, were the five 
 men who had agreed to support Heywood and Stewart. 
 While these were busy aloft and Coleman was asleep 
 — it being his watch below — Smitii, McCoy, and 
 
78 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Quintal and another seaman made a dash for the arm- 
 chest and conveyed it to the cabin. 
 
 Arming all those men of whose loyalty he was 
 absolutely assured, Christian waited till the men 
 came down from aloft and the watch was about to 
 be relieved. Then he called the plotters aft and 
 addressed them. A ship's lantern, held by a seaman 
 who stood beside him, threw a broad ray of light upon 
 the anxious faces of the men gathered on the soaking 
 deck ; and then for the first time they saw that the 
 men in Young's watch were grouped aft behind 
 Christian and his fellow officer. 
 
 Calling upon the five plotters each by name. 
 Christian addressed them — 
 
 " I have discovered that you mean to retake the ship. 
 Now weigh my words well : if bloodshed follows it 
 will be your fault. Some of you who are anxious to 
 get back to Tahiti have listened to two foolish boys, 
 little thinking of the madness of such an attempt. The 
 arm-chest is now in my cabin, and at the first attempt 
 on your part to take the command of the ship from 
 me I will shoot every man concerned in it. God knows 
 I do not want to be your leader longer than I can help, 
 and no one among you is less content than I, but," 
 and here he turned to those immediately around him, 
 " it is necessary for the general safety of us all that I, 
 and I alone, should have charge of the ship ; and, by 
 God ! while she remains afloat and I alive I will keep 
 command." 
 
 A deep growl of approval came from those of his 
 party who stood near him as he finished ; then in 
 
THE COUNCIL IN THE CABIN 79 
 
 gentle tones Christian addressed Heywood and 
 Stewart, who had now come on deck. Although he 
 seemed outwardly cool the lads could see that he was 
 labouring under strong emotion and was striving to 
 speak to them calmly and dispassionately. He 
 besought them to make no further effort to retake 
 the ship, but to support him in his authority — such as 
 it was, he said bitterly — till the ship finally reached 
 Tahiti, and assured them that this course was best for 
 all parties. "And you, Heywood," he said kindly, 
 placing his hand on the lad's shoulder, "answer me 
 this : have you, or you, Stewart, ever known me to 
 tell you a lie ? " 
 
 " No, Mr. Christian, never," replied the boy 
 emphatically, looking him directly in the face. 
 
 " Well then, my lads, I beg of you both to believe 
 that it would be a bitter sorrow to me to hurt either 
 ll of you. I have suffered too much myself to wreck 
 your future lives by any needless act of mine ; nor will 
 you be in bodily danger unless you drive us to stern 
 measures. And I swear to you that I bear you no 
 ill-will for what has passed . . . no, my lads, 
 none." 
 
 Loyal as they were to their duty, both Stewart and 
 Heywood saw the force of his argument and believed 
 in his promise to set them free as soon as possible ; and 
 assured him they would cause no further trouble. 
 Then the watch was changed and the matter ended. 
 
 But from that time the arm-chest was carefully 
 watched by men on whom reliance could be placed, 
 and every night Churchill, who now kept the key. 
 
8o THE MUTINEER 
 
 made his bed upon the box, and slept with a brace of 
 loaded pistols by his side. 
 
 Day after day the Bounty crept slowly along to the 
 eastward, till early one morning the look-out sighted 
 the two misty blue peaks of Tubuai rising from the 
 sea. As the ship drew nearer to the land, the peaks 
 united at the base and showed an island of verdant 
 hills and bright, shining beaches of golden sand encom- 
 passed by a wide belt of surf-beaten coral reef. 
 
 The wind was light but steady, and Christian 
 succeeded in working the ship through the passage on 
 the north-west side without much trouble, although 
 she was beset by a great number of canoes filled with 
 natives who made unmistakable signs of defiance to 
 the white men. 
 
 As soon as the ship was secured. Christian and his men 
 sought to induce the natives to come on board, but 
 only one or two responded to his invitation ; and they, by 
 their suspicious and haughty demeanour, showed their 
 distrust and dislike of the white strangers. Not a 
 woman or child was visible in the canoes, and every 
 man was armed with a club and spear. The only dress 
 they wore was a girdle or rather bandage round their 
 loins, and a turban of tappa cloth round their heads 
 of glossy, jet-black and curling hair. They were 
 a far handsomer and more active race than the 
 Tahitians, much lighter in colour, and of a daring and 
 warlike disposition, and their open hostility to the 
 Bounty party was every minute becoming more ap- 
 parent. 
 
 Not anticipating such a reception as this, Christian 
 
THE COUNCIL IN THE CABIN 8i 
 
 was in a dilemma. To have to force a landing would 
 be a serious matter, and after a brief consultation with 
 some of the men, this idea was abandoned. The 
 ship had been brought there by him against the wishes 
 of the majority, and to have to fight for a footing was, 
 as Williams said, " more than they had stomach for." 
 
 " I will not ask you to fight," said Christian, " for 
 that would only mean useless slaughter on both sides. 
 These people are, as you can see, brave and determined, 
 and it is a bitter disappointment to me to find them 
 so hostile. But yet I have to consider this — the 
 island, as you see for yourselves, is of amazing fertility 
 and I do not think that we could find a better place to 
 live in. Further, it is not likely to be visited by ships, 
 and would be a safe retreat for us." 
 
 "That's true enough, Mr. Christian," answered 
 one of the seamen. "Much as I want to get to Tahiti, 
 I only want to do so to get the woman I left there — 
 and there's a lot more like me. I, for one, think that 
 Tubuai is a better place for us than Tahiti." 
 
 " So do I," said Martin ; " and although I want to 
 go to Tahiti for the same reason as most of us, I'm 
 willing to come back here. To my mind this island 
 is far better ; but at the same time we don't want our 
 throats cut." 
 
 Satisfied that the crew would be willing to return, 
 Christian then proposed that they should make for 
 Tahiti, embark as many Tahitians as would come 
 with them, return to Tubuai, and either establish 
 friendly relations with the people or force a landing 
 and build a fort. 
 
 7 
 
82 THE MUTINEER 
 
 To this the men readily assented, for they could 
 easily see that the island was not only very rich and 
 fertile, but also well out of the way of discovery, and 
 with a little trouble could be made capable of resisting 
 the attack of even an European force. 
 
 So, with hundreds of natives still paddling about the 
 ship in their red-ochre-painted canoes and uttering 
 loud cries of defiance, the anchor was hove up, the 
 ship warped out to sea again, and with a light breeze 
 filling her canvas, headed due north for Tahiti. 
 
 The following morning Christian collected together 
 in the main cabin all the curiosities given to Bligh and 
 his officers by the people of Tahiti, as well as all the 
 clothes and other property left by those who had been 
 sent away with him. Then he mustered the crew 
 aft and addressed them, pointing to the piles of goods 
 on the cabin deck. 
 
 " Here, my fellow pirates, is the first batch of 
 plunder — you see I call things by their right names. 
 Draw lots and divide it among yourselves. Every- 
 thing that is there will be of value to you for the 
 purposes of barter with the natives." 
 
 The sneering tone in which he spoke caused many 
 an angry look, but without another word he turned 
 from them and went on deck. 
 
 Four days later, on the 5th of June — thirty-eight 
 days after the mutiny — the peak of Orohena lay right 
 ahead ; at dawn the following day the Bounty sailed 
 into Matavai Bay, and as the cries of welcome were 
 heard, for awhile all else was forgotten. 
 
CHAPTER X 
 
 PIPIRI THE AREOI 
 
 ON the same hill where nearly six weeks before 
 she had watched the lessening sails of her 
 lover's ship sink below the horizon, Mahina again sat 
 looking seaward. Day after day since the Bounty had 
 sailed she had laid her simple offerings of fruit upon 
 the altar of Oro and prayed for Christian's return to 
 her, and night after night when the rest of the people 
 were singing and dancing upon the broad sward in 
 front of Tina's house she, sometimes accompanied by 
 Alrema, sat on the hill and the two girls thought or 
 talked of Young and Christian. But to-day her friend 
 was not with her ; and only an hour before angry 
 words had passed between her old, fierce-tempered 
 mother and herself about her white lover, and the 
 girl, after a passionate burst of tears, had stolen 
 silently away to the hill to be alone with her thoughts. 
 Old Manuhuru, like the average civilised mother, 
 had certain views for her daughter, and ever since the 
 Bounty had sailed had sought to induce the girl to forget 
 
 83 
 
84 THE MUTINEER 
 
 her white lover and accept for her husband Pipiri the 
 Areoi ' priest. And of all the men of Tahiti who had 
 sought her love Mahina hated most the tall, handsome 
 young Areoi, for he was steeped to the lips in blood- 
 shed. Only a few years before the Bounty came 
 to Tahiti, Pipiri had with his own hands slain his 
 two children, according to the rites of the horrible 
 fraternity, which demanded that a candidate entering 
 upon his novitiate should publicly kill his children and 
 put his wife aside, unless she too should become an 
 Areoi. Mahina had seen the awful deed, had heard 
 the wail of agony from the mother of the children 
 when their ruthless father had plunged his knife into 
 their bosoms ; and had fled the scene with terror in 
 her heart, for Pipiri had long sought her love, and she 
 knew he had only become an Areoi that he might 
 force her to marry him. 
 
 The girl, by every device she could contrive, avoided 
 meeting the young priest, and to her great joy, since 
 she had shown her open preference for Christian, Pipiri 
 
 ' The Areois were an extraordinary fraternity, followers of the gods 
 Orotetefa and Urutetefa, and Mr. Ellis gives a full description of them 
 in his " Polynesian Researches." They were, he says, not only priests, 
 and so regarded by the people as allied to the gods themselves, but 
 strolling players and privileged libertines. The association was composed 
 of seven classes. A candidate's admission to the first class was 
 signalised by the slaughter of his children, as a proof of his devotion to 
 the principle of infanticide. Their power and influence was beyond 
 comprehension to the civilised mind ; and their rites and ceremonies 
 were of so bloody and revolting a nature, so utterly monstrous and 
 degrading that they "appeared to have placed their invention on the 
 rack to discover the most hideous crimes of which it was possible for 
 man to be guilty." Yet for all this the natives of the Society Islands, 
 especially the shiefs, looked upon them with feelings akin to veneration. 
 
PIPIRI THE AREOI 85 
 
 had not molested her further, although she had fre- 
 quently seen him talking earnestly with her mother. 
 Only once since Christian had sailed had she met him. 
 She was returning with Alrema from her look-out on 
 the hill, when the Areoi sprang upon the girls as they 
 passed along the narrow, palm-shaded path. His face 
 was stained scarlet with the juice of the tnati berry, 
 his long black hair hung loosely down over his copper- 
 coloured shoulders, and his gleaming savage eyes struck 
 terror into her heart ; but Alrema faced him daunt- 
 lessly. 
 
 " Ho, Mahina, daughter of Manuhuru, and Alrema 
 the saucy-tongued," he cried mockingly, " whence 
 come ye ? Are ye still waiting for the white men 
 who will never return ? Dost think that thy eyes can 
 draw back the g-reat outri2;2;erless canoe ? " ' 
 
 " What is that to thee, Pipiri the slaughterer ? " 
 asked Alrema, tearing away her hand from his grasp ; 
 "and seek not to frighten us. Think not that 
 because thou hast become an Areoi' / fear thee ! " 
 
 " Nay, I know that thou fearest no one," replied 
 the priest fiercely ; " but 'tis not thee for whom I 
 waited here. Thou art but a chattering fool, whose 
 tongue I may yet cut off at the roots ; but it is thee, 
 Mahina, who hast eaten into my heart— so now I ask 
 thee once more, Why dost thou wait for this white 
 lover of thine ? He will never return, I tell thee. 
 Heed not the talk of this fool Alrema and those like 
 her — who have listened to their white lover's lies. 
 Fifty and two days have gone since the ship sailed, 
 
 ' The Tahitians called the first ships they saw outriggerless canoes. 
 
86 THE MUTINEER 
 
 and I tell thee thou wilt never see thy white man 
 again." 
 
 Mahina took courage from Alrema, whose rounded 
 bosom panted with rage at the mocking words of the 
 Areoi, and she sought to soften Pipiri's savage 
 nature. 
 
 " Why should I alone be the one woman for whom 
 thou carest, Pipiri ? There are many others better 
 than I. So pray thee let me be as I am. Yet ir 
 Kirisiani comes not back in three moons from now, 
 then I will be thy wife." 
 
 The Areoi laughed. " Nay, in less time than that. 
 Only just now thy mother swore to me that I might 
 take thee in one moon ; for in me, too, is the same 
 blood that flows in thy veins — the blood of the race of 
 Afita, and for that alone thou shouldst come to me." 
 Then without further words he stood aside and let 
 the girls pass on to their homes. 
 
 That was ten days ago, and Mahina, as she sat' with 
 her face leaning upon her hands and gazed seaward, 
 felt the tears well up into her eyes. Her mother had 
 indeed promised her in marriage to the blood-stained 
 Areoi, whom the old woman regarded as a superior 
 man even to the highest chief in the land on account 
 of the blood-tie between them, and because of the 
 bitter, undying hatred he showed to the white men. 
 This she was always ready to stimulate, telling him 
 scornfully that he knew not how to dispose of a rival 
 or he would have enticed Christian from the village 
 and killed him. 
 
 Away to the westward the blue, sailless ocean 
 
PIPIRI THE AREOI 87 
 
 sparkled and shimmered in the rays of the sun ; and 
 nearer in, though far below where she sat, the long 
 rollers of pale emerald swept in serried lines upon the 
 shelving reef of the little bay, and wavering clouds of 
 misty spume drifted slowly before the wind as the 
 rollers curled over and burst upon the rocky barrier on 
 their passage to the shore. 
 
 For nearly an hour Mahina sat thus, hearing no 
 sound save the soft crooning note of some resting 
 pigeon in the silent forest around her, or the faint 
 murmur of voices from a party of men in fishing 
 canoes who had landed on the white beach far below ; 
 then, with despair in her heart, she rose to return to 
 the village. And there, with his back against the 
 bole of a great tamanii tree, again stood Pipiri the 
 Areoi, looking at her intently. 
 
 " Why dost thou watch me ? " she asked, trying 
 to pass him, but he stayed her gently with his 
 hand. 
 
 " Because, oh foolish one, I love thee, I love thee ; 
 and I hate to see thy cheeks, that were once so round 
 and soft, grow thin and drawn with the folly that is 
 consuming thee. See," and he pointed with his 
 bronzed and brawny arm to the ocean, "see how 
 evenly the sky touches the water, as the half-shell 
 of a coconut would stand upon my hand. No v/hite 
 sail will break through the sky-rim, and no white 
 man shall come between thee and me." 
 
 " If Oro so wills it. But the time that my mother 
 has given me to wait is not yet gone ; why dost thou 
 for ever trouble me ? " 
 
88 THE MUTINEER 
 
 '' Because Orotetefa ' hath spoken to me from his 
 altar and told me to wait no longer, for thy white 
 lover will never return. And to-morrow shall our 
 marriage feast be." 
 
 He ceased suddenly, for there was borne to them 
 through the silence of the surrounding forest a cry 
 that sent the blood dancing through the veins of the 
 girl before him with a maddening joy — "A ship! 
 a ship ! " 
 
 She sprang away from him to the verge of the hill 
 and there — not a far distant speck on the horizon, but 
 rounding the northern point — was a ship, standing in 
 before the breeze and furling her sails as she approached 
 the anchorage. 
 
 A quick mist filled the girl's dark eyes, and she 
 staggered for a moment upon her feet. Then she 
 turned and looked into the rage-distorted face of the 
 Areoi priest. 
 
 " Thou hast lied to me, Pipiri the Areoi." 
 
 In another moment, evading the savage grasp with 
 which he sought to stay her, she was flying down the 
 hillside to the beach. 
 
 ' One of the guardian deities of the Areois. He was believed some- 
 times to speak to any especially favoured worshipper. 
 
CHAPTER XI 
 
 TOGETHER AGAIN 
 
 BEFORE the panting girl reached the beach the 
 Bounty was at anchor and her deck crowded 
 with natives, who greeted Christian and the ship's 
 company with the most extravagant manifestations of 
 joy. For him personally they had always shown the 
 liveliest regard ; not only was he one of Tuti's people, 
 but his uniform kindness to them had won their hearts, 
 and, indeed, Bligh himself was the only one of the 
 Bounty s company whom they feared more than they 
 loved. 
 
 Tina himself was among the first to board the ship, 
 and his frank, ingenuous countenance betrayed his 
 astonishment at the return of his friends, while his 
 wondering, inquiring glance as his eye roved over the 
 group of officers on the poop-deck showed that he was 
 quick to discover the absence of Bligh. 
 
 " la oro na oe^ Kirhiani^^ ' he said with a smile, 
 advancing to Christian, "and where is the chief 
 Pirai ? And why hath the ship come back so soon ? 
 
 ' " May you live, Christian," the Tahitian form of greeting. 
 89 
 
90 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Hast thou already been to Peretane and returned in 
 three moons ? " 
 
 Fletcher Christian was quick with his answer. 
 " Nay, Tina, friend of my heart, we have been 
 fortunate. See, when we neared the island that is 
 called Tonga ' we there met the great chief, he 
 whom you call Tuti.^ He took on board his ship 
 our chief Pirai and many others of our people and all 
 the presents of breadfruit trees for our king. And 
 then said he to me, * Go thou back, Kirisiani, to the 
 country of Tina, my friend, and say these words to 
 him, " I, Tuti, his friend, need yams and pigs and 
 other food ; my people are many and I cannot feed 
 them all, for the sea is wide between here and Britain.' 
 And for these things have I returned to Tahiti, while 
 Tuti awaits me at Tonga. And for a gift he hath 
 sent thee by me much iron, for he knoweth that iron 
 is needed by thy people." 
 
 Tina smiled pleasantly and expressed his earnest 
 desire to serve both Cook and Bligh ; and he and many 
 minor chiefs who had flocked on board greeted every 
 one of the mutineers as old and dear friends. 
 
 For some minutes great excitement and confusion 
 prevailed, and in the midst of the pleasant clamour 
 a small canoe, paddled by two young women, ran 
 
 ' Tofoa would be unknown to Tina, who would, however, have been 
 acquainted with the name of Tonga, in which group it is situated, 
 
 ^ Bligh, and his people on the Bounty, considered it advisable to care- 
 fully conceal the fact of Cook's death from the Tahitians, This decep- 
 tion was practised on account of the intense veneration the natives had 
 for him, and Bligh feared that the disclosure of his death would have a 
 bad effect on his mission. 
 
TOGETHER AGAIN 91 
 
 alongside the ship, and Mahina sprang up the ladder 
 on deck, and with a soft, joyous cry threw herself into 
 Christian's arms. 
 
 " Thou hast returned, my own," she murmured. 
 " Oro hath heard my prayers, and thy heart is still 
 mine." 
 
 An angry flush for a moment suffused Christian's 
 cheek at this demonstration before the whole ship's 
 company, and drawing her aside he rebuked her. 
 
 " Mahina," he said severely, " in my country it is 
 only the base and lower sort who show their hearts in 
 this way before all men." 
 
 The girl trembled, but quickly recovered herself, 
 and her dark eyes flashed. Drawing back from her 
 lover she spoke in such tones of wounded pride that 
 Christian felt his cheeks burn v/ith shame. 
 
 " Truly, I had forgotten that the blood of the white 
 man is cold," then placing her hands on her eyes, she 
 walked away, and the hot tears trickled through her 
 fingers. 
 
 Few as were her words, they touched him. He 
 remembered that since he had parted from this girl 
 two months before the whole of his life had been 
 changed. Her passionate devotion to him during the 
 five months the Bounty first remained at Tahiti was 
 the one bright spot which then had made life endurable, 
 and now, her faithful heart bursting with love for him, 
 he had met her tender embraces with what to her was 
 cold brutality. " She alone is the only soul on earth 
 who will love me to the end," he thought bitterly ; 
 "she alone will not shrink from contact with me, 
 
92 THE MUTINEER 
 
 in the time to come." He followed and took her 
 hand. 
 
 "Mahina," he whispered, "forgive me, for thou 
 knowest that for thy sake I have thrown away for 
 ever my country and kindred. Thou art the one 
 woman dear to me in the world, and thy life is my 
 life." 
 
 She flung her arms round his neck and, caring not 
 for those who stood about oh the Bounty's deck, kissed 
 him again and again in all the abandonment of her 
 fondness. 
 
 Whispering that she might wait for him in the 
 cabin, he gently disengaged her arms, and turned away 
 to look for Tina. 
 
 That night every one of the mutineers, except their 
 chief and Smith, went ashore to their native friends ; 
 and as the sound of their singing and dancing floated 
 across the bay to the ship, Mahina, in the cabin of the 
 Bounty^ lifted her eyes to Christian's and contentedly 
 laid her head upon his breast. 
 
 The Bounty was once more ready for sea. Great 
 numbers of hogs, goats, and fowls were cheerfully 
 given by the islanders to Christian and his com- 
 panions, and, for a small parcel of some red feathers — 
 which were highly prized by the natives — Tina 
 presented them with a cow and bull which had been 
 left on the island by Captain Cook. Water, wood, 
 mahi (baked fermented breadfruit), yams, coconuts 
 and breadfruit were also put on board in profusion. 
 
 I 
 
TOGETHER AGAIN 93 
 
 After making a careful survey of the ship and listening 
 to various suggestions made by the crew for her 
 repair, the leader of the mutineers went ashore for the 
 last time before his marriage, which was to take place 
 on the following day. 
 
 Accompanied by Smith, the young man, after 
 landing and pushing through the crowd of natives 
 who had gathered on the beach and sought to 
 detain him in friendly converse, made his way to 
 a native house of considerable size and handsome 
 construction. 
 
 Here Heywood and Stewart were living. The 
 latter had renewed his former tender relations with 
 Nuia, who, the moment Christian entered, met him 
 with a bright smile of welcome. 
 
 Then she went for Stewart and Heywood, who 
 were lying on the village lawn under the shade 
 of a breadfruit tree. Christian had permitted the 
 two young officers to leave the ship on the day 
 after her arrival, principally because of the passionate 
 entreaties of Nuia, who imagined he was her lover's 
 enemy and would kill him for some neglect of duty, 
 and secondly because he had induced both not to 
 reveal the true cause of his return to the islanders, 
 so long as the Bounty remained at Tahiti. As for the 
 natives themselves, although they had begun to suspect 
 that all things were not quite as the mutineers repre- 
 sented them, yet they believed that Cook had good 
 reasons for sending the ship back to Tahiti ; and that 
 he had done so they never for a moment doubted. So 
 Tina and his people were pleased enough when 
 
94 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Christian proposed that some of them should sail away 
 in the Bounty and visit Peretane and King George. 
 To further the deception, Christian stated that he had 
 no objection to some of his own men, who had allied 
 themselves to native women, remaining behind at 
 Tahiti. This proposal was made to account for the 
 fact that besides Heywood and Stewart several of the 
 crew had determined to sever themselves from the 
 ship's company ; not for the same reasons which 
 animated the two midshipmen, but because the women 
 with whom they were living did not care to venture 
 to sea in the " great outriggerless canoe." 
 
 In a few minutes Heywood and Stewart entered the 
 house. 
 
 Both of them looked cheerful and well, and 
 Christian could not help feeling pleased at the friendly 
 manner in which they returned his greeting. 
 
 " I have come to see you, perhaps for the last 
 time," he said, " and to thank you for the manner in 
 which you have kept your promise to a broken and 
 disgraced man. Heaven knows, my lads, that I would 
 gladly assist you to return to England if it were in my 
 power. But have no fear ; that a ship will be sent 
 out here is an absolute certainty." 
 
 Heywood ventured to question him as to when he 
 intended sailing. 
 
 " Do not ask me," he replied hurriedly, while the 
 hot blood mounted to his forehead ; " it may be soon, 
 it may not be for a week, but I cannot come and see 
 you again . . . and I want you to shake hands with 
 me before I go." 
 
TOGETHER AGAIN 95 
 
 After a momentary hesitation Stewart held out his 
 hand, but young Heywood, whose eyes were filled 
 with tears, with boyish impulsiveness sprang forward 
 before his companion. 
 
 " Goodbye, sir ; I will never forget how good you 
 have always been to me on the Bounty.'''' 
 
 Christian took their hands in his and wrung them. 
 " Goodbye, my lads. God bleis you both, and forgive 
 me all the harm I may have done you." 
 
 Then he turned away, and with Smith closely 
 following him, was soon lost to sight. 
 
 Soon after dawn the village was astir with the pre- 
 parations for Christian's marriage. 
 
 Troops of natives carrying presents of food and 
 other articles kept constantly arriving from all parts of 
 the coast, and the first to welcome them and instruct 
 them wliere to place their gifts was old Manuhuru, 
 Mahina's mother. She was quick to recognise, as 
 soon as Christian returned the possessor of so many 
 riches, the advisability of withdrawing all further 
 opposition to her daughter's marriage with the young 
 Englishman ; for with all her hatred of the white 
 men she was very avaricious. 
 
 Only that morning she had bidden Pipiri give up 
 all hope of her child now that Christian had returned ; 
 and the young warrior-priest, with savage hatred in 
 his heart, had cursed her and sworn yet to possess her 
 daughter if fifty white men stood in his way. 
 
 As Mahina was connected through her parents with 
 the reigning family of Tahiti, the marriage ceremony 
 was to be performed in the marae or temple of Oro 
 
96 THE MUTINEER 
 
 instead of in the family marae^ and thither went all 
 the people to witness the event. 
 
 Mahina, sitting on a mat, was surrounded by a 
 number of young girls who had arrayed her in her 
 wedding garments ; at a sign from the officiating 
 priest of Oro she rose and advanced to meet her white 
 lover, who, attended by Alexander Smith and a number 
 of young natives of strikingly handsome appearance, 
 was now walking across the grassy sward towards her, 
 his plain uniform contrasting strangely with the wild, 
 yet picturesque, garb of his island friends, most of 
 whom had their hair profusely decorated with wreaths 
 of white and scarlet blossoms. Round each man's 
 waist was a girdle composed of scarlet leaves of the t'l 
 plant, and bright yellow strips of the plantain leaf. 
 Upon each wrist and ankle were circlets of pieces 
 of pearl shell fitted into an embroidered net work of 
 red and black cinnet ; the islanders' light brown skins 
 shone with the scented oil with which they had 
 anointed themselves, and the beautiful curved lines or 
 deep blue tattooing with which their bodies were so 
 freely covered stood out with such startling distinct- 
 ness that even Smith, the most tattooed man of all 
 the bounty s crew, could not help uttering a cry or 
 admiration. 
 
 When about fifty reet distant from each other, the 
 two parties stopped, and a pretty little maiden, carry- 
 ing in her hand a ripe plantain and a young drinking 
 coconut, advanced out from among the women sur- 
 rounding Mahina, and addressed the young native 
 chief who led Christian's party — 
 
TOGETHER AGAIN 
 
 97 
 
 "Who are ye that come here so gaily clad, and 
 why do ye come ? " 
 
 "I, Kirisiani, come to the altar of Oro so that I 
 may take for my wife Mahina, daughter of Manuhuru," 
 replied the mutineer, taking the plantain and coconut 
 from her and giving her a piece of stained native cloth 
 in return. 
 
 The child returned to her party, who began to 
 chant some verses in praise of the beauty of Mahina ; 
 then the ranks opened out, and Christian, prompted 
 by a chief, stepped to her side. 
 
 Together they slowly walked to the marae^ where 
 they seated themselves upon mats. Christian at one 
 end of the temple, Mahina at the other, while the 
 people disposed themselves round the sacred edifice in 
 silence. 
 
 The leafy screen in front of one of the sacred 
 dormitories opened ; Harere, the priest, clothed in 
 the vestments of his sacred office, stepped forward, 
 and, spreading a small square of white tappa cloth 
 in the centre of the temple, bade Mahina and the 
 white man seat themselves upon it. Then, standing 
 directly in front of Christian, he said, in a loud voice, 
 " Kirisiani.^ taata Peretane^ eita anei oe e faa ''rue t ta 
 oe vahinef'' ("Christian, the Englishman, wilt thou 
 not cast away this woman ?") to which the mutineer 
 replied '■^ Eita" ("No "). The same question was put to 
 Mahina, and the girl, with a happy smile lighting up 
 her lovely face, and her little hand pressing her lover's, 
 quickly gave the same answer. 
 
 " Fortunate then may your lives be if thus ye 
 8 
 
98 THE MUTINEER 
 
 remain true one to another," said Harere. Then 
 stepping back from them and facing the sacred altar 
 of Oro, the priest prayed to the god that the English- 
 man and his wife might live together in affection, 
 that male children might be given to them in the 
 earlier years of their married life, that they might not 
 "hunger nor thirst, nor see blood shed w^ithin their 
 house." 
 
 Then old Manuhuru stepped into the sacred en- 
 closure, bearing in her hands a heavy piece of ahu 
 vavauy or tappa cloth, w^hich she spread out upon 
 the stone floor of the temple ; and Harere the priest 
 bade the lovers sit upon it and hold each other by the 
 hand while he again addressed them. 
 
 " Hearken, Englishman. It is the custom of this 
 land for the man and the woman who marry before 
 Oro and sit as thou and this woman sit now, to place 
 before them the skulls of their ancestors, whose 
 spirits, entering into the dead bones, will hear the 
 vows that ye have made one to the other. But thou, 
 Kirisiani, art from a far-off country, and it is not the 
 custom of thy people to carry about with them on the 
 sea the skulls of their forefathers. And the mother of 
 thy wife, though now as we are, Tahitian, is, like 
 thee, of strange blood — her mother's people came 
 from a distant land which sprang from out the sea, 
 and neither hath she a skull to place before thee. 
 And for this does Manuhuru now make a sacrifice 
 before Oro." 
 
 He handed to Mahina's mother a large shark's tooth 
 with the base embedded in a piece of polished wood. 
 
TOGETHER AGAIN 99 
 
 Advancing to Christian, the old woman seized his 
 right arm and made a small cut with the sharp point 
 of the tooth upon the palm of his hand, then did the 
 same upon the hand of her daughter. As the blood 
 flowed and dripped down she caught it upon a piece 
 of cloth with her left hand, and with her right she 
 thrust the keen-edged tooth into her own breast, brow, 
 and left shoulder, over and over again. 
 
 " See, white man," she croaked. " Once I hated 
 thee and all white men, but now thy blood and mine 
 and my daughter's have mixed. And if thy blood is 
 as good as mine — for I am of Afita— then does this 
 mingling of it with mine render thee equal to Mahina ; 
 and, moreover, the mixing of blood shall bind thee 
 closer to thy wife." 
 
 Scarcely able to conceal his disgust at the frightful 
 spectacle the old woman presented, with her face and 
 shoulders streaming with blood. Christian was glad to 
 submit to the concluding part of the ceremony, which 
 was the brief suspension over the heads of the married 
 pair of a large piece of cloth called te tapoi. 
 
 Leaving the temple Christian and his bride were 
 escorted to a new house specially prepared for them in 
 which to receive their presents, and the young man 
 could not but be touched at the people's expression of 
 their kindly feeling towards him, and the overwhelm- 
 ing display of their generosity. 
 
 The rest of the day was spent in the wildest enjoy- 
 ment and sumptuous feasting ; then when darkness 
 descended upon the scene the women and girls sang 
 and danced, and a band of Areois delighted the people 
 
loo THE MUTINEER 
 
 by their wild pantomimic exhibitions far into the 
 night. 
 
 But in the midst of the merry clamour Mahina, 
 without bidding her aged mother farewell, stole quietly 
 away to the ship to await her husband, who had gone 
 to take leave of Tina. As she paddled off alone in a 
 tiny canoe, the tall, stalwart figure of Pipiri the Areoi 
 appeared on the beach. For a few seconds he watched 
 her as she disappeared in the darkness. Then he 
 plunged into the water and swam noiselessly in the 
 same direction. 
 
 Long before daylight next morning Mahina awoke 
 and found that her husband was gone from her side. 
 A wild look of fear for a moment blanched her olive 
 cheek ; then a smile parted her lips as she heard his 
 voice on deck. 
 
 " Man the capstan, lads." 
 
 She ran on deck and found the ship crowded with 
 natives, among whom were Tina and his noble wife, 
 who wept when Christian bade them farewell. To 
 King George the chief sent many messages, for he 
 firmly believed that the Bounty was on her way to 
 England. 
 
 Amid the sounds of weeping and the sighing of 
 tender farewells the anchor came in sight, the 
 ship's head swung round, and the Bounty was again 
 under way. 
 
 Once outside the white line of foaming surge which 
 thundered on the reef, Edward Young, who had been 
 securing the anchor, came quietly aft and stood beside 
 his wife Alrema, who, with Mahina and other women, 
 
TOGETHER AGAIN loi 
 
 was on the poop. Presently, as Ch/istian passed, 
 Young caught him by the arm. 
 
 "I didn't like to disturb you lact night, an c! stf 
 acted on my own responsibility. Stewart and 
 Heywood came on board and announced their 
 determination to sail with us if you would permit 
 them." 
 
 Fletcher Christian's face darkened. " Stewart and 
 Heywood ! What does this mean ? " 
 
 " Treachery," answered Young, " and I determined 
 to meet treachery with deceit. I told them that I 
 was certain you would never consent to their coming 
 on board again, but that if they liked to stow them- 
 selves away till we got out to sea I would not say 
 anything about it, but let them discuss the matter 
 with you afterwards." 
 
 " Are you mad, Young, to do this ? " 
 
 The sallow-faced midshipman laughed. " Not a 
 bit of it. They might do us more harm by remaining 
 at Tahiti than they would by coming with us. 
 Stewart has Nuia with him, and although she is as 
 true as steel to the chicken-hearted dog, she has let it 
 out to Alrema that he persuaded Heywood to come 
 on board with him last night." 
 
 " What do you think is his intention ? " asked 
 Christian moodily. 
 
 " To recapture the ship, and try to sail her to 
 England and get a commission — while we dangle 
 from a yard-arm at Portsmouth." 
 
 " Then why let them come on board ? " 
 
 " Vo prevent their giving us trouble in the future. 
 
102 THE MUTINEER 
 
 'f hfeie are loi-S of islands where no ships are ever likely 
 to touch, and we can put them ashore before we 
 reach TuDuai- — and be damned to them." 
 
 " To let them perhaps die, with their fate unknown ! 
 But there, Young, forgive me. You have done wisely. 
 Let them come on deck, and I will watch them 
 closely till a fitting time arrives for us to rid ourselves 
 of them." 
 
 On board the Bounty were several native women, 
 the wives of Smith, Quintal, and McCoy, and two 
 Tahitian men, brothers of Smith's and Quintal's 
 wives, who had determined to accompany the white 
 men. These Christian was glad to see, as he thought 
 they would prove useful as interpreters. 
 
 But an hour later, after his talk with Young, and 
 when the land was twenty miles astern, it was found 
 that many more natives had hidden themselves on 
 board, and that altogether the Bounty's complement 
 had been increased by twelve women, eight boys, and 
 nine men. 
 
CHAPTER XII 
 
 THE END OF PIPIRI 
 
 SEVEN days later the ship was once more at 
 Tubuai, but the passage had been so rough that 
 most of the live stock were washed overboard, and 
 the natives had to help work the ship. To add 
 to the troubles of the voyage, Mahina and the other 
 women suffered so much from sickness that they were 
 in the last stage of exhaustion when Tubuai was 
 sighted. And Christian, who, from the hour he had 
 plunged into the mutiny had repented it, grew morose 
 and miserable with the bitterness of unavailing regret 
 and the anxieties of his position as leader. 
 
 Well it was for him that at this time and in the 
 black days to come, the example of Smith and Young 
 kept alive in the rest of the crew a respect for him ; 
 for these two men, by their undeviating loyalty to 
 their leader and their influence for good with their 
 fellow-mutineers, preserved the spirit of obedience to 
 their chief, and thus averted the worst danger that 
 could threaten such a company. 
 
 As the ship entered the passage, the Tubuaians, 
 103 
 
104 THE MUTINEER 
 
 instead of attacking the ship as it was feared they 
 would, came off in their canoes in great numbers, 
 and seeing the Tahitians on board, quickly made 
 friends with them. They clambered up the sides of 
 the Bounty, seized the ropes, and helped the sailors to 
 warp the vessel through the reef to a safe anchorage. 
 In a very short time barter was begun ; Christian, 
 accompanied by Mahina, went ashore, and with her 
 aid as interpreter he soon negotiated with the chief of 
 the island for a strip of land on which to erect a fort. 
 
 But the Tubuaians were less friendly when they 
 found that the white men intended to live among 
 them, and they sought to withdraw from the treaty 
 they had just made. 
 
 " We like not the white strangers," said one of 
 them to Mahina. " How comes it that if, as thou 
 sayest, the white chief is thy husband he remained not 
 with thee in the Big Land ? ^ Why comes he here 
 to seek a home ? " 
 
 " Foolish man," answered the wily Mahina haugh- 
 tily. " Little dost thou know of the customs of these 
 clever white men. They are as wise as the gods, and 
 like not the ways of the people of Tahiti. And the 
 men of Peretane are more like those of Tubuai — they 
 eat and drink and live alike — and for this reason do 
 they desire to remain on Tubuai." 
 
 This compliment, and the gift of a quantity of iron, 
 induced the Tubuaians to offer no further opposi- 
 tion. The ground was to the eastward of the 
 entrance at a place called Avamoa ; and here, in 
 
 • Tahiti. 
 
THE END OF PIPIRI 105 
 
 spite of shoal water and the numberless coral boulders 
 which studded the lagoon, it was determined to 
 bring the Bounty. 
 
 The ship was lightened as much as possible — no 
 easy task, for there was but one boat — and after much 
 labour she was brought close up to the site of the pro- 
 posed fort and moored in six fathoms of water. For 
 two days the work of lightening the ship proceeded 
 steadily, and Christian took part with the others in the 
 task. The Tubuaians lent some assistance ; but their 
 habits of pilfering at last brought such an explosion of 
 wrath from the leader of the mutineers that they de- 
 sisted, and matters again went on smoothly for a time. 
 
 It was the custom of Mahina, Alrema, Nuia, and 
 the other Tahitian women to sit about the poop and 
 watch the labours of their white husbands, and listen 
 to the loud, excited cries of the half-naked, fierce- 
 looking Tubuaians as they swarmed about the main 
 deck, examining with intense curiosity the strange 
 fittings of the ship, and arguing vociferously among 
 themselves as to their use. 
 
 Late one afternoon, just after the last boat load had 
 left for the site of the fort, and the wild islanders 
 had gone ashore in their canoes, Mahina was 
 standing alone at the stern. Gazing down into the 
 transparent depths of the lagoon and watching the 
 many-hued fish that swam in and out among the 
 branches of the coral forest which covered the 
 bottom, she was startled by a touch upon the shoulder, 
 and turning, she met the face of Pipiri the Areoi, 
 looking at her with intense hatred gleaming from his 
 
io6 THE MUTINEER 
 
 eyes. So changed was he by his sickness on the 
 voyage that she could not recognise him, and, in 
 addition to this (perhaps for the purpose of disguise), 
 he had shaved his head completely, and his once care- 
 fully trimmed beard had disappeared. 
 
 She uttered a cry of alarm, and in an instant Chris- 
 tian was beside her. 
 
 " What is the matter ? " he asked. 
 
 With terror in her face she pointed to Pipiri and 
 murmured : " 'Tis Pipiri the Areoi ; he hath frightened 
 me. 
 
 Christian looked at the Tahitian and gradually 
 recognised his features, and remembered that the 
 people at Pare and Matavai had told him that if he 
 had not returned the Areoi would have married 
 Mahina. 
 
 " How do you come here ? " he asked. 
 
 " I was hidden in the bowels of the ship," answered 
 the man, defiantly. He staggered as he spoke, and 
 Christian correctly surmised that some of the seamen 
 had given him rum to drink. 
 
 " But why ? What good can come of this ? " 
 
 " That I might be with Mahina — she of whom 
 thou hast robbed me," he replied savagely. 
 
 " Poor fool," muttered the mutineer in English, 
 adding in Tahitian, " Truly I pity thee, but yet thou 
 art a fool to have hidden thyself in the ship ; for now 
 will I make thee work and thou shalt be a bond slave 
 to thy countrymen." 
 
 " Not so," answered the Areoi proudly. " Have 
 not others of my countrymen come with thee ; why, 
 
THE END OF PIPIRI 107 
 
 then, should I not live in Tubuai as an Areoi and an 
 Aito ? " (a warrior). 
 
 "I will answer thee, Pipiri the slaughterer, thou 
 cruel and bloody-handed man " — and Mahina faced 
 him. "Thou hast come for no good purpose ; and 
 truly we should be foolish to trust thee, save as a slave 
 may be trusted. Do I not know that thou hast sworn 
 to be revenged because I would have none of thee ? " 
 Turning to her husband she coutinued, " Send this 
 man away. Let him go live among the Tubuaians, 
 and suffer him not to come near the ship nor our 
 people. I know his bad and cruel heart." 
 
 The Tahitian laughed hoarsely. "Truly, Mahina, 
 thou art a clever woman. I indeed will go and live 
 with the people of Tubuai ; but I swear by my gods 
 to return and take my revenge." 
 
 The next instant he sprang over the side, and 
 Christian, in an endeavour to soothe his wife's fears 
 and at her earnest entreaty, gave the order that he 
 was not to be allowed to approach the whites in 
 future. 
 
 Parties were now formed to fell timber, the fort was 
 planned, and men under the direction of Edward 
 Young began to dig a moat round the site. The 
 Bounty^s armament of four four-pounders and ten 
 swivels was got on shore ; the Tahitians who had 
 accompanied the ship took an active part in the work, 
 principally because of the probability of their seeing 
 the guns used in action against the Tubuaians and 
 witnessing the destruction the weapons would accom- 
 plish. 
 
io8 THE MUTINEER 
 
 All this labour took some weeks to perform, and 
 during that time it daily became more evident that the 
 people of Tubuai disliked their visitors ; indeed, during 
 the last days of unloading the ship and digging the 
 moat two or three skirmishes took place between 
 them and the white men and their Tahitian allies. 
 
 Early in September, however, so far had the work 
 of constructing the fort progressed, that most of the 
 people left the ship and took up their quarters therein. 
 The four-pounders and swivels were mounted in such 
 a position as to make Christian perfectly sure that, 
 should the Tubuaians attack the stronghold, they 
 would suffer a disastrous defeat. But while aware 
 that such an attack might be made, he was yet 
 hopeful that ere long they would recognise his desire 
 to live among them in peace. Mahina, day after day, 
 went into the principal town, and strove to impress 
 the head chief, Maouri, that the white men's advent 
 would prove of advantage to his people. Still, though 
 they received the beautiful Tahitian with the greatest 
 courtesy and respect, they were cold and suspicious in 
 their manner. One day, when accompanied by Alrema, 
 she visited the village, they found the whole population 
 assembled in the square, listening to an address by an 
 orator. The moment the two women came in view 
 the orator disappeared, not so quickly but that in him 
 they had recognised Pipiri the Areoi. 
 
 "Let us go back," Mahina said to Young's wife; 
 " mischief is meant to us in the fort ; else why should 
 these people gather together to listen to Pipiri, who 
 is the enemy of us all ? " 
 
THE END OF PIPIRI 109 
 
 Fearing that an attack was intended, Christian, as 
 soon as Mahina told him what she had seen, doubled 
 jl his sentries and kept a careful watch. For two nights 
 I they were undisturbed, but on the third, just after 
 I darkness had settled on the island, Talalu, a Tahitian 
 ■ sentry on the western face of the fort, called them to 
 arms. 
 
 Scarcely had they time to snatch up their weapons 
 and fire a volley, when a large party of the islanders 
 surrounded the fort on three sides and began a deter- 
 mined assault. With wild cries of defiance and in 
 face of a continuous fire of musketry and grape from 
 the swivels, they jumped into the moat and scrambled 
 up on the other side. Scores of them were shot down 
 as they appeared over the bank, for many carried 
 torches made of the spathe of the coconut tree, with 
 which they intended to fire the buildings within by 
 throwing them over the palisade of coconut logs that 
 enclosed it. The light from these torches, slight as 
 it was, showed the assailants so clearly to Christian's 
 garrison, that ere they could form for their second 
 rush McCoy, Quintal and Smith each fired a swivel 
 loaded with grape into the surging mass. Dreadful 
 cries of agony followed, and so terrified were the 
 Tubuaians at the awful effects of the fire that they 
 wavered and were about to retreat. Instantly half a 
 dozen chiefs, waving their spears, sprang to the front ; 
 then the attacking party, beating their battle-drums 
 loudly, again advanced to the assault. 
 
 Suddenly, as the dark, waving line of Tubuains 
 swept over the undulating ground which lay between 
 
no THE MUTINEER 
 
 them and the western face of the fort, a blaze of light 
 lit up the surrounding forest, and Mahina and the 
 other women appeared beside the white men, carrying 
 torches which revealed not only the naked forms of 
 the savages now trying to scale the palisade, but also 
 the dead and wounded who had fallen from the white 
 men's first fire, and who lay on the edge of and in the 
 bottom of the moat. So irresistible, however, was the 
 rush of the assailants, that fifteen or sixteen of them 
 succeeded in clambering over the stockade and jumping 
 down into the fort. Armed with a short stabbing 
 spear in the left and a heavy ebony-wood club in the 
 right hand, these daring fellows made a rush at Chris- 
 tian, McCoy, and Smith, who were firing through 
 the palisade at the swarm of yelling savages outside. 
 Loud warning cries from Mahina and Alrema made 
 Christian turn suddenly, but too late to avoid a vicious 
 thrust from a spear, which passed through his left arm. 
 Then came the report of a pistol close to him — 
 the rush of foemen bore him back to the palisade 
 bruised, stunned, and bleeding, and there he fell 
 exhausted. 
 
 Flinging the blazing torches into the centre of the 
 fort, the women with knives and cutlasses in their 
 hands, sprang down from where they stood to help 
 their white husbands ; and while some continued to 
 fire at point-blank range into the thick mass of natives 
 outside, the rest of the white men and Tahitians made 
 short work of those within. Soon not one was left 
 alive ; the women, at the command of Mahina, seized 
 all their dead bodies, save one, dragged thern to the 
 
THE END OF PIPIRI in 
 
 top of the palisade and with cries of contempt hurled 
 them over among the assailants. 
 
 For nearly ten minutes more the Tubuaians sought 
 to force an entrance through the stout logs, heedless 
 of the fire from the seamen's muskets, which were 
 thrust through the spaces and discharged with deadly 
 effect. Seizing the musket barrels the valorous 
 savages by sheer strength tore them from the hands 
 of those who held them, then with cries of defiance 
 thrust their spears through the same apertures. By 
 this time three of the white men had received severe 
 wounds, and Young was just about to remove one of 
 the four-pounders from where it was mounted to that 
 part of the palisading where the assault was heaviest, 
 when the Tubuaians broke and fled. 
 
 "Whew !" said Young, wiping his powder-blackened 
 face and addressing Christian, whose arm was being 
 bound up by Mahina and Talalu, " that was warm 
 while it lasted. Not badly hurt, I trust. Christian ? " 
 
 " No," answered the leader, " only a thrust from a 
 spear through the arm ; the rascal meant it for my 
 heart, though," and then he closed his eyes from 
 weakness. Round him stood the seamen, stripped to 
 their waists, with cutlasses and muskets gleaming in 
 the dying light of the torches which still lay burning 
 on the ground. With one hand leaning on her 
 husband's shoulder, in the other a cutlass bloody from 
 hilt to point, was Alrema. Like the men around her 
 she was bare to the waist, and her shapely arms and 
 bosom were as ensanguined as the weapon she carried. 
 
 " Nay, Etuati," she panted with a smile when 
 
112 THE MUTINEER 
 
 the light shone on her all but nude figure, and 
 startled Young, " 'tis not my blood that thou seest ; 
 not once did a spear touch me. Ah, these dogs of 
 Tubuai ! Ah, my husband, thou didst not know that 
 in our country we women go to war side by side with 
 our husbands and our lovers." 
 
 Stern and callous as he was by nature, the young 
 man shuddered visibly as he looked at the shocking 
 appearance of his young wife ; stretching out his hand 
 he unclasped hers from the cutlass, and gently led her 
 towards the hut in which she slept. 
 
 Christian rose to his feet and was about to follow 
 them when Mahina stayed him. " Dost thou know 
 whose was the hand that sent the spear ? " she asked. 
 " Come with me and I will show thee." 
 
 In the middle of the stockade lay a naked savage. 
 By the light of the torch held by Mahina, Christian 
 saw the tatooing on the dead man's back and legs, and 
 knew that he was a Tahitian. 
 
 Stooping down, Mahina turned the body over, and 
 pointed to the face. 
 
 " Pipiri ! " exclaimed Christian. 
 
 " Aye, Pipiri the Areoi ; he who swore to have 
 thy life and mine." 
 
 " Poor devil," said Christian in English, and then to 
 Mahina, " he hath a bullet hole through his chest. 
 Who killed him ? " 
 
 " I," she answered, holding out Young's pistol — the 
 pistol with which he had once sworn to kill Captain 
 Bligh. 
 
CHAPTER XIII 
 
 FAREWELL TO TUBUAI 
 
 FOR a few days after the battle the white men 
 remained undisturbed in the fort ; but instead 
 of the elation that might have been expected from 
 such a decisive victory, there now fell upon the 
 mutineers a strange, brooding feeling of discontent. 
 
 Stewart and Heywood, ever bent upon retaking the 
 ship and returning with her to England, had again suc- 
 ceeded in alienating some of the men from Christian, 
 whose disregard of their wishes to remain at Tahiti 
 had aroused their resentment. 
 
 Working upon this, Stewart, little by little, brought 
 some of these men to believe that if they aided him in 
 recovering the ship, they would not only be given a 
 free pardon for any actual part taken in the mutiny, 
 but would be rewarded for their loyalty to Heywood 
 and himself. Tired of the hardships and discomforts 
 of settlement on an island where the natives were so 
 hostile, and already regretting their severance from 
 civilisation, they were not long in promising to aid the 
 
 9 "3 
 
114 THE MUTINEER 
 
 two midshipmen in any scheme devised to recapture 
 the Bounty and sail her to England ; or, failing that, 
 to return to Tahiti and give themselves up to the 
 King's ship that they knew would be sent in search 
 of them. 
 
 Morrison, the boatswain's mate, in particular, pro- 
 fessed his readiness at any time that Stewart and 
 Heywood might appoint to join them in either 
 seizing the ship and making Christian and Young 
 prisoners, or escaping from Tubuai and returning to 
 Tahiti, and Alexander Smith, ever on the alert in 
 his devotion to Christian, soon discovered that a second 
 plot had been devised by Stewart, Heywood, and 
 Morrison to steal the boat, provision her, and escape 
 in the night. It became evident to Christian that his 
 authority would be gone if he did not either make 
 some concessions, or crush the malcontents at once 
 and for ever. After discussing the matter seriously 
 with Smith and Young, he called the people together 
 and addressed them. 
 
 " You all seem so discontented with this place," 
 said he, " and there are, I find, so many of you who 
 will not hesitate to turn traitors to the rest of us, that 
 I have determined, if you are agreed, to return to 
 Tahiti. There, those who wish to separate from me 
 can go, and those who wish to remain with me can 
 do so." 
 
 This proposal was at once agreed to. It was also 
 resolved to divide into two parts the ship's stores 
 and fairly share them between the two parties ; then 
 those who chose to do so could go ashore at Tahiti, 
 
FAREWELL TO TUBUAI 115 
 
 and those who desired to stand by Christian could 
 accompany him in the ship to some island afterwards 
 to be decided upon by himself and his adherents. 
 
 And so once more the worn-out old Bounty was 
 floated out to deep water, and all hands set to work 
 to take on board her stores and armament again. 
 That part of their labour accomplished, Christian 
 sent parties out to collect the remainder of the live 
 stock, which had not been seen since the attack on 
 the fort. 
 
 But again the islanders attacked them in such force, 
 and with such undaunted courage and fierce resolu- 
 tion, that the landing-party had to retreat to the ship ; 
 and, indeed, they narrowly escaped being cut off 
 before the boat could rescue them. 
 
 Christian, who was engaged with Mahina, Alrema, 
 and some Tahitians in bending on the Bounty s after 
 canvas, at once opened fire from the ship to cover the 
 retreat of his men ; as soon as the boat came alongside 
 he ordered those in her on deck for a glass of grog, 
 and leaving the women to guard the ship, led a strong 
 party on shore to make a second attempt. 
 
 For nearly a mile they marched through the rich 
 tropical forest without molestation ; then there 
 suddenly broke forth the deafening rattle of the native 
 battle-drums, and some five hundred Tubuaians — 
 among them many women — sprang out from their 
 ambush and made a furious attack with clubs, spears, 
 and slings. Fortunately the ground favoured the 
 white men, six of whom were armed with muskets 
 loaded with slugs, and these inflicted terrible slaughter 
 
ii6 THE MUTINEER 
 
 at the first volley. Twice did the Tubuains make 
 determined efforts to break through and separate the 
 white men, but throwing down their muskets and 
 keeping the Tahitians in the centre, the seamen drew 
 their cutlasses and hewed and slashed at the naked 
 bodies of the savages till the leafy ground was soaked 
 and soddened into a bloody mire. But for the 
 slaughter inflicted by the muskets of the Tahitians, 
 however, the enemy would have borne them down by 
 sheer force of numbers. Christian, whose great 
 strength and skill in all muscular exercises had made 
 him famous in Tahiti, fought with such courage and 
 fury that he soon had a pile of dead and dying 
 Tubuaians forming a breastwork around him ; and, 
 leaning his weapon over their bodies, Talalu, the big 
 Tahitian, fired into the enemy at such close range 
 that the natives at last wavered, broke, and fled. 
 
 So exhausted, however, were Christian and his 
 party, many of whom were badly wounded by spear- 
 thrusts, that all further attempt to recover the stock 
 was abandoned, and after two or three hours' rest they 
 returned to the ship. At the landing-place they were 
 met by a friendly chief, named Tairoa-Maina, and 
 two of his friends, who, always having been well- 
 disposed to Christian, took no part in the assault. 
 They had just arrived from the principal village, 
 where the bodies of those who fell in the attack were 
 brought, and with grim satisfaction the mutineers 
 learnt that fifty-six men and seven women had been 
 killed and twice as many badly wounded, principally 
 by cutlasses and musket slugs. 
 
FAREWELL TO TUBUAI 117 
 
 Fearing to remain on the island after the ship 
 sailed, Tairoa-Maina besought Christian as his pledged 
 taioj or friend, to take him and his two companions 
 away with him. To this the mutineer consented. 
 
 On the following day, all being in readiness, the 
 ship well stocked with provisions, and the wind being 
 from the S.E. the Bounty once more got under weigh. 
 Three days later she was off the island of Maitea, a 
 high, verdure-clad spot about seven miles in extent, 
 lying thirty miles due east from the southern point 
 of Tahiti. 
 
 Running in close under the lee side. Christian 
 hove-to the ship, called all hands aft, and divided 
 everything on board into two lots in readiness for the 
 time of separation. Then, before the lusty trade 
 wind, the 'Bounty, not waiting for the crowd of canoes 
 that were paddling eagerly off towards her filled with 
 natives shouting welcome, stood away due west. At 
 dusk Tahiti was in sight, and on the following 
 morning the ship once more lay at anchor in Matavai 
 Bay. 
 
CHAPTER XIV 
 
 THE LAST SAILING OF THE " BOUNTY " 
 
 ONCE more were the white men welcomed with 
 unaffected joy by the simple-hearted Tahitians, 
 who yet wondered at their second return and made many 
 inquiries as to its cause. Among those who thronged on 
 board were the relatives of Pipiri the Areoi ; these 
 told enigmatically by Mahina that the priest would be 
 long in returning, were at first angry and then sus- 
 picious ; but when in answer to a direct question put 
 to Christian, they learned that he had been killed in 
 a fight against his countrymen and their white friends, 
 they were seized with shame and retired with downcast 
 faces. Later on in the day came Tina and his beautiful 
 wife, who welcomed Christian and his comrades with 
 every demonstration of affection and esteem, though 
 they too m.arvelled at the second return of the Bounty; 
 this Christian did not attempt to explain, knowing that 
 those Tahitians who accompanied the ship would not 
 fail to tell their countrymen of all the events that had 
 transpired since they sailed from Tahiti. But Tina 
 expressed his delight at hearing from Christian that 
 
 Il8 
 
THE LAST SAILING OF THE "BOUNTY" 119 
 
 many of the Bounty^s crew had returned for the pur- 
 pose of living among his people, and readily gave 
 assistance to land the stores belonging to the shore 
 party. 
 
 For the third time the ship was now wooded and 
 watered and prepared for sea. When everything was 
 in readiness, Christian mustered the hands, and desired 
 all those who wished to remain on shore to go to the 
 larboard side of the ship, and all those who intended to 
 remain by him to the starboard. The first to step over 
 to the larboard were Stewart and Heywood, who were 
 at once followed by thirteen seamen. His own party 
 Christian found to consist of Edward Young, his next 
 in command ; Mills, the gunner's mate ; Brown, the 
 gardener ; Martin, McCoy, Williams, Quintal, and, 
 of course, the faithful Alexander Smith ; besides these 
 there stepped over to starboard Tarioa-Maina, the 
 young Tubuaian chief, his two friends, and three 
 Tahitian men with their wives, one of whom bore 
 in her arms a female infant. Each of Christian's 
 white followers had with him a native wife, and 
 thus the whole of his party totalled twenty-eight 
 persons. 
 
 For a moment or two Christian looked from one to 
 another of those ranged on the larboard side, then told 
 them in an unmoved voice to get into the boat. In a 
 kv/ minutes they were gone, and the boat was being 
 pulled shorewards. Turning to those of the ship's 
 company who were still standing on the starboard side, 
 he informed them of his intention to sail in a day or 
 two, and said he would be pleased if they would not 
 
I20 THE MUTINEER 
 
 visit the shore again. This they unhesitatingly- 
 promised. 
 
 That night — the 22nd of September — he went on 
 shore in a canoe and, landing a short distance from the 
 village, made his way to the house of the chief Tipa'uu, 
 the father of Nuia, Stewart's wife. 
 
 Entering quietly he found the two youths in con- 
 versation with the old chief. 
 
 " I have come," he said, " to say goodbye again. Let 
 us now speak together for the last time, and bury the 
 past. I can never forget that until that morning 
 in April we were always good friends. Shake hands 
 then, my lads, for the last time." 
 
 "I am very sorry all this has happened, sir," said 
 young Heywood, "and only just now Stewart admitted 
 that you were sorely tempted," and he held out his 
 hand. 
 
 " God knows. Christian," said Stewart, " I bear you 
 no malice, for I cannot forget that after we gave you 
 our promise not to interfere with your plans I induced 
 Heywood to join me in breaking that promise. I can 
 only plead as my excuse that I never intended to be false 
 to that pledge ; but seeing many of the men were 
 ripe to join me in the attempt to retake the ship I felt 
 justified in breaking it. I can only say again that 
 although you have damned our prospects in life I freely 
 forgive you." 
 
 " Not so, Stewart," said the mutineer, " your reputa- 
 tion as a loyal officer shall not suffer, nor shall this 
 boy's. You are both innocent of participating in my 
 crime. Be guided by me. Bligh will probably reach 
 
THE LAST SAILING OF THE "BOUNTY" izi 
 
 England ; whether he does so or not a ship will be sent 
 out to search for us. When she arrives here, go off at 
 once to her and give yourselves up to the commander. 
 Tell him, as I tell you now, that this disaster was 
 brought about entirely by me, and I alone am respon- 
 sible for the act." 
 
 " I fear that we shall have difficulty in clearing our- 
 selves," answered Stewart, moodily. 
 
 " Not if you give yourselves up at once and tell the 
 exact truth. No one, not even my followers, not even 
 I myself, thought of mutiny until I came on deck in 
 the morning watch, and then the temptation suddenly 
 came upon me. You both know what a life that 
 damned scoundrel — God forgive me if I speak of a dead 
 man — led us all, and how he picked me out particularly 
 for his insults and unaccountable malice." 
 
 " That is true enough ; the wonder is that you bore 
 with him so long. But it is too late to talk of that 
 now," said Stewart, with a ring of sympathy in his 
 voice ; "when do you sail, and where are you 
 going ? " 
 
 " My dear lads," he answered mournfully, " where 
 I am going is a question I cannot answer, and if I 
 could it would be better unanswered, for you will be 
 asked what has become of me. I shall leave at daylight 
 and probably search for some uninhabited island on 
 which to spend the remainder of my life." 
 
 " The natives say you do not intend sailing for a day 
 or two." 
 
 " No, Stewart. I gave that out on purpose ; every 
 one is on board and all is ready, and I hope to be clear 
 
122 THE MUTINEER 
 
 of the bay to-morrow morning, before even a native is 
 awake, and so by that means avoid the fuss of another 
 leave-taking." 
 
 He was silent for a while, then turning to Heywood, 
 earnestly besought him to see his relatives in England 
 and tell them the truth. " Remember," said he, " when 
 you reach England my people will have learned to hate 
 and despise me as a mutineer. Tell them what you 
 have seen of my sufferings and my provocation, and ask 
 them to forgive me." 
 
 Silence fell upon them again in the darkened house, 
 and nought was heard save the heavy breathing of the 
 mutineer. Suddenly he rose, grasped their hands with- 
 out a word, and, turning away, walked slowly down to 
 the white line of beach whereon his canoe lay. 
 
 Old Tipa'uu awaking from his sleep a (ew minutes 
 later, kindled afresh the dying fire, and as the flame 
 leapt up and illuminated the house he saw that the 
 faces of Stewart and Heywood were wet with tears. 
 
 An hour before daylight Fletcher Christian, who had 
 been shut up for some hours alone in his cabin, came on 
 deck and called the hands, and ere the mists of Orohena 
 had begun to float away before the chilly breaths of the 
 land breeze, the bounty s anchor was up to her bow, 
 and, with all her canvas spread, she was slipping out of 
 the bay. 
 
 When daylight broke the natives gave a cry of 
 astonishment, for the ship had disappeared. 
 
 ***** 
 
 The story of those of the mutineers who remained 
 at Tahiti can be told in a it.\\ words. Who has not 
 
THE LAST SAILING OF THE "BOUNTY" 123 
 
 heard of the horrors of the Pandora'' s " box," the term 
 applied to the round house built by the merciless 
 Captain Edwards of the Pandora frigate on the deck 
 of his ship as a prison for his wretched captives. 
 
 The Pandora^ sent out to search for the mutineers, 
 arrived at Tahiti on March 23, 1791. The sailors 
 surrendered themselves, two seamen, Thompson and 
 Churchill excepted, for the last-named had been 
 murdered sometime previously by Thompson, who in 
 turn was killed by the Tahitians, not before he richly 
 deserved death for his atrocious crimes. 
 
 The white men had occupied their time on shore 
 in building a schooner in which some had intended to 
 leave the island, but they were unable to put to sea 
 for want of sails. 
 
 Stewart's wife, Nuia, who was the daughter of the 
 chief with whom he lived, had borne a child, and her 
 love for her white husband has formed the theme of 
 many a Tahitian love song. When the Pandora 
 sailed the heart-rending grief of this gentle girl 
 affected even the rough seamen whose duty it was to 
 force her away from Stewart's side. Six weeks after 
 she died of a broken heart. 
 
 Amid the tears and lamentations of the Tahitians, 
 the frigate left with her prisoners on the 19th of May, 
 the little schooner sailing with her. From the day 
 the unhappy men surrendered until their arrival at the 
 Cape of Good Hope, they were all treated with great 
 brutality by Edwards — Heywood and Stewart, officers 
 and mere youths as they were, receiving no more 
 mercy at his hands than did the others. 
 
124 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Three months were spent by the Pandora in a vain 
 search for the Bounty and those on board, and then 
 the frigate was headed for Timor ; on August 28th, 
 while making her way through Endeavour Strait, ^^ 
 she crashed on a reef, and on the following day was 
 abandoned a total wreck. 
 
 The previous inhumanity of Captain Edwards towards 
 his prisoners was, immediately after the ship struck, 
 if possible, increased. For a long time he made no 
 attempt to save them with the rest of the ship's 
 company. From the box in which they were con- 
 fined the only means of egress was by a scuttle on the 
 top. 
 
 Some of them, as the Pandora rolled and dashed 
 them, heavily ironed as they were, from one side to 
 the other of their dreadful prison, bruised and 
 bleeding, cried out that they would be drowned like 
 rats in a hole, for already the vessel was breaking up 
 fast, but their vindictive gaoler ordered them to be 
 quiet or they would be fired upon. Only at the last 
 moment did he give the order to take their irons off; 
 and then, if it had not been for the humanity of one 
 of the Pandora's boatswain's mates, they would all have 
 been drowned. He, brave fellow, hearing their cries, 
 declared he would either free them or drown with 
 them ; he dropped the keys of their irons through the 
 scuttle, and with the greatest difficulty (for the water 
 was up to his waist) forced off the iron bar which 
 kept the scuttle closed. 
 
 When the survivors reached a small sand quay and 
 
 ' Now know as Torres Straits. 
 
THE LAST SAILING OF THE "BOUNTY" 125 
 
 Edwards mustered them it was found that thirty-one 
 of the frigate's crew and Stewart and three of the 
 Bounty's seamen were drowned. 
 
 Then began a long voyage to Coupang on the 
 island of Timor, there being ninety-nine persons in all, 
 divided between three boats. The story of their 
 dreadful sufferings need not here be told ; but after a 
 voyage of nineteen days, on September 19th, two of 
 the boats reached Coupang, the third arriving three 
 days later. From Coupang they were conveyed in a 
 Dutch ship to Java, where they found the Resolution 
 — the schooner built by the Bounty s people at Tahiti 
 — which had early parted company with the Pandora 
 and had arrived six weeks before, her crew having 
 endured similar privations. From Batavia they were 
 taken to the Cape of Good Hope, their numbers 
 having been increased at a former place by the addition 
 of more prisoners — the survivors of the Bryant party, 
 eleven convicts who had escaped from Sydney.' 
 
 Embarking in the Gorgon^ man-of-war, at the Cape, 
 Edwards and his unfortunate prisoners at last reached 
 England safely, and the mutineers were tried by 
 court-martial. Bligh was not present, having sailed 
 on a second voyage to Tahiti for another cargo of 
 of breadfruit plants. 
 
 The trial ended in the acquittal of three sea- 
 men and the conviction of six others, among them 
 
 ' Publisher's Note. — The story of the memorable voyage of the unfor- 
 tunate convict, Will Bryant, his wife Mary, her two infant children and 
 seven male convicts has been told by the authors of this work in a book 
 entitled " A First Fleet Family,'' 
 
126 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Heywood. The general tenor of the evidence went 
 to prove Morrison and Heywood innocent. But Bligh 
 had left behind him statements inculpating these men. 
 The Admiralty, after the court-martial was over, con- 
 sidered the evidence and ultimately unconditionally 
 pardoned Heywood, Morrison, and a seaman named 
 Muspratt, and executed the others. 
 
 Heywood and Morrison were permitted to re-enter 
 the service, and both of then had honourable careers, 
 the first after attaining the rank of captain died full of 
 years and honours in 1831, and Morrison became 
 gunner of the Blenhehn^ in which ship, in 1807, he v/as 
 lost with all hands. 
 
 END OF PART I 
 
PART II 
 
 CHAPTER XV 
 
 THE SEARCH FOR A RESTING-PLACE 
 
 THE Bounty lay becalmed within a fev/ miles of a 
 long, low-lying atoll densely covered with 
 coconut trees. The wind had fallen light during 
 the night, but though the land was then forty 
 miles distant, the strong current set the ship steadily 
 to the eastward, and now at ten o'clock in the 
 morning those on her decks could see between the 
 palm trees the pale green waters of a placid lagoon 
 shimmering in the bright sunlight. Fifty miles north 
 and south it stretched, and Talalu, who with others of 
 his countrymen was gazing at the £■ range island from 
 the fore-yard, his dark eyes full of expectancy, called 
 out to Mahina and Alrema, who were on the poop 
 deck, that he could see a great village and many 
 people running to and fro on the beach getting ready 
 their canoes to come out to the ship. 
 
 Sitting aft upon the skylight, with two charts spread 
 
 out before him, was the leader of the mutineers. 
 
 127 
 
128 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Although but two weeks had passed since the ship left 
 Tahiti, the anxieties of his position had already told 
 upon Christian, and his face was drawn and haggard. 
 Mahina stood behind him, with her shapely hand 
 resting upon his shoulder, and looked with interest at 
 the pencilled line of the ship's course marked upon 
 one of the charts by her husband. Opposite were 
 Young, McCoy and his wife, and two or three others 
 of the mutineers, while their wives sat on the deck 
 and listened eagerly to what their husbands were 
 saying. 
 
 Turning to his comrades, Christian pointed to the 
 larger of the two charts. 
 
 " This island which we are now closing is called 
 Fakarava, and there is a good entrance into the 
 lagoon. If you think it advisable for us to take the 
 ship in, it can easily be done. But I cannot see 
 that any good will come from our wasting the time. 
 As you know, this is the seventh island we have 
 sighted since we left Tahiti, and every one has proved 
 unsuitable for our purpose." 
 
 " What's the matter with this one?" said Williams, 
 who had just come down from aloft. " It's big enough 
 for us all, isn't it ? " 
 
 " Quite," answered Christian coldly, "but, as I have 
 pointed out to you before, while the natives of all these 
 islands were friendly enough, the islands themselves 
 were most unsuitable. They were mere sand banks 
 covered with coconuts, and although some of them 
 were of great extent, the narrow strips of land enclosing 
 the lagoons were barely half a mile broad. Supposing 
 
THE SEARCH FOR A RESTING-PLACE 129 
 
 that we had stayed on one of them, stripped and sank 
 the ship, and lived ashore, what possible chance would 
 there have been of concealing ourselves if a ship entered 
 the lagoon, or what chance of defending our refuge? 
 None. None at all. Then, the productions of such 
 places are poor ; there is literally nothing growing on 
 them but coconuts. But, as some of you thought 
 that in this group we should easily find an island as 
 fertile as Tubuai, I acceded to your wishes, and we have 
 spent ten days among them seeking a suitable spot," 
 
 "I'm sorry that I was one to persuade you, sir," said 
 Quintal. "We ought to have stood to the south again, 
 as you wanted to, and got among the high islands like 
 Tubuai. As you say, it would be folly for us to leave the 
 ship for any place that we can't live comfortably on." 
 
 "On this chart of Captain Bligh's," resumed the 
 leader, "you will see that all these islands which we are 
 now sailing among are marked as 'low coral lagoons.' 
 That there are others which do not appear on the 
 chart, and which are higher and more fertile, I have no 
 doubt; but I believe from what Mahina and Talalu 
 tell me, thai these, which have not yet been discovered 
 by any navigator, lie a long way to the south and east. 
 That there is one such place I am certain. But before 
 we listen to what my wife has to say on the matter, 
 and before I give my own idea as to the best course, 
 let me remind you that to-day expires the time we 
 agreed to spend in cruising among the islands to the 
 north and east of Tahiti." 
 
 "Aye, aye, Mr. Christian," said Smith, who with 
 his wife had now joined the party around the skylight. 
 
 10 
 
130 THE MUTINEER 
 
 "Up to the present," resumed Christian, speaking 
 slowly and coldly, " you have proved loyal to me, even 
 though dissenting from my plans. I, like yourselves, 
 am but a felon dodging the gallows, and it is better 
 that you should bear with me a little longer, till I 
 succeed in finding a safe resting-place for us all. Then 
 it will be every one for himself; I shall have no further 
 claim on your obedience, and you none of any nature 
 on me." 
 
 An anxious look crept into Smith's eyes, but he had 
 no time to say anything. 
 
 " Remember," continued the leader, " by leaving 
 Tahiti with me you have cut yourself off from the last 
 chance you might have had of saving your necks if 
 captured by a King's ship ; that being the case, we 
 are all in the same plight, and your interests are also 
 mine." 
 
 "Mr. Christian, you have acted towards us like a 
 man. I don't regret what has happened, and I am 
 going to obey you as captain of this ship till the end ; 
 and I am very much mistaken if you won't find every 
 man on board of her of my way of thinking." 
 
 It was Smith who spoke, and when he had finished 
 he looked at the others for approval. Every one of them 
 answered heartily, "Aye, aye, go ahead, Mr. Christian ; 
 we'll see it through under you." 
 
 A faint smile of satisfaction for a moment lit up 
 Christian's countenance, but the habitual melancholy, 
 which had now settled upon him, returned the next 
 instant, and he continued his remarks in cold, indif- 
 ferent tones. 
 
THE SEARCH FOR A RESTING-PLACE 131 
 
 " Before we left Matavai Bay I had practically made 
 up my mind that this island" — and he placed his hand 
 upon the smaller chart — "was the most suitable place 
 for us to reach. This book " — taking it from Mahina, 
 " was written by Captain Carteret, and this chart was 
 made by him when he discovered the island, thirty 
 years ago. This is what he says," and opening the 
 book, he read : — 
 
 "On the morning of July 2, 1767, a young gentleman named Pitcairn, 
 being on the look-out at the mast head, observed a spot on the horizon, 
 which on approaching it next day appeared to rise like a great pyramid 
 out of the sea. It proved to be an island, one and a half miles in length 
 and four and a half in circumference, its summit attaining a height of 
 1,008 feet, itself surrounded by a coral reef and covered with trees. The 
 coast was formed for the most part of rocky projections, ofF which lay 
 numerous fragments of stone, while a small stream of fresh water trickled 
 down at one end of the island. The surf, which broke upon the shore 
 with great violence, remiered landing impossible, but there should be no 
 great difficulty in fine weather in doing so. The place seems to be unin- 
 habited, a great number of sea-birds hovered around, and the waters 
 almost swarm with fish." 
 
 "That's the place for us, lads," said Quintal, with 
 an inquiring look at the others. 
 
 " You will see," continued Christian, " that in the 
 big chart the island is not shown at all, but in this 
 rough sketch of it, drawn by Captain Carteret, the 
 position is given as lat. 20° l' south ; long. 133° 2i' 
 west." 
 
 "Why, it's more than four hundred leagues from 
 Tahiti," began Williams, when Christian checked him 
 by a look. 
 
 " It is more than that, as you say, and whether 
 Captain Carteret's position is correct or not, I cannot 
 
132 THE MUTINEER 
 
 tell ; I think not ; for it is known that the instru- 
 ments he had on board the Swallow were very indif- 
 ferent. But in another reference to the island he says 
 that it was visible at fifteen leagues. I think, there- 
 fore, we could scarcely miss it, unless we ran by it in 
 the night." 
 
 " That's true, sir," cried McCoy and Smith. 
 
 " Well, as far as I know, no one but Carteret has 
 ever seen this place, and its isolated position will be a 
 safeguard to us. Furthermore, although my wife and 
 I have talked of the island often enough, I was careful 
 in leaving Tahiti to give neither Heywood nor Stewart 
 a hint of our future movements. Now listen to what 
 my wife has told me, and then decide quickly whether 
 you will agree to our standing to the south-east and 
 looking for this Pitcairn." 
 
 Again the rest of the mutineers answered that they 
 trusted him, and would follow his advice. 
 
 " Very well, then. My wife, as Talalu and your 
 own wives will tell you, is not of Tahitian blood. Her 
 ancestors were blown away to sea from an island far 
 away from Tahiti, which they only reached after spend- 
 ing many months among these islands through which 
 we have been cruising for the past ten days. Their 
 home lay, according to them, many weeks' fast sailing 
 to the south-east of Tahiti. Mahina, though she 
 knows but little of the origin of her people, yet knows 
 that the place they came from was called Afita, and 
 Carteret's description of Pitcairn, as far as I have been 
 able to make her understand it, tallies in the main with 
 the description she has heard her mother give of Afita. 
 
THE SEARCH FOR A RESTING-PLACE 133 
 
 Remember that we have with us many Tahitians, and 
 Tairoa-Maina and the other Tubuaians, and it would 
 be well to take them into our confidence and tell them 
 where we are going. We cannot afford to deceive 
 them." 
 
 He ceased speaking ; then, as no one demurred to 
 his suggestion, he asked Young to muster all the 
 natives aft. As soon as they had grouped behind the 
 white men, Christian said to his white comrades — 
 
 "My wife is, I think, a favourite with all these men. 
 Let her talk to them and tell them that we are about 
 to look for the home of her forefathers, and they will 
 be well content." 
 
 The seamen consented, and Christian explained to 
 Mahina what was wanted of her. She, readily under- 
 standing, at once complied ; and it was easy to see, 
 by the flush of pleasure upon her cheeks and her bright 
 smile, that the task was a pleasing one. 
 
 Placing her hand on Carteret's chart, and giving a 
 swift glance of intelligence and affection at Christian, 
 she spoke. 
 
 "See, men of Tahiti and Tubuai, my husband 
 desireth me to tell thee of the home of my people, so 
 that ye may know why it is the ship stayeth so long 
 out upon the sea. It is because that of all the lands we 
 have seen since we sailed we have seen none so fair to 
 look upon as Tahiti and Tubuai ; and it is in my 
 husband's heart to find a land that shall be both fair to 
 look at and good to live upon. But naught have we 
 yet seen but such places as this," and she pointed to 
 the low-lying island on the larboard side j " and so, 
 
134 THE MUTINEER 
 
 because I have told him of the rich land from whence 
 my fathers came, it is in his mind that we go there 
 and live. And I have heard Manuhuru, my mother, 
 speak of this land, for there was her mother born and 
 there she lived, until there came a time when, with 
 many others, she was blown out to sea and returned 
 no more, for their canoe was swept away by a strong 
 south wind for many, many days till they reached 
 strange islands. Some were killed by the people of 
 these places, but my mother's mother, and four others 
 with her, one day stole a sailing canoe from the people 
 of the island called Marutea and set out again to seek 
 their own home." 
 
 " Here's the place she speaks of," said Christian, 
 pointing to Marutea on the large chart, " a good eight 
 hundred miles to the north-west of Pitcairn Island." 
 
 Whites and natives crowded round the chart and 
 looked at the spot indicated by Christian. 
 
 " But again the winds and the gods were against 
 them, and so they sailed towards the setting sun, and 
 on the tenth day saw the shadow of Orohena stand 
 out against the sea-rim, and at night they landed at 
 Tiarapu ' and dwelt there in peace among the people, 
 who were kind to them. But yet were their hearts 
 always towards their own land, which, though it be 
 but a small place, yet is green as Tahiti, and is a land 
 good to live in ; and sometimes when the sun sank 
 below the sky-rim and they watched the top of 
 Orohena become wrapped in the white mists of the 
 valleys, they would look at one another and sigh and 
 
 ' A district in Tahiti. 
 
THE SEARCH FOR A RESTING-PLACE 135 
 
 say : * Ah, that is like our land of Afita rising from 
 the sea.' " 
 
 A cry broke from Tairoa-Maina, the Tubuaian 
 chief : " Afita ! Truly, Kirisiani, thy wife and I 
 are of one blood ; for I, too, know of this land which 
 riseth from the sea, and is far away, towards the edge 
 of the world. My father came from Afita, and there 
 are many others in Tubuai whose fathers came from 
 there, long, long ago, in seven canoes. This did they 
 because Afita, though so rich, was too small for so 
 many to live upon. And because of the strange blood 
 in my veins it was that the men of Tubuai liked me 
 not, and I desired to come away with thee. Let us, 
 oh Kirisiani, go seek the land of Afita, which is far 
 towards the rising sun from Tubuai. For it is indeed, 
 as thy wife sayeth, a land good to look upon, and rich 
 in woods, and water and fish, and yams and bread- 
 fruit." 
 
 For some minutes there was an excited buzzing 
 of voices among the natives, and the men eagerly 
 besought Christian to lead them to the home of his 
 wife's people ; while Edward Young and the rest of 
 the ship's company seemed equally interested and as 
 anxious to learn more. Presently Talalu, who gene- 
 rally acted as spokesman for his countrymen, stepped 
 out from the others and addressed the leader of the 
 white men. This man, who was the tallest and 
 strongest of all the Tahitians on board, had, like 
 Smith, conceived a great admiration for Fletcher 
 Christian, and had evinced it in many ways since 
 the Bounty left Tahiti ; and being a man of chiefly 
 
136 THE MUTINEER 
 
 rank, his influence over the rest of the natives on 
 board was great. 
 
 " Kirisiani," he said simply, " I, Talalu, the son of 
 Poahanehane, will follow thee wherever thou goest, 
 and work and fight for thee. And as I do, so will my 
 countrymen with thee on the ship do. This we swear 
 by our gods, and by the blood in our veins." 
 
 And then one by one the simple brown people 
 crowded round Christian and touched his hands and feet 
 in token of their fealty to him ; and the dull, brooding 
 shadow for a little time left his face as he shook hands 
 with them all in the English fashion, his example 
 being followed by Young and the rest of the white 
 men. 
 
 Then Tairoa-Maina pressed forward, and the hand- 
 some chief, his black eyes gleaming with excitement 
 at the prospect of seeing his father's island home, 
 knelt at Mahina's feet and touched the deck with his 
 forehead. 
 
 " And I too," he said, " will go with thy husband, 
 Mahina, and be a true man to him ; for is he not a 
 man of a good heart ? And together shall we search 
 for and find the land of Afita, thy land and mine. 
 For now, Mahina, when I hear thy voice, do I 
 hear the voice of my father that is dead ; and it 
 may be that thou and I are of one blood. And for 
 that alone would my heart be for ever towards Kiri- 
 siani, thy husband." 
 
 Christian smiled again. Despite his own morbid 
 nature, he had grown to like the handsome Tubuaian, 
 and the chief's devotion to Mahina pleased him greatly. 
 
THE SEARCH FOR A RESTING-PLACE 137 
 
 A little behind were the rest of Mahina's country- 
 women, who, not comprehending the discussion, had 
 now surrounded her with soft murmurs of excite- 
 ment, and presently Christian, noting this, turned to 
 his wife with a laugh — the first for many months. 
 
 "This is well, Mahina, that thy countrymen are 
 so with thee and me ; but what say all these women 
 to this search for the land of Afita ? " 
 
 She turned her lustrous eyes, beaming with affec- 
 tion, on the mutineer. "It is not the part of a woman, 
 unless she be a great ruler, to say aye or nay to her 
 master's will ; and surely thou didst not think to ask 
 these women their thoughts on this matter. That 
 would be folly." 
 
 " 'Tis a good doctrine, Mahina," answered Christian; 
 " there will be no man-and-wife quarrels to break our 
 peace on Afita." Then, pressing her hand, he turned 
 away to attend to the ship. 
 
 " Here comes a fleet of canoes," called out Quintal 
 to Young, and almost at the same moment the glassy 
 surface of the water stirred and rippled to the breeze 
 as it came darkening along from the north-east to fill 
 the Bounty's sails. 
 
 " Never mind the canoes," answered Young, fling- 
 ing down the mainbraces ; " get the head-sheets 
 over ; and here, away to the main deck, all you 
 women ! — out of the way and give us a pull on the 
 braces ! " 
 
 So with many a bubbling laugh and merry jest the 
 Tahitian women tripped down and seized the ropes 
 in their soft little hands ; and as the ship leaned gently 
 
138 THE MUTINEER 
 
 over and the froth began to bubble under her bluff old 
 bows, Christian put the helm hard up, wore her round, 
 and set her head to the south-east. 
 
 Mahina, standing beside him, gazed intently into 
 her husband's eyes as he looked at the compass ; then 
 as he steadied the ship she watched him inquiringly ; 
 and he nodded and smiled at her in return. 
 
 " Aye, Mahina, that is where we must go to seek 
 for Afita ; may we find it soon." He gave over the 
 wheel to Williams, walked quietly away, picked up 
 the charts and books, and went below. 
 
 But on the main-deck, as the long, palm-clad line 
 of Fakarava, with its white gleam of sandy beach, 
 sank slowly below the horizon, the white seamen and 
 their native wives and the rest of the ship's company 
 sang and laughed and chattered ; and as the Bounty 
 slipped over the long ocean rollers she spread on either 
 side white sheets of snowy foam, and surged along 
 before the lusty breath of the ever-freshening breeze. 
 
 So began the search for the land of Afita. 
 
CHAPTER XVI 
 
 THE FLIGHT OF THE KANAPU 
 
 ON further careful study of Carteret's book and 
 chart, the mind of Fletcher Christian was greatly 
 disturbed, for he knew that there was much to fear if 
 the position of Pitcairn had been wrongly laid down. 
 The currents, too, in this part of the world were but 
 little understood by those few navigators who had 
 sailed among the islands ; indeed, the natives them- 
 selves were far better informed of both the winds and 
 currents of Eastern Polynesia than were the few 
 European voyagers among the various groups since 
 the days of Carteret and Cook. 
 
 Carteret had laid down the centre of Pitcairn in 
 lat. 20° 2' south, and long. 133° 21'' west ; but 
 although Christian was fairly confident of sighting the 
 island by keeping a careful look-out and heaving-to 
 at night when he got near it, he felt that his limited 
 knowledge of the winds and currents might lead to 
 prolonged and tedious search. 
 
 For twenty-one days after leaving Fakarava the 
 Bounty sailed south-easterly. Several low-lying atolls 
 
 139 
 
i+o THE MUTINEER 
 
 were sighted, but no sign of high land had been 
 seen ; yet, by Christian's calculations (only revealed 
 to Young, Smith, and McCoy), he had twice sailed 
 over the position assigned to the island by Carteret. 
 His misgivings that a strong current had set him too 
 far to the eastward were daily growing stronger. His 
 only chronometer, through an accident, had been 
 rendered useless, and besides this the weather latterly 
 was gloomy and the sun seldom visible. The last 
 land had been sighted eighteen days after leaving 
 Fakarava, and Talalu and Tairoa-Maina, who from 
 the break of day were continuously aloft on the look- 
 out, assured him on that day that no land lay further 
 to the south-east but Afita and a little sandy island 
 called Oeno, about half a day's sail to the northward. 
 Small as this island was, they declared that the clamour 
 of the sea-birds, whose resting-place it was, would reveal 
 its presence even on the darkest night ; and this alone 
 somewhat reassured him in the hope that he had not 
 drifted past it or Pitcairn in the darkness. A day's 
 sail further to the eastward was another island which 
 they said was called Fenua-manu ; ^ this, too, was the 
 home of millions of sea-birds, whose voices stilled 
 the beating of the surf upon the reefs, so great were 
 their numbers. 
 
 With his chin upon his hands, Fletcher Christian 
 gazed moodily at the chart before him. Mahina, who 
 by the cabin door was watching him with tender 
 interest, heard him sigh wearily. Stepping up to him, 
 
 Ducie Island, about ninety miles east of Pitcairn. It is unin- 
 habited now. The old name, Fenua-manu, meant " The Isl-and of Birds.' 
 
THE FLIGHT OF THE KANAPU 141 
 
 she pressed her cool hand to his forehead, and leant 
 her cheek against his in loving sympathy. 
 
 In the great cabin no sound broke the stillness save 
 the swish and swirl of the ship's wake as she slipped 
 through the water ; and presently Christian, drawing 
 the girl's slender figure to a seat beside him, pointed 
 to the chart. 
 
 "Mahina," he said, "you and three of my white 
 comrades alone know that the ship hath twice sailed 
 over the place where this island of Afita should have 
 been ; and no sign have we yet seen, not even a drifting 
 coconut or a piece of wood." 
 
 The girl's eyes filled with tears ; for a few moments 
 her bosom heaved, and she tried to speak without 
 showing her emotion ; and Christian, moody and pre- 
 occupied as he was, knew by her voice that she felt 
 for and sympathised with him. 
 
 " Kirisiani, I too have looked and looked and prayed 
 to Oro and Tane to guide the ship to Afita, but now 
 I begin to fear that the gods have turned aside from 
 me. 
 
 He pressed her hand in silence, and was about to 
 bid her come with him on deck when the murmuring 
 of voices at the door of the great cabin broke in upon 
 them, and presently Talalu, Tairoa-Maina, and two 
 other natives asked leave to speak with him. 
 
 " Let them wait awhile," he said sullenly, although 
 knowing that in the Tubuaian chief and his Tahitian 
 comrade he had two firm friends, who with Smith, 
 Young, and McCoy would stand by him to the last. 
 For nearly half an hour he remained communing with 
 
'42 THE MUTINEER 
 
 himself and endeavouring to think out some other 
 course for the future, should his search be still un- 
 rewarded on the following day. 
 
 Already the long voyage had had a bad efFect upon 
 most of the mutineers, and only that morning he had 
 noticed the gloomy faces and sullen manner of the 
 men when changing the ship's course another point to 
 the southward. Some of the Tahitians were sufFering 
 from the effects of the strange food which, for weeks 
 they had been forced to live upon, and the confinement 
 told seriously on their health and spirits. Yet, despite 
 this, their regard for Mahina, and their faith in, and 
 respect for Christian were unbroken, and they would 
 have endured the most prolonged hardships rather than 
 let either imagine that they were repining. With some 
 of the white seamen, however, these feelings were 
 wanting. Although there was no open expression of 
 discontent, more than one murmured at the delay 
 declaring that Christian and Young, either through 
 Ignorance or design, were not doing their duty to their 
 associates. 
 
 It was no wonder, therefore, that Christian himself 
 grew day by day more anxious and less confident of 
 finding this island of Carteret's. True, the place was 
 small and solitary, and, unless his reckoning was 
 very exact, might easily be missed. Twice had he 
 sailed across Carteret's position, and nothing had 
 rewarded his search ; and now he felt that another 
 daysfrmtless quest would assure him either that his 
 observations had been incorrect or that the island had 
 disappeared by some convulsion of nature. Worn out 
 
THE FLIGHT OF THE KANAPU 143 
 
 with anxiety, with constant watching, and his own sad 
 emotions, nothing but the devotion and tender love of 
 Mahina had kept him from ending it all with a loaded 
 pistol which he always carried in his pocket. 
 
 He pushed the chart away wearily, and was about 
 to go on deck when Mahina, who had remained, 
 touched his arm, and with a timid, beseeching look 
 asked him to let Tairoa-Maina and the other natives 
 have speech with him. 
 
 " Come in, friends," he said, in kindly tones. 
 
 The Tubuaian chief, who, with Talalu and two 
 other natives, had been patiently waiting at the cabin 
 door, came in, sat silently down, and waited permission 
 to speak. 
 
 "Speak, my brother," said Mahina to Tairoa-Maina. 
 "My husband is wearied, and would go out upon the 
 deck to breathe the cool wind of the night." 
 
 Pleased at the relationship assigned to him by 
 Christian's wife, the handsome young Tubuaian 
 looked at them with affectionate regard, and said he 
 and those with him desired to speak of something in 
 their minds, at which they prayed him not to be 
 angered, " for," he added, with a grave smile, " we 
 men of brown skin are but fools on the great ocean 
 when the sky is dull and there is neither sun nor 
 moon nor stars to guide us. But with the clever 
 white men it is different ; they are full of wisdom 
 to guide a ship, even if there be neither sun by day 
 nor stars by night. Yet in some little things we have 
 wisdom, and that is why we now ask that thou, 
 Kirisiani, will listen to us — who are thy friends." 
 
144 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " That I well know," said the mutineer, placing his 
 hand on Tairoa's shoulder. " Speak, my brother." 
 
 "Thou knowest, Kirisiani, that for many days I 
 have climbed the masts and watched, so that I might 
 be the first to see the land of Afita ; and when it grew 
 dark I have waited upon the deck and listened to 
 hear if the sound of beating surf came over the sea. 
 Last night, as Talalu and I lay on the deck, and the 
 ship rose and fell and made no sound, we saw first one 
 and then another of the birds called kanapu'^ fly swiftly 
 over the ship towards the westward. As we watched 
 there came another, and then another, and then a flock 
 of twenty or more, and these too all flew swiftly west- 
 wards, for we saw their shadows darken the bright 
 strip of water that shot out from the dying moon. 
 Then, as we lay down again, there came to our minds 
 that on Oeno, the little sandy islet but a day's sail 
 from Afita, there do the kanapu breed in the thick 
 puka scrub which groweth in the sand." 
 
 " True," said Mahina quickly ; " I have heard my 
 mother say that on Oeno the cries of the kanapu when 
 they come home to roost at night drown the noise of 
 the breaking surf." 
 
 "Aye," said the Tubuaian, "and so have I been 
 told. Yet only at night ; for in the daytime they fly 
 to the lagoon of Fenua-manu, where they find many 
 fish. We talked of this as we lay on the deck, and I 
 desired to come and tell thee, Kirisiani, of the flight 
 of the birds, but feared that thou wouldst chide me 
 
 ' The Equatorial booby, whose swift flight is only surpassed by that 
 of the frigate bird. 
 
THE FLIGHT OF THE KANAPU 145 
 
 for doubting thy skill to guide the ship. But I have 
 heard some of those with us say some little things." 
 
 Christian smiled bitterly. " They speak truly, my 
 friend ; I cannot find this land of Afita." 
 
 Leaning over towards him and placing his hand 
 on Christian's, the Tubuaian continued : " But this 
 morning, when the lower half of the sun was still 
 buried in the sea, we saw many, many kandpu and 
 katafa ' flying swiftly towards it, and Afita lieth 
 between Oeno and Fenua-manu." 
 
 Christian's eyes sparkled. " Thanks, my good friend. 
 I see now thy meaning. For two days have I thought 
 that the ship hath come too far towards the rising sun, 
 and that the place we seek lieth westward." 
 
 " Even so think we," answered Talalu, " for the 
 current runneth strong towards the rising sun, and 
 the kandpu and the katafa went westward to rest." 
 
 For a little while Christian considered. Oeno, the 
 sandy island which both Mahina and Tairoa asserted 
 was but a day's sail north and west from Afita, was 
 not marked in any of the two or three charts he 
 possessed, but Ducie Island, the "Fenua-manu," or 
 Island of Birds, of the natives, was, and lay due east of 
 Oeno. And he knew the natives relied much upon 
 simple indications to find their position when making 
 long voyages at sea. He soon made up his mind. 
 
 " We will turn the ship to follow the kandpu^'' he 
 said. 
 
 The natives sprang to their feet, and with animated 
 countenances waited for him to precede them on deck. 
 
 ' Frigate birds. 
 I I 
 
146 THE MUTINEER 
 
 The 'Bounty^ with the gentle trade-wind fiUing her 
 sails, was steering an E.N.E. course, when Christian, 
 with Mahina and the others, came on deck. Sitting 
 near the wheel was Young, who had charge of the 
 watch. 
 
 " Young," said Christian, " I am convinced that if 
 this island is in existence it is to the west of us." 
 
 "So Alrema says," nonchalantly replied the young 
 man ; " but I didn't think it worth while mentioning 
 it." 
 
 " What do you say ? Shall we keep her away ? " 
 
 "Certainly — why not ? As we cannot find it our- 
 selves by the chart let us go west by all means." 
 
 " Hands to the braces, men ! " called out Christian 
 after a moment's hesitation. " We are ffoino; to run 
 down to the westward." 
 
 In a few minutes the yards were hauled round, and 
 the 'Bounty was heading west by north. Telling 
 Talalu and Tairoa to go aloft. Christian turned to 
 Young and Smiith and related the incident of the 
 previous night. 
 
 About four o'clock in the afternoon, just as Chris- 
 tian was about to lie down for an hour, there burst 
 from Talalu on the fore top-gallant yard a cry that sent 
 a thrill through the hearts of every one on board — 
 
 "2> fenua no Afita ! '' ("The land of Afita ! "). 
 
 There was a sudden rush aloft. Christian himself 
 ascending the main rigging slightly in advance of 
 McCoy, Quintal, and Young. 
 
 " There it is, sir, ! " said Quintal excitedly, pointing 
 almost right ahead. 
 
THE FLIGHT OF THE KANApU 1+7 
 
 Then as the others saw the faint blue outline of a 
 pyramidal peak rising from the sea, a cheer broke 
 from them, and the people on the deck took it up and 
 repeated it again and again. 
 
 " Thank God ! " said Christian to Edward Young;. 
 Instinctively their hands met, and in silence they all 
 gazed intently at the little spot, which at that far dis- 
 tance no eye but that of a seaman or a native could 
 distinguish from a cone-shaped cloud. 
 
CHAPTER XVII 
 
 THE STORY OF AFITA 
 
 TOWARDS sunset, when the Bounty was still 
 some thirty miles distant from the land, the 
 trade-wind as usual died away, and by eight in the 
 evening the new moon shone over a sea as calm as a 
 mountain lake. Fearing that the easterly current 
 would set the ship back in the night during the 
 continuance of the calm. Christian and Young had 
 carefully taken the ship's bearings just as the pale 
 blue of the distant island was changing to a shade of 
 purple under the rays of the setting sun. 
 
 The knowledge that their long search was ended 
 at last inspirited every one on board. After supper 
 the men gathered on the main deck, and with their 
 wives and their brown-skinned shipmates forgot the 
 weary days which had tried their tempers and for- 
 bearance so severely. Alrema, who had an influence 
 upon her countrymen almost equal to that of Mahina, 
 was in high spirits, and Young, despite his usual 
 seeming indifference to her vivacity and beauty, was 
 
 yet sscretly pleased to see the respect with which she 
 
 148 
 
THE STORY OF AFITA 149 
 
 was treated by the others. Her conduct during the 
 attack on the fort at Tubuai had shown her to be 
 possessed of a fiery, undaunted courage ; indeed, had 
 the murmurers known that this beautiful Tahitian girl 
 with the dark, languorous eyes, and soft red lips had 
 advised Young to induce Christian to shoot them, 
 they would have remembered the incident of the 
 bloody cutlass, and been more careful of their speech 
 in her hearing. Yet now she seemed but a merry- 
 hearted, mirth-loving girl, and as she raised her sweet 
 voice in some old Tahitian love-song, while her eyes 
 sought those of Edward Young, the men were struck 
 with her bright and animated beauty. 
 
 Tired of singing and talking with the group assem- 
 bled on the main-deck, she presently ascended to the 
 poop, where her husband sat with Christian and 
 Mahina discussing their plans for the future. 
 
 She seated herself beside Young, and listened till 
 they ceased talking — then said, clasping Mahina's 
 hand in her own, "Tell us, oh friend of my heart, 
 the story of this land of Afita." 
 
 " Nay," replied Mahina, smiling and stroking 
 Alrema's dark hair, " 'tis but little I know, and that 
 little did I learn from my mother ; but call hither 
 Tairoa-Maina, and let him tell the story, for he hath 
 more knowledge of Afita than I." 
 
 Christian's consent having been gained, the Tubu- 
 aian chief was called upon the poop, and sat in front 
 of the little group with his two faithful attendants 
 behind him ; his swart, handsome features lit up with 
 pleasure when he was told what was wanted of him. 
 
150 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " Kirisiani," said Mahina, caressing her husband's 
 cheek with her soft, brown hand, " but for this dear 
 friend, Tairoa-Maina, still might we have been search- 
 ing for this land of his and my father's." 
 
 " True," answered Christian frankly, " but for him 
 we might perhaps have never found it. Thou seest, 
 Mahina, that in some things the white men have not 
 the knowledge nor judgment of thy people." 
 
 " Even so," she answered gravely, " we have no 
 such things as those tuhi^ of thine which are full 
 of wisdom. And it is strange to us that by looking 
 at some little black marks thou couldst tell us of 
 the sea chief who saw the land of Afita thirty years 
 ago. Yet, though we have no wise men among us 
 like thee and the great Tuti and Pirai, we have 
 memories and songs and tales which have come down 
 from father to son ; and all that is told is remem- 
 bered by the children, and they, when they grow up, 
 tell it to their children, so that all may know the 
 beginning of things since Taaroa the father of the 
 gods and his two sons Oro and Tane made the world." 
 Acquainted as he was in some degree with the wild 
 and fabulous nature of almost every Polynesian tradition 
 bearing upon the ancestry of the people, Christian was 
 convinced by the many long conversations he had 
 held with Mahina about her descent that much of 
 what she told him had a basis of fact. The Tahitian 
 custom of deifying their ancestors would naturally 
 result in confusing historical facts and rendering them 
 absurd, but his keen observation and quickly acquired 
 
 ' Books, handwriting and maps. 
 
THE STORY OF AFITA 151 
 
 knowledge of the Tahitian tongue enabled him to 
 sift out in a great measure the real from the fabulous 
 and visionary. He therefore, while listening to 
 Tairoa-Maina's story of Afita, quickly divested it of 
 all that was mythological and fictitious, and accepted 
 the substance of it as fact. 
 
 To his mind much of what Mahina told him of 
 Afita had appeared no more than the vague traditions 
 of native legend, but as he listened to the Tubuaian 
 chief's story he found a remarkable resemblance be- 
 tween the two accounts. 
 
 Sitting in the light of the moon, which fell upon 
 his symmetrical head and shoulders and revealed the 
 curious and delicate tracery of the tattooing upon his 
 polished skin, the young chief related the Tubuaian 
 story about the land and the people whence he came. 
 
 "Long, long ago, Kirisiani, Taaroa the Sky-Pro- 
 ducer, and Oro and Tane his sons, between them 
 created new lands by dipping their hands to the 
 bottom of the deep sea and dragging them up above 
 the surface, so that the trees might grow and men 
 live upon them. In those days there dwelt upon 
 Huahine a taata paari (wise man) named Poiata, 
 who had himself been created by the gods, and his 
 wife Mahinihini. In the same house lived Rumia 
 and his wife Motupapa ; only these four were on 
 Huahine. At the end of two years neither of the 
 women had borne a child to their husbands, and Poiata 
 and Rumia, assailing them with bitter words and 
 blows, drove them away to the sea-shore, and bade 
 them go swim out into the ocean and drown. 
 
152 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " * Nay,' cried Mahinihini, ' give us a canoe, so that 
 at least we may seek some other land and hide the 
 shame of our childlessness.' " 
 
 " But Poiata and Rumia laughed and jeered at 
 them, and pointing to a great shark that lay upon 
 the water outside the reef, mockingly bade them hold 
 on to its fin and begone. 
 
 " Now this shark was Tahua ; ' and the two 
 women, who wept as they swam, approached him 
 silently, and clambering upon his great back, held on 
 to his fin while Tahua sped away with them. 
 
 " For many days he swam southward and eastward, 
 till Mahinihini and Motupapa saw, rising out of the 
 sea, what seemed the fin of another great shark ; so 
 high was it that it pierced the clouds, even as does the 
 peak of Orohena. But when they drew near they 
 saw that it was land rising up steeply from the deep 
 sea, and on the high cliff's there stood strange men 
 with yellowish faces and circlets of red and green 
 parrots' feathers round their foreheads. As the two 
 women gazed in fear and trembling, Tahua the shark 
 sank from beneath them, and they struck out and 
 swam to the shore. The strange men ran down the 
 cliffs and helped them to land, and gave them food to 
 eat and coconuts to drink. Seven men were they, 
 and they said they came from a great country to the 
 east where the mountain-tops were for ever covered 
 with white clouds." 
 
 " How came they there ? " asked Christian. 
 Tairoa-Maina shook his head. " No man knoweth. 
 
 ' One of the gods of Tahitian mythology. 
 
THE STORY OF AFITA 153 
 
 But they were pleased to see Motupapa and Mahini- 
 hini, for there were no women with them on the 
 island, which they had named Afita — ' the land shot 
 up by fire from the bottom of the sea.' So these two 
 women became wives to the seven men, and they bore 
 seven children to each man. By and by, as the years 
 passed on, there came more of the strange people from 
 the great eastern land ; and they were pleased with 
 the beauty of Afita and the great richness of the land, 
 and dwelt with Mahinihini and Motupapa and their 
 husbands. Very joyously they lived together, until 
 the people grew so in number that breadfruit and 
 taro and yams and plantains began to be scarce 
 because of the many mouths of children who cried 
 with hunger. And when the land would no longer 
 hold them and famine came, twenty-and-two score men 
 and women sailed far away in canoes to seek another 
 home. Westward they sailed for ten days till a storm 
 separated them, and four of the canoes came to the 
 land of Tubuai, and four to the land of Rapa.^ Of 
 those that reached the land of Rapa I know nought, 
 save that the chief was named Teata-rua ; but of 
 those that came to Tubuai my father was one." 
 
 " And did he ever tell thee how appeared this Afita, 
 this lonely island that springeth up from the sea like 
 the fin of a shark that swimmeth on the surface ?" 
 asked Mahina. 
 
 " I have heard my father say," answered the chief, 
 " that so steep are its mountains that they shut in from 
 
 ' Rapa is situated in 27° 30' S ; 144° 30' W. and would easily be 
 made by sailing W. from Pitcairn. 
 
154 THE MUTINEER 
 
 the winds the rich soil of the belly of the land ; and 
 down the sides of the hills run many streams of water 
 sweet to drink. And save in one place no reef ran 
 out from the shore." 
 
 " That does not agree with Carteret," said Young 
 to Christian. 
 
 " And the great ocean rollers," added Mahina, " for 
 ever dashed up against the face of the cliffs so that no 
 strangers could land in their canoes, else would they 
 be broken to pieces in the angry surf." 
 
 " But still there is one little spot on the north and 
 north-west," continued the Tubuaian chief, "so small 
 that only those who have lived in Afita can find it, 
 where the sea is not always rough. And on the 
 eastern side there is a small bay, where, when the 
 wind is from the west and south, the sea is quiet, and 
 a deeply-laden canoe can land with safety." 
 
 " Is the water deep ? " asked Christian. 
 
 " Aye, so deep is it, that five fathoms from the shore 
 the water is as blue as the deep ocean ; and close to 
 the high cliffs swim great fish that we in Tubuai 
 catch only with lines a hundred fathoms in length. 
 Ah, Kirisiani, to-morrow wilt thou see if Mahina and 
 I have told thee aught but the truth." 
 
 As the pleasant tones of the chief's voice ceased 
 there came a gentle pufFof air, which filled the ship's 
 upper canvas, and Christian and Young sprang to their 
 feet, quickly followed by the natives, and trimmed the 
 sails for the coming breeze. 
 
 For three or four hours the Bounty slid softly over 
 a moonlit sea ; then as dawn broke and the red sun 
 
THE STORY OF AFITA 155 
 
 sprang from the horizon, P'lctchcr Christian and his 
 comrades saw the island for which they had so long 
 sought lying before them bright and shining green 
 upon the sunlit sea. 
 
 An hour later the ship was hove-to as close to 
 the land as her safety permitted, and Christian, in her 
 one boat with Taiaro-Maina and some white seamen, 
 was searching for the only little bay where it was 
 thought a landing might be effected. 
 
CHAPTER XVIII 
 
 BOUNTY BAY 
 
 WITHIN twenty minutes of leaving the ship 
 Christian and his boat's crew were close under 
 the cliffs of the island ; and rowing carefully, just 
 outside the curl of the breaking surf, they sought the 
 landing-place described by the Tubuaian chief as being 
 on the south and east side. As the strong arms of 
 the natives urged the boat along, Christian looked 
 at the grim, precipitous cliffs which rose sheer from 
 the thundering surf at their base, and a strange sense 
 of loneliness almost akin to fear came over him. 
 The outlines of the solitary island were savage, and the 
 terror of its forbidding exterior was increased by the 
 tumult of the waves which hurled themselves with 
 astounding fury against its grey coral walls. Some- 
 times, as a huge, swelling sea swept in like a moving 
 wall towards them, the natives would give a warning 
 cry ; and Christian, bringing the boat's head round to 
 meet it, would watch the mighty volume of water 
 fling itself, with a hoarse roar, high upwards against the 
 solid face of stone, to fall back in drenching sheets of 
 
 156 
 
BOUNTY BAY 157 
 
 foam upon the swirling cauldron which leapt and 
 eddied and boiled beneath. Here and there deep and 
 narrow chasms split up the vertical mass of rock, and 
 into these gaps, many of them terminating in caverns 
 black as night, the sea rushed with such irresistible 
 force that misty spray and spume shot upward over the 
 very summits of the clifFs, like the belching smoke 
 from the crater of a volcano in the throes of a 
 violent convulsion. Right to the verge there drooped 
 down in places thick clusters of a light-green coloured 
 creeper, whose pendants, turned yellow by the salty 
 spray, swayed wildly to and fro like banners waved by 
 mysterious, invisible hands, so fierce were the air 
 blasts caused by the terrific inrush of water. 
 
 Scarcely speaking above a whisper, the natives 
 rowed quickly along, their dark eyes shining with 
 pleasure when they saw the feathery tufts of coco- 
 palms showing above the dense thicket scrub, where 
 the cliffs were less precipitous and revealed a slight 
 glimpse of the interior of the island. And now, as the 
 boat drew near the south-western point where a high, 
 cathedral-like rock stood, blackly-grim, amid the white 
 seethe of boiling surge, there came a strange wild 
 clamour, a savage symphony of crashing, thundering 
 surf and hoarse guttural croaks and shrill pipings, and 
 from every crag and rock and jagged pinnacle along 
 the shore, there soared aloft a vast swarm of sea-birds, 
 which whirled and circled above the boat with out- 
 stretched wing and frightened eye. Then, as if satisfied 
 with their quick scrutiny of the strange intruders, they 
 rose higher in air and vanished behind the towering cliffs. 
 
158 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Keeping well clear of three or four sharp-peaked 
 rocks which raised their black heads from the water as 
 the receding billows uncovered them to view, the boat 
 at last rounded the point and Christian headed her along 
 the shore to the north-west ; and almost at the same 
 moment Tairoa-Maina drew in his oar, and sprang to 
 his feet with an exultant shout. 
 
 " See, Kirisiani ! the beach ! the beach ! And see, 
 too, the leaping torrent above. 'Tis indeed the land 
 of Afita." 
 
 Christian, himself too excited to speak, now gave 
 his attention to effecting a landing ; the crew took in 
 their oars and, picking up canoe paddles in their place, 
 waited for the word to run the boat ashore during a 
 lull in the surf, which even on the sheltered beach 
 broke heavily. For some five or ten minutes they 
 lay rising and falling upon the rollers ; then, seeing 
 his opportunity, Christian gave the order, the natives 
 plunged their paddles into the water with swift, strong 
 strokes, and sent the boat spinning shoreward on the 
 crest of a curling wave. Twenty feet from the beach 
 they leapt out, in another minute the boat had touched 
 the shingle, and the crew had hauled it out of 
 danger. 
 
 Directly in front of them was a winding path, long 
 unused, which led to a plateau beyond ; Christian and 
 Tairoa led the way up the ascent, and they quickly 
 gained the edge. And then even Christian could not 
 repress a cry of excited admiration at the marvellous 
 beauty of the scene. Back from the white beach, 
 which like a strip of ivory lay below amid the emerald 
 
BOUNTY BAY 159 
 
 green of a belt of encircling coco-palms, there stood 
 revealed an amphitheatre of the loveliest verdure and 
 most enchanting appearance, surrounded on three 
 sides by wild and densely wooded mountains. West- 
 ward, about a mile away across the plateau, a lofty 
 peak raised itself high above its less conspicuous fellows, 
 whose bold and romantic-looking semicircle, diversified 
 by noble, jutting crags and tapering peaks, encom- 
 passed the softer beauties of the smiling valley. 
 Scarcely more than a mile in width from east to 
 west, the extraordinary fertility and variety of verdure 
 was such that Christian and his companions gazed 
 upon their surroundings with feelings little short of 
 rapture. Overhead, the lofty plumes of the stately 
 palms swayed and rustled to the flower-scented 
 breath of the trade-wind as it stirred the rich green 
 foliage of the breadfruit trees. Along the seaward- 
 facing edge of the plateau clusters of pandanus palms, 
 with their ripe, red fruit, waved their feathery banners 
 to the breeze. Beyond the crowns of the murmur- 
 ing palms, and the wide outspreading branches of the 
 tamanu and breadfruit and pandanus trees, lay the blue, 
 heaving bosom of the Pacific. 
 
 For some little time they remained spellbound, 
 drinking in the beauty of land and sea and sky 
 around them, and listening to the music of the 
 mountain torrent as it wound downward through its 
 rocky bed to the bright valley, to mingle its pure waters 
 with the ocean. Then with a sigh of satisfaction the 
 leader bade his men follow him back to the boat. A 
 mile off he could see the 'Bounty^ which had just gone 
 
i6o THE MUTINEER 
 
 about, and was now standing in again, her white 
 canvas shining in the dazzling sunlight. 
 
 Before launching the boat, the crew threw into her 
 a hundred or more of young drinking coconuts, 
 which they had hastily gathered from the nearest 
 trees, for the use of the women. Then, all talking 
 together of the richness and fertility of the island, 
 they picked up their canoe paddles and quickly sent 
 the boat in safety through the breaking surf. 
 
 Christian was soon on deck and described the 
 appearance and capabilities of the island to the fore- 
 most of his comrades, who were all well pleased at his 
 account, and left their future course entirely in his 
 hands. He was not long, therefore, in coming to a 
 decision. 
 
 The wind was now from the south-east and blew 
 gently but steadily into the little bay, so it was agreed 
 that the ship should work round the south-west point 
 and be headed directly for the beach. The deep water 
 which ran close to the foot of the mountains all round 
 the island, except where a narrow strip of beach 
 separated land and sea, would enable them to get 
 everything out of the 'Bounty likely in the future to 
 be useful ; and the destruction of the ship. Christian 
 knew, would prevent his companions from yielding to 
 any sudden impulse and risking his and their safety by 
 an attempt to leave the long-sought place of refuge. 
 
 In order that Young and Brown (the gardener) might 
 take a look at their future home, Christian sent the 
 boat away a second time ; for the wind being light it 
 would be some time before he could effect the purpose 
 
BOUNTY BAY i6i 
 
 he had in view. Two hours later, when she was 
 within a quarter of a mile of the southern point of the 
 little bay, the boat was seen coming out again, and 
 soon gained the ship. Young was greatly pleased 
 with the beauty of the place, and reported that he 
 had searched for a suitable anchorage and had found a 
 spot where the ship would be safe enough during the 
 continuance of such calm weather, for the sea on that 
 side of the island was but moderate. 
 
 But at the word "anchorage" Christian shook his 
 head, and Young therefore pursued the subject no 
 further. Brown, who had a considerable knowledge 
 of botany, said that he had found many plants upon 
 the island which were edible and would prove of 
 value ; and his and Young's remarks confirmed 
 Christian and the others in their opinion that the 
 island would, when the ship's stores were exhausted, 
 yield them ample provisions in all respects save that 
 of animal food. The varied fruits and vegetables 
 also would be enough to support them till the ship's 
 stock of goats, pigs, and fowls had so increased that 
 they might begin to kill them with safety. 
 
 The boat being passed astern. Christian hove the 
 ship to, called all hands together and told them his 
 intentions. 
 
 " I have decided to run the ship ashore, and then 
 burn her," he said. 
 
 Without hesitation every one agreed to abide by his 
 decision. Then the sails of the 'Bounty were filled for 
 the last time, and in a few minutes she was heading 
 straight for the beach. 
 
 12 
 
i6z THE MUTINEER 
 
 Every heart on board beat more quickly as the old 
 ship neared the end of her life. 
 
 Christian, his eyes fixed upon a small rock which 
 marked the centre of the little bay, stood at the helm. 
 The act of severing this last link with the past almost 
 unnerved him, and every moment of the ship's progress 
 towards the breakers seemed like an hour. Whole 
 years of time in the life that was now for ever gone 
 raced swiftly in the current of his thoughts. But this, 
 the end for him of all his past, so lingered in its fulfil- 
 ment, that time after time he was on the point of 
 throwing the ship aback, saving her from destruction 
 before it was too late and giving him, felon as he was, 
 a last chance to end his days, even though a fugitive, 
 in a foreign land ; or he could return to England, and 
 then — a disgraceful death. With the means of escape 
 cut off perpetual exile faced him, and disseverance 
 from all which was once dear. 
 
 A slight touch upon his arm, and Mahina stood 
 looking into his face and reading his mind as clearly 
 as if he had spoken aloud. With the gentle pressure 
 of her hand, the look of unutterable love from the 
 dark, tender eyes, his indecision was gone. 
 
 " Mahina," he said, " thou art right ; I was waver- 
 ing. To all men this moment comes sometimes in 
 their lives, and they often decide wrongly ; but 
 between thee and what lieth beyond I should indeed 
 be a fool to hesitate. 
 
 Her lips quivered ; bending her head over the wheel 
 she kissed his hand, and her warm tears of silent sym- 
 pathy nerved him anew. 
 
BOUNTY BAY 163 
 
 A few seconds more, and with a voice as firm as 
 though he were about to anchor the ship, Christian 
 gave the word to let go the halliards and sheets, and, 
 while the hissing of the boiling surf breaking across 
 the entrance of the bay drowned the rattle of blocks 
 and the flapping of canvas, the 'Bounty ploughed 
 through the seas towards the shore. Wave after wave 
 swept roaring past her on either side, their snowy 
 summits running level with the tops of her bulwarks ; 
 with slowness tormenting to her expectant crew, she 
 gradually lost her way, struck the beach gently, ground 
 a few feet of furrow in the glistening pebbles and 
 sand, and then settled into her last resting-place with 
 scarcely a quiver of her timbers. 
 
CHAPTER XIX 
 
 HEWERS OF WOOD AND DRAWERS OF WATER 
 
 WITH shouts of joy the Tahitians and 
 Tubuaians, men and women alike, clambered 
 from the bows of the ship to the beach ; the white 
 men caught their enthusiasm, and they too, all but 
 Christian, who remained with Mahina, jumped ashore, 
 and for a while everything was forgotten but the one 
 delightful truth that the weary quest for a resting- 
 place was ended at last. 
 
 Christian, however, soon recalled them to the need 
 for work. Before abandoning their old home it was 
 necessary to build a new one. So the ship was made 
 as secure as possible where she lay, and while the 
 white men went to work to dismantle her, the brown 
 people, with Christian and Mahina, set about selecting 
 a site for their dwellings. 
 
 For the first few days after landing they lived in 
 tents and such rough shelters as could be built with 
 canvas and planks from the ship, and during this time 
 a survey was made of the island. It was then by 
 mutual consent divided into nine parts — one portion 
 
 164 
 
HEWERS OF WOOD 165 
 
 to each Englishman. As for the islanders, none of 
 the white men, except Christian and Smith, seemed 
 to think of them as having equal shares and rights in 
 the undertaking ; even Mahina seemed surprised that 
 her husband should regard them as anything but 
 servants and tillers of the soil. Finding that all the 
 other seamen except Smith w^ere determined against 
 giving their brown associates any land whatever. 
 Christian, after a few words of expostulation, withdrew 
 all further opposition and let matters take their 
 course, and the Tahitians and Tubuaians began to 
 build houses and prepare land for planting. 
 
 But just as axes and hoes had been served out to 
 the natives by McCoy and Young, and while the 
 rest of Christian's comrades were present, the Tubuaian 
 chief stepped out from among the natives, and fixing 
 his eyes on the man Williams, who had especially 
 resented the idea that land should be given them, 
 he addressed Christian. He spoke very slowly and 
 clearly, and even those of the mutineers whose know- 
 ledge of the Tubuaian language was limited, could 
 grasp the meaning of his words. 
 
 " I, Tairoa-Maina, am a chief. In my own land 
 of Tubuai, for me, a warrior and a man of good blood, 
 to labour for others would be shameful and degrading. 
 But I and Talalu, who is my friend, and of as good 
 blood as myself, have no thoughts such as this now ; 
 our hearts are eaten up with love for Kirisiani and 
 his wife Mahina, and for they alone do I and 
 Talalu go forth to labour like slaves. Like myself, 
 Kirisiani is a chief in his own land, that I well know. 
 
i66 THE MUTINEER 
 
 And I know, oh men of Peretane, that there are some 
 among you who have evil in your hearts." 
 
 " Cease, cease, my brother," said Mahina, taking 
 the chief's hand. " Well do my husband and myself 
 know^ that thou and Talalu are indeed friends to us ; 
 but, I pray thee, make no bad blood between him and 
 the other white men." 
 
 "You've always had too much to say," said 
 Williams, advancing to Tairoa savagely with his hand 
 upon his knife. Christian sprang upon him and 
 gripped him by the wrist. 
 
 "Stand back, Williams. Raise your hand to that 
 man and I'll choke you. Do you want to begin 
 our new life by bloodshed ? Listen to me, and 
 weigh well my words. I have long seen how you 
 have tried to harass and thwart me in my endeavours 
 for our common good ; of that which is passed I 
 will think no more ; but, by the living God, do not 
 attempt it again ! And do not seek to injure this man 
 Tairoa-Maina, who has been a good friend to us all, 
 and should in common justice have equal rights with 
 ourselves." 
 
 With a look of bitter hatred, Williams sullenly 
 turned away, and calling his wife Faito to follow him, 
 left the others and took no further part in their dis- 
 cussions. 
 
 During the following week the 'Bounty was stripped 
 of everything below and aloft, inside and outside ; 
 even her planks were removed from her sides, and the 
 copper, nails, bolts, and such useful articles carefully 
 stored on shore, and nothing of her being left out of I 
 
HEWERS OF WOOD 167 
 
 the water but the frame, she was set on fire. What 
 remained of her charred hull was floated and sunk in 
 the bay, which from that day the white men 
 called Bounty Bay, and the Tubuaians Te Moega te 
 Pahi — the resting-place of the ship. 
 
 Although Christian relinquished the command of 
 his fellow adventurers as soon as they had landed, he 
 was still tacitly recognised as their leader, and his 
 advice sought and taken upon many matters. For 
 some days the people lived in tents, and all, brown and 
 white alike, worked at clearing the nine portions of 
 land, and building thereon houses, the roofs of which 
 were skilfully and quickly thatched by the women. 
 For this they used the stiff leaves of the pandanus or 
 screw-palm, which grew on the island in profusion, 
 and yielded, in addition to its strong, useful timber 
 and leaves, quantities of rich yellow fruit. 
 
 Mahina, always a favourite with the Tahitians, had 
 now gained very great influence over them all, and 
 Alrema, who was possessed of undaunted courage and 
 iron resolution, was equally well-liked, and was a 
 fitting mate for her husband, who, reckless as he was 
 by nature, ifelt and yielded to the influence of his 
 young and beautiful wife, whose easy manners and 
 soft ways veiled, as he knew, a capacity for heroic 
 deeds where her love for him was concerned or her 
 jealousy or hatred was aroused. Unknown to Chris- 
 tian she had been, from the very day of their return to 
 Tahiti, a silent force working both in his and her 
 husband's interests to maintain their supremacy over 
 the rest of the white men. Nothing escaped her 
 
i68 THE MUTINEER 
 
 keen observation ; danger to Christian, she knew, 
 meant danger to Young, and she was quick to note 
 and take heed of the slightest murmuring of dis- 
 affection, and to nullify it by inducing Christian, 
 either through Mahina or Young, to make some 
 concession. 
 
 Of Quintal and Williams she was especially dis- 
 trustful. The former, once an ardent supporter of 
 Christian, had of late begun to associate much with 
 Williams, who was of a dangerous and savage dis- 
 position. Faito, his wife, was a tender, delicate girl, 
 scarcely more than fifteen years of age ; but at a 
 period when even the roughest and coarsest of men 
 might have been expected to have shown her some 
 tenderness and consideration, she received nothing but 
 curses for her weakness and incapacity to attend fully 
 to his wants. 
 
 " Perhaps," she one day said weepingly to Alrema 
 and Mahina, as the three were plaiting thatch for the 
 roof of a house, " perhaps he will again be the same to 
 me when my child is born and I become strong again. 
 But to-day he cursed me because, being wearied, I lay 
 down for a little while, and he said that he was a fool 
 to take such a weak thing as I to wife." 
 
 Alrema's eye flashed and her white teeth showed 
 through her parted lips. " Aye, I heard the dog — and 
 I heard more ; what said he of Malama, the wife of 
 Kawintali (Quintal) ? " 
 
 Faito covered her face with her hands ; in an instant 
 Mahina's arms were round her waist and her head 
 pillowed upon Mahina's bosom. 
 
HEWERS OF WOOD 169 
 
 " Nay, heed him not, Faito ; Malama fears him, 
 and never wilt thou be wronged by her." 
 
 The sifl tried to smile throuo-h her tears. " It 
 may be so ; but to-day he said that 'twas Malama who 
 should have been wife to him, for she is well and 
 strong." 
 
 " Not so strong but that my knife shall eat into her 
 heart if she comes between thy husband and thee," 
 said Alrema fiercely. " Her husband is but a dull 
 head where women are concerned ; but thy husband 
 is as cunning as a rat. And I know that they both 
 are evilly disposed to Kirisiani and to my husband ; 
 they say this land of Afita is too small for so many. 
 By and by they shall have but a very small piece — 
 so small indeed that a child may step across it." 
 
 With these ominous words Alrema went away ; and 
 so began to germinate the seeds of discontent and dis- 
 trust, which later ripened to a deadly feud. 
 
 But for some little time matters went on well enough ; 
 even those who were secretly resentful of Christian's 
 influence over their brown-skinned associates yet 
 worked willingly enough for the common good, and 
 performed the daily task allotted to them without 
 murmuring. 
 
 Within three weeks, nine houses — one for each of 
 the mutineers — were completed, and Christian one 
 day announced that the next joint work would be 
 to provide four similar dwellings, three for the 
 Tahitians and their wives, and one for the three 
 Tubuaians — who, being single men, would live to- 
 gether. 
 
170 THE MUTINEER 
 
 For some moments no one spoke — then Williams, 
 who was sitting beside Quintal upon the bole of a 
 large toa tree which had been felled for house- 
 building, laid down his pipe, stood up, and confronted 
 Christian. 
 
 "You don't expect us to build houses for these 
 natives, do you, Mr. Christian ? " he said, and Alrema, 
 who stood near, noted the glance that passed between 
 him and Quintal. 
 
 " Why should we not ? Are not these people as 
 good as ourselves ? Have they not done thrice as 
 much as we have in building our own dwellings ? " 
 
 He spoke quietly, but there was a dangerous tone in 
 his voice, and Young, Mahina, and Alrema, who 
 knew now his slightest mood, looked with anxiety for 
 what was to follow. 
 
 " I, for one, will be damned if I work for 
 savages," said Quintal, rising and standing beside 
 Williams. 
 
 " We didn't come here to work, Mr. Christian," 
 joined in Mills, the gunner's mate, gloomily ; " I 
 think these fellows ought to work for us, and not we 
 for them." 
 
 " You are all pretty much of this opinion ? " asked 
 Christian slowly, with an inquiring glance, and in a 
 savagely contemptuous tone of voice. 
 
 A quick and angry murmur of assent came from 
 all but Young and Smith, who quietly walked apart 
 from the others and stood beside Christian. 
 
 Then Smith, after a whispered word with Alrema 
 and his own wife, Terere, stepped out in front. 
 
HEWERS OF WOOD 171 
 
 "I, for one, sir, will lend a hand right willingly. 
 Give your orders, Mr. Christian, and I'll obey them." 
 
 This brought no remark from the rest, and Young 
 drawing his comrade aside, said quietly, " My dear 
 Christian, what is the use of sneering at the men in 
 this fashion. It is scarcely likely that British seamen 
 — damned lazy dogs they are, too — could be induced 
 to work side by side with island savages ; and your 
 manner of asking them invited their refusal." 
 
 Pushing aside Young's restraining hand, Fletcher 
 Christian turned to the group of seamen, and, with 
 flashing eyes and voice trembling with rage and con- 
 tempt, said — 
 
 " Have your own way ; I have done with the 
 lot of you, and am glad to be clear of you. For 
 your own sakes I have, so far, kept control. If I 
 led you into mutiny I stood by you and brought 
 you to a place of safety. I can die or live here 
 — I care nothing which way it is. But understand 
 this : I will be no party to making slaves of men 
 whom I look upon as equal to myself — and supe- 
 rior to such damned soldiers as you. Go to hell, 
 the whole lot of you, in your own way ! " Then he 
 walked rapidly away, followed by the trembling 
 Mahina, and the unmoved, undaunted Alrema. 
 
 As soon as he had disappeared among the palm- 
 groves, Talalu, who understood enough English to 
 comprehend the nature of the discussion that had 
 taken place, turned to Young, and said in Tahitian — 
 
 " Do not quarrel about this matter, Etuati. There 
 are plenty of us to build houses. Our hands are 
 
172 THE MUTINEER 
 
 strong and our hearts are not made sore because 
 these our friends think we alone should work on 
 Afita. Come, my countrymen, let us to work. 
 Never must angry words come between us and the 
 white men." 
 
 A cheerful assent was the response ; the natives 
 shouldered their axes and, followed by Tairoa and 
 the others, walked ofF in single file towards a clump 
 of toa trees. 
 
 " Why, damn it all," said Mills, with a coarse 
 laugh, " those fellows have more sense than Christian ! 
 They know well enough that we ain't the sort to 
 work for them. Why, it's agin' nature." 
 
 For a few days after this nothing occurred to widen 
 the breach. The Tahitians worked with a will, 
 lightening their labours with many a song and merry 
 jest ; for they were by nature an amiable and kindly- 
 hearted people, full to overflowing of the most gene- 
 rous instincts and noble impulses, and their devotion 
 to Christian and his beautiful wife was sufficient 
 reason for them to toil unrepiningly for the rest of the 
 white men ; to their simple minds, those who sought 
 to oppress them were of Christian's race and, as such, 
 had a claim upon them. But underneath all their 
 present content there was yet a hidden current of dis- 
 satisfaction which only the quick mind of Alrema had 
 fathomed, and she was a woman who meant to make 
 use of it when the time came. So, while the white 
 seamen lay in their houses and ate and drank and were 
 waited upon by their obedient Tahitian wives, the 
 brown men let the white slowly but surely assume 
 
HEWERS OF WOOD 173 
 
 the rights of masters over them, and uncomplainingly 
 became hewers of wood and drawers of water. 
 
 At night when the fires were blazing and the 
 rude lamps brought from the ship were lighted, the 
 islanders would assemble in front of the white men's 
 houses ; and with the wives of the mutineers (except 
 Alrema and Mahina) sing old Tahitian songs such as 
 the bounty's people had heard in the days when their 
 ship floated on the placid waters of Matavai Bay. 
 Sometimes, when the sea was smooth, men and women 
 together would go down to the ledges of the cliffs 
 and fish in the deep waters at their base, returning 
 home laden with many a weighty basket. Tairoa- 
 Maina and his two countrymen had already made a 
 canoe, and the marvellous ingenuity with which it 
 was constructed with such rough tools — for they had 
 but axes and knives and a few chisels— aroused the 
 admiration even of the lazy Englishmen. The houses 
 of the white men, too, were monuments of the untiring 
 patience and skill of the Tahitians. Built of the 
 timber of breadfruit and toa^ and thatched beautifully 
 with the russet-coloured leaves of the pandanus palm, 
 oblong in shape, they bore an almost exact resem- 
 blance, inside and out, to the dwellings in Tahiti 
 and Tubuai. Their furniture was nearly all of native 
 pattern, and consisted in each house of the owner's 
 share of the spoils from the ^ounty^ with rough 
 wooden stools and benches made from the wood of 
 the breadfruit, toa or tamanu tree. The floors were 
 first of all laid out with about a foot of smooth, sea- 
 worn pebbles, brought by the women in baskets from 
 
174 THE MUTINEER 
 
 the little beach where the ship was run ashore, and 
 then covered over with coarse mats of coconut leaf. 
 Over this was spread finer matting made from the 
 pandanus leaf, and over this again squares of canvas 
 cut from the bounty's sails. Upon this a thick layer 
 of still finer mats, brought from Tahiti, was placed, 
 and this formed the beds of the occupants. 
 
 The long months spent at sea upon the ship had 
 greatly changed the habits and customs of the Tahi- 
 tians, until in some things there was but little differ- 
 ence between them and their white associates — or 
 rather masters. But now that they were both once 
 more on land the Englishmen were glad to adopt, in 
 their turn, many of the ways of the natives, and so 
 the two races gradually acquired from each other such 
 new habits and modes of life as were best suited to 
 their altered state. 
 
 To their white husbands the Tahitian women were 
 always considerate and dutiful ; they ministered to 
 the men's wants so skilfully that the rough sailors 
 found their days slip by in the greatest ease and com- 
 fort, and had some sort of selfish affection for their 
 wives. It was contrary to the custom of Tahiti for 
 the women to eat with the men, or even to drink out 
 of the same utensils as their husbands, or partake of 
 food which had been either handled or prepared by 
 the superior sex; and in this respect the laws of 
 custom proved too strong to be broken, even though 
 their husbands good-humouredly urged them to do so, 
 they were quite content to wait upon their lords and 
 masters and eat by themselves afterwards. But 
 
HEWERS OF WOOD 175 
 
 Christian, Young, and Smith, who regarded their 
 wives as something better than mere chattels or 
 objects of selfish passion, tried hard to combat this 
 custom, and in some degree succeeded ; so that 
 Mahina, Alrema, and Terere all abandoned the 
 Tahitian habit of one regular meal on rising, and 
 taking food and drink at infrequent intervals during 
 the remainder of the day, and prepared and ate meals 
 in the English fashion. 
 
 Although no longer on more than terms of ordi- 
 nary civility with the rest of the white men, other 
 than Young and Smith, Christian would come in the 
 evenings sometimes from his house to exchange a few 
 words with them as they sat outside upon the grassy 
 sward before their dwellings listening to the Tahitians 
 as they sang and chanted or played music upon their 
 reed vivos.^ When they were tired of singing, the 
 happy monotony of the long nights would be relieved 
 by the brown women, who, like all Polynesians, were 
 born story-tellers, with tales of their early childhood, 
 the old traditions and legends of their island homes, 
 and about the marvellous origin and great deeds of 
 their ancestors. Fabulous and absurd as was much 
 even of their history — for it was so interwoven with 
 their wild mythology that the seamen merely heard 
 it with a good-natured smile of contempt — there was 
 yet enough of truth in it to interest Christian and 
 Young ; and their attention pleased the wives of the 
 seamen greatly, and indeed helped to sow the seeds 
 of indifference towards their husbands, who they now 
 
 ' Flutes of three notes. 
 
176 THE MUTINEER 
 
 began to perceive were men in intelligence far below 
 the one-time officers of the bounty. 
 
 But even the rough seamen could not fail to be 
 amused at some of the early Tahitian notions of 
 England. For instance, they had somehow acquired 
 the idea — perhaps from travellers' tales of early 
 voyages — that England was once a large island, the 
 centre of which was made of iron ; but continuous 
 wars with other nations had resulted in all the outside 
 soil being shot away with cannon balls till there was 
 nothing left but a solid mass of iron. It was also 
 believed that there were ships in England forty leagues 
 long with masts so high that they pierced beyond the 
 clouds, and that a young man in full health and 
 strength going to the masthead grew grey before he 
 reached the deck again ; while on the great round 
 tops of the lower masts were rich gardens of fruit, 
 in which men lived. 
 
 Another story told how the captain of an English 
 ship of war, which carried so many cannons that it 
 took one man a year to count them, was incensed at 
 the conduct of the people of a certain island ; so that 
 hooking one of the ship's anchors to a mountain, he 
 set sail, tore the island from its foundations, and 
 towed it away to the region of cold, where the people 
 perished. But although these tales were believed by 
 their narrators, they would not accept the white men's 
 stories of stone houses many feet high and of rivers 
 crossed by bridges of stone with no support under- 
 neath. 
 
 As time wore on, some of the women began to 
 
HEWERS OF WOOD 177 
 
 adopt the semi-European style of clothing ; and this 
 while it did not become them so well as their own 
 native dress, yet pleased their husbands and showed 
 the women's desire to render themselves attractive in 
 the white men's eyes. 
 
 13 
 
i 
 
 CHAPTER XX 
 
 mahina's first-born 
 
 GLOOMY and melancholy as ever, since the day 
 of the mutiny Christian had gradually allowed 
 his bitter thoughts so utterly to overcome hun that 
 even towards Mahina he showed cruel mdifFerence. 
 For days a word would not escape his lips, save when 
 his wife put some direct question to him concernmg 
 his movements or intentions; and both Young and 
 Smith, attached to him as they were, now ceased their 
 evening visits entirely. Sometimes, when the fires 
 were lit after sunset, Mahina-her dark eyes filled 
 with tears-would watch her husband go to the door 
 of their little dwelling, stand there for a minute or two 
 lost in thought, and walk silently away along the edge 
 of the cliffs. Often when she would have accompamed 
 him he quietly, but yet firmly, pushed her hand aside, 
 and with an impatient exclamation quickened his steps 
 so as to be away from her the sooner. Hour after hour 
 would pass while Mahina, weeping softly to herselt, sat 
 outside awaiting her husband's return. Sometimes her 
 solitude would be broken by the gigantic Talalu, 
 
MAHINA'S FIRST-BORN 179 
 
 whose dog-like devotion to Christian led him to 
 leave his own house and join her in her saddened 
 watch. 
 
 Early one morning Mahina, accompanied by Alrema 
 and Talalu, set out for a day's ramble in the wild, 
 mountainous interior of the island ; Christian, scarcely 
 noting her absence, left the house a few hours later for 
 his solitary haunts on the high cliffs. About sunset he 
 returned, and the moment his figure appeared over the 
 ridge behind which the little house was situated, 
 Mahina ran to meet him with outstretched hands, her 
 face radiant with childish joy. Placing her hand on 
 her husband's arm she told him in excited tones that 
 she and Talalu had found traces of her ancestors in 
 many places on the southern portion of the island. 
 
 Flinging down his musket, Christian seated himself 
 on the low, rough seat erected by the side of his 
 dwelling, and for some moments seemed quite 
 oblivious of Mahina's presence. At last, however, 
 in answer to her continued exclamations of delight, 
 he replied bitterly — 
 
 " Trouble me not with such things, Mahina. What 
 care I who lived here in the past ? The misery of 
 living in the present is enough for me," and so 
 saying he buried his face in his hands. 
 
 The savage energy in his voice made her tremble at 
 first, but the indifferent manner in which he treated 
 the news of her discovery touched her to the quick, 
 and she blazed out in hot anger — 
 
 " Thou cruel Kirisiani ! What have we who love 
 thee done that thou shouldst cease to care for us ? 
 
i8o THE MUTINEER 
 
 What have I, thy wife, done that thou shouldst so 
 answer when I speak to thee ? Were I a slave thou 
 couldst not insult me more than thou hast done." 
 
 Christian merely shrugged his shoulders, rose and 
 walked back towards the cliffs, although food had been 
 prepared for him by his disheartened wife. 
 
 Brushing away the tears that would still come, 
 Mahina entered the silent house, put out the lamp, 
 and seated herself before the dimly-burning fire, 
 wondering what it was that had so changed her 
 husband's manner towards her and, indeed, to every 
 one else. That he was engaged in working alone on 
 one of the highest spots on the island she knew, for he 
 had taken tools with him from time to time ; but 
 where the spot was and what was the nature of his 
 toil she could not even guess. He had sternly forbidden 
 her to follow him, and even Talalu dared not attempt 
 to discover his retreat. 
 
 So for many days Talalu and Mahina contented 
 themselves with talking over their discoveries with 
 Tairoa-Maina, who himself a descendant of the now 
 extinct people of Afita, of course took a keen interest 
 in all that related to his ancestors. 
 
 Taking some food with them, the three one day set 
 out to make further explorations. On the eastern side 
 of the island some rocks were discovered among a 
 dense, scrubby thicket, through which they had to cut 
 their way with seamen's cutlasses brought for the 
 purpose ; on the faces of these rocks were rude 
 drawings of birds, fishes, turtle, and of the sun, 
 moon and stars, besides what Tairoa-Maina said was 
 
MAHINA'S FIRST-BORN i8i 
 
 a chart of the islands in the surrounding ocean, show- 
 ing the track to be taken by a canoe in voyaging 
 among them. At another spot, not far from the high 
 cathedral-shaped rock on the south-east point, they 
 found in a cave numbers of stone spear and arrow- 
 heads. Many of these were unused implements, and 
 the cave in which they were found had evidently been 
 a storehouse for food as well as an armoury ; for in its 
 earthen floor were a number of pits which had once 
 been silos for the storage of breadfruit, yams, and other 
 food. Almost in the centre of the island, Tairoa one 
 day came across the very burial-places of his and 
 Mahina's forefathers. Round this cemetery were 
 a number of rude images of human figures, and huge 
 squared blocks of stone lay about in profusion. 
 
 At evening they returned home, full of the im- 
 portant discoveries they had made, and would again 
 have spoken to Christian on the subject, but that his 
 distant manner forbade them. 
 
 As the days passed this moroseness so grew upon 
 him that there was little doubt his mind had become 
 diseased, and about a week after Mahina's discoveries 
 in the mountains he began to absent himself from her 
 for two or three days together. 
 
 Unknown even to his tender and devoted wife, 
 he had furnished a roomy cave situated in a mountain 
 recess on the opposite side of the island. It was his 
 intention, he afterwards told Mahina, to hide in this 
 cavern should a ship of war by any chance arrive. He 
 had stocked it with provisions and water, and arms and 
 ammunition, so that he might defend himself to the 
 
i82 THE MUTINEER 
 
 last in case of discovery, for he swore that he would 
 never be taken alive. 
 
 The completion of his hiding-place seemed to please 
 him somewhat, and he now at times was more sociable 
 with the other white men when by chance he passed 
 their dwellings or met any of them in his lonely 
 walks ; and sometimes, to their great joy, he would 
 join Talalu and the other natives in a fishing excursion. 
 Then, as she saw him ascending the cliffs towards their 
 home, Mahina's face would brighten, and she and her 
 girl friends would eagerly welcome him, and instantly 
 prepare to cook the fish he brought. 
 
 For some little time matters went on without 
 change in Christian's home till towards the close of 
 the year an event occurred which temporarily roused 
 him from his lethargy. This was the birth of his first 
 child — a boy. 
 
 To Mahina's great happiness, her husband consented 
 that the customs of her race should be observed, and at 
 her request he went away to his cave to remain there 
 till the child was born. 
 
 In the meantime, under the direction of Quintal's 
 wife, the oldest Tahitian woman present, the others 
 prepared in the centre of the great room a sort of 
 bower of leaves and fine matting. Upon its floor was 
 placed a heap of heated stones, which were constantly 
 replaced by others as they cooled. Upon the stones 
 were thrown great bunches of such sweet-smelling 
 herbs and flowers as the island afforded, and these were 
 from time to time sprinkled with water, so that the 
 house was kept filled with the perfume of the herbs. 
 
MAHINA'S FIRST-BORN 183 
 
 In this bower Mahina remained till the birth of her 
 infant ; and then Christian was waited upon by the 
 other women and asked what amua (gifts) he had 
 ready for the child. 
 
 Having been previously instructed by Quintal's 
 wife, he replied — 
 
 "This is all that I, Kirisiani of Peretane, have for 
 mine and Mahina's infant, for it is all that this land of 
 Afita yields," and he placed in their hands small quan- 
 tities of breadfruit, taroy and such other fruits as grew 
 on Pitcairn. This was all that was expected of him, 
 and file women went away pleased that he had allowed 
 them to follow their native customs so far. In Tahiti 
 it was the practice for a woman to live some weeks 
 with her new-born infant in the sacred grounds of the 
 maraes or temples of Oro and Tane, in order that 
 the favour of the gods might be assured for the child's 
 future. But under the influence of their white hus- 
 bands the women of Pitcairn had abandoned much of 
 their religious ceremonies, and so this one was not 
 observed by Mahina, on the plea that, although they 
 had found a marae on the island, there was nothing to 
 show that it had been built by worshippers of Oro and 
 Tane, but really because she knew that Christian 
 disliked her clinging to Tahitian customs. 
 
 After Christian had presented his gifts, he was 
 followed by all the others, each person bringing an 
 amua either of food, live stock, clothing or matting. 
 These were deposited at the mother's feet, and the 
 ceremonies were concluded. 
 
 To Mahina's delight Christian remained constantly 
 
i84 THE MUTINEER 
 
 with her for some weeks after this event ; his manner 
 to her and the infant was gentle and kind, and she now 
 began to hope that her husband's former affection for 
 her had not entirely died away. Poor girl, she was 
 soon undeceived. 
 
 One evening she and her friends were at one end of 
 the room silently toying with the infant ; Young, 
 Smith, and Christian were sitting smoking on the 
 bench outside. The evening was wonderfully clear 
 and still and, but for the ceaseless throbbing of the 
 surf upon the cliffs below, no sound disturbed the 
 silence. 
 
 Presently she heard Young's voice addressing her 
 husband, and (for she now spoke English fairly well 
 and understood it still better) listened to hear what 
 they were saying. 
 
 " What do you intend to call the boy ? " asked 
 Young. "Will you name him after yourself?" 
 
 " No," answered Christian, with intense contempt ; 
 "do you think that I will let the little savage per- 
 petuate his father's name and shame ? She can call the 
 brat by any name she pleases, except mine." 
 
 Both Young and Smith were silent, and the latter 
 looked troubled. Attached as he was to Christian, he 
 felt that Mahina's steady devotion had deserved better 
 of her husband. 
 
 "You are a strange man. Christian," said Young, 
 presently ; and calling Alrema he took her by the 
 hand and led her away, giving Christian only a curt 
 " good-night." He was soon followed by Terere and 
 her husband ; Christian remained alone outside, lost 
 
MARINA'S FIRST-BORN 185 
 
 in thought, and heard nothing of a soft sobbing 
 within. 
 
 Midnight was long past when he rose and went 
 inside. He thought Mahina was asleep, but just as he 
 laid his head upon the pillow he felt her hand upon his 
 forehead. 
 
 " Kirisiani, I heard thee speak to-night. Not all 
 did I understand ; only this — that thou dost despise 
 thy child, and wilt not give him thy name." 
 
 " Call it by some Tahitian name, Mahina ; 'tis not 
 an English child." 
 
 " True," she answered brokenly ; " but yet 'tis thy 
 child, and his eyes are thy eyes ; and when I look 
 into his face I see thy eyes looking into mine, as they 
 did when thy heart was warm with love for me, its 
 mother. And for this do I desire to call it by a name 
 of thy tongue and by no other." 
 
 " Very well," he answered, after a moment's thought, 
 "have your own way — stay, I have a name for it. It 
 was born upon a Thursday in October. Call it Thurs- 
 day October, for " — and his voice grew hard and 
 sneering — " 'tis the way they name negro children in 
 the West Indies. It is only fitting that this little 
 savage should have some such name." 
 
 And Mahina, not understanding the full meaning of 
 his words, called her first-born by the name given it by 
 her husband. 
 
CHAPTER XXI 
 
 THE FIRST TO DIE 
 
 ALL day long, from the red blush of sunrise till the 
 mantle of the quick, tropic night enshrouded 
 the lonely island, thousands upon thousands of sea-birds 
 circled round the high mountain peaks and vine-covered 
 crags of Afita, and filled the air with their w^ild 
 clamour. At one place, where the grim cliffs started 
 sheer upward from the crashing surf, they had made 
 their rookeries upon a series of narrow ledges v/hich 
 traversed the face of the rock in undulating lines from 
 the summit. The highest of these ledges was perhaps 
 fifty feet from the scrub-covered edge of the precipice ; 
 the lowest just out of the reach of the drenching spray 
 that in stormy weather sprang upward in misty showers 
 from the wild commotion of the waves beneath. 
 
 Here, with faces turned seaward, the great black 
 frigate birds and the blue-billed kanapu^ with many 
 other species of ocean rangers, sat upon their eggs and 
 hatched their young, and the weird cries of the fledg- 
 lings mingled with the hoarse, croaking notes of the 
 parent birds all through the night, and were borne 
 
 186 
 
THE FIRST TO DIE 187 
 
 in strange, mournful cadences and mysterious quaver- 
 ings through the darkened forest to the dwellings of 
 the mutineers and their brown-skinned associates. 
 
 The eggs of these birds were much relished by 
 the white men, and it was one of the duties of their 
 patient wives to hazard their lives along the line of cliffs 
 in collecting them. Sure-footed and agile, the women 
 would sometimes be lowered by their companions 
 above to the perilous ledges full fifty feet down, fill 
 their baskets with eggs, and be hauled up again in 
 safety, thinking nothing of the dreadful death that 
 awaited them if the rope parted or they became over- 
 whelmed with giddiness. The topmost ledge, where 
 the fierce-eyed frigate birds had made their rookery, 
 could be reached by clambering down the clifF and 
 along its jagged face. 
 
 For two or three days great numbers of these sea- 
 birds had been seen flying swiftly towards the island 
 from the eastward, and the Tahitians understood that 
 the breeding season drew near, and that very shortly 
 the female birds would be sitting. 
 
 Early one morning Faito, the gentle, delicate-featured 
 wife of the coarse and brutal Williams, set out along 
 the edge of the cliffs to see if the frigate birds had 
 begun to lay. She was alone. Heart-broken as she 
 was at her husband's cruel conduct, her loving nature 
 impelled her to venture her life upon the cliffs, so that 
 she might be the first to bring the much-coveted eggs 
 to her savage master. 
 
 Presently, as she walked along, softly singing to her- 
 self some chant of her Tahitian childhood, a pretty 
 
1 88 THE MUTINEER 
 
 black and white kid — the progeny of one of the goats 
 brought to the island in the Bounty — sprang out from 
 the dense thicket scrub which bordered the mountain 
 path, and darted along the edge of the precipice. 
 
 The cry of delight that escaped from Faito at the 
 prospect of catching the animal reached the ears of 
 Talalu, who was some few hundred yards away, cutting 
 down a toa tree. 
 
 " Take care, take care, Faito," he cried, as the girl 
 sped swiftly along, her black hair streaming behind her, 
 her dark eyes glowing, and her bare bosom panting in 
 the excitement of pursuit — for she knew that the 
 capture of the kid would at least bring a pleasant word 
 from Williams ; then, ere Talalu could shout another 
 warning, her flying feet caught in a creeper, and with- 
 out a cry she pitched headlong over the cliffs, with the 
 sound of happy laughter yet upon her lips. 
 
 Dashing through the thick scrub, Talalu reached 
 the edge of the precipice and looked over ; there, on a 
 little pebbly beach, hollowed out in the face of a chasm 
 in the cliffs, he saw the dead and bleeding body of 
 Faito lying upon the stones. 
 
 This was the prologue to a bloody tragedy yet to be 
 enacted on Pitcairn. 
 
 Clambering down to the bottom of the cliffs by a 
 devious and dangerous route, Talalu at last gained the 
 spot where the body of the dead girl lay. He took it 
 tenderly in his arms and pressed his face to hers, with 
 streaming eyes and sobs of pity, then slowly and 
 laboriously began the perilous ascent. 
 
 It was noon when he reached the settlement. 
 
THE FIRST TO DIE 189 
 
 Williams and Quintal were sitting together in front of 
 the former's house when the Tahitian drew near with 
 his burden. 
 
 "What the hell's the matter now ? " asked the dead 
 woman's husband roughly, when he saw his wife's 
 figure lying in Talalu's brawny arms ; then, brute 
 though he was, his dark features paled when her 
 countryman turned Faito's dead face towards him. 
 
 "Thy wife is dead, oh worker of iron. She sought 
 to catch a kid, thinking to please thee. She tripped 
 and fell — and died." 
 
 Gently laying the body down upon the couch ot 
 mats, he walked away without a word. 
 
 The tidings of Faito's death soon brought the rest 
 of the white men's wives to Williams' house, sobbing 
 as they ran. The first to fling herself weeping upon 
 the cold bosom of the dead girl was Nahi, the wife of 
 Talalu. She was a tall, slenderly built woman, with 
 big, passionate eyes, although she had the gentle, timid 
 manner of a child. Seating herself by the body of the 
 girl, Nahi first pressed her lips to the cold face of her 
 friend, and then in whispered tones directed the others 
 in their ministrations to the dead. Towards sunset, as 
 they moved to and fro in the great room of the house, 
 a figure darkened the doorway and Williams' harsh 
 voice broke in upon the silence. 
 
 "Hallo, Nahi," he said in English, without even 
 glancing at the shrouded figure upon the floor, " how 
 are you ? It's not often I catch a sight of you — and, 
 by God ! you're too pretty a woman not to see often." 
 
 Slowly Nahi rose to her feet. She understood every 
 
I90 THE MUTINEER 
 
 word that was said to her, yet curbed her anger, and 
 with downcast eyes and trembling hands answered him 
 in Tahitian. 
 
 "We come. Iron-worker, to mourn for Faito, thy 
 wife." 
 
 Something in her voice, and in her trembling, yet 
 indignant attitude, made the callous-hearted man turn 
 away without a further word. He stepped to the 
 door, stood there irresolutely for a moment, and then 
 disappeared into the darkness. 
 
 All through the night the mourning watchers sat 
 beside the dead girl ; at dawn the brown men dug her 
 grave in the garden, some distance from the back of 
 Williams' dwelling. Just as the sun became level with 
 the summit of the cliffs and shot its bright darts 
 through the leafy forest aisles, the little funeral pro- 
 cession gathered round the grave, and Faito's body, 
 lying upon a bier covered with garlands and wreaths of 
 flowers and leaves, was placed beside it. Then, one by 
 one, each of the men and women brought off'erings of 
 food and young drinking coconuts and placed them by 
 the bier, for to them the girl's soul was hovering near, 
 and her body would need refreshment on its long 
 journey to the world beyond. Nahi (who was not 
 only a devoted friend of Faito, but a distant blood- 
 relation as well), seated herself beside the grave, and in 
 her soft Tahitian tongue, chanted stories of the dead 
 girl's life ; she sang of her innocent childhood, of her 
 deep affection for her parents ; of her loving, gentle 
 nature ; of her soft, tender beauty ; of her love for 
 the white iron-worker, and her voyage with him in 
 
THE FIRST TO DIE 191 
 
 the 'Bounty. And then the singer's soul seemed to 
 quicken, and her voice quivered and broke as she told 
 the story of Faito's death ; and from those who sat 
 around came quick, responsive sobs of grief. 
 
 When she ceased the v/omen took keen-edged sharks' 
 teeth, and thrust them into their arms and shoulders 
 till the blood poured forth, while the men covered their 
 faces with their hands, and bent their heads to the 
 ground. 
 
 For nearly an hour they sat thus, then in silence 
 the men rose and walked quietly away, leaving the 
 women to mourn by themselves, in accordance with 
 Tahitian custom, for two days beside the grave. 
 
 That nitjht Mahina, who was alone in the house 
 with her child, sought out Christian in his cave, 
 where he had been for the past two days, and told 
 him of Faito's death. 
 
 " Her troubles are over," was his moody answer. 
 " Would that I had the courage to leap over the cliffs 
 and so end mine. But why come and tell me this ? 
 It concerns me not." 
 
 " She was ever my friend," answered Mahina, 
 gently, " my friend and thine. I pray thee come 
 mourn with me at her burial, else will shame fall 
 upon me if thou art absent." 
 
 He raised his dark face to hers, and an angry gleam 
 shone in his eyes. " I tell thee, Mahina, thou dost 
 but pester me. The woman is dead. Would I were 
 in her place." 
 
 " Thou cruel man," she said, and the tears fell 
 quickly from her eyes as she pressed her child to 
 
192 THE MUTINEER 
 
 her bosom, " thou art always in this strange mood 
 now. Alas ! what evil has happened to thee and 
 me ? What wicked spirit has turned thy heart 
 against us ? Art thou tired of thy wife ? Is thy 
 child, born to thee out of my great love, hateful to 
 thy sight ? " Then the infant awoke, and she pressed 
 it to her aching breast to soothe its cries. 
 
 Christian sprang up from the matted couch upon 
 which he lay, and with the light of madness in his 
 eyes, cursed her, her child, and himself. " Go," he 
 said at last, hoarsely, " go, leave me to my misery." 
 
CHAPTER XXII 
 
 A LOYAL FRIEND 
 
 MAHINA went alone to the burial of her friend, 
 and the other women, when they saw her, 
 knew that her sorrow was not so much for the dead 
 girl as for the dead love of Christian. 
 
 Returning from her husband's cave, she met Edward 
 Young, who spoke so kindly that her overwrought 
 feelings brought a flood of tears, and Young, with a 
 strange look, had drawn her to him and bidden her 
 be of good courage. He would always be her friend, 
 he said, and it grieved him to see her sad. And 
 Mahina, drying her tears, pressed his hand gratefully, 
 and in her innocent fashion placed her cheek against 
 his for a moment ; for was he not her husband's friend 
 and brother, and therefore hers. And Edward Young, 
 as she walked away, watched her with a smile on his 
 lips, and muttered to himself — 
 
 " The man is a fool. She is a glorious creature, 
 and I — well I don't suppose he cares." 
 
 On the second morning, long ere the sun had dried 
 14 193 
 
194 THE MUTINEER 
 
 the glittering diamonds of dew trembling on every 
 leaf and blade of grass, Williams came across the 
 greensward towards his wife's grave and addressed 
 the mourning women. 
 
 " Come now," he said roughly. " Faito's had 
 enough of this foolery, and so have I. Put her in 
 the ground, and make an end of it." 
 
 Then Talalu and his countrymen stepped quietly 
 out from beneath the shade of a great tamanu tree 
 which stood near. They had brought their final 
 offerings to the dead, and as they placed these at 
 the foot of the grave, all the rest of the white men 
 but Christian appeared upon the scene. 
 
 At the harsh command of Williams, the women 
 huddled timidly together, looking fearfully at one 
 another ; and Talalu, leaving his countrymen, softly 
 besought the man to allow them to continue their 
 funeral customs, so that the spirit of Faito might rest 
 in peace. Mahina, too, joined in his pleadings. 
 
 To the brown-skinned people Williams had ever 
 been a cruel taskmaster for whom they worked with- 
 out murmuring for the sake of his wife, whom they 
 loved ; and now that she was dead he seemed to care 
 nothing, and would not even permit them to "com- 
 fort her spirit." 
 
 The remaining white men looked on in curious 
 silence, while Talalu and Mahina begged Williams 
 not to interrupt them. Williams had, however, 
 acquired a certain influence over his countrymen, 
 and they were not disposed to interfere. 
 
 Again the harsh voice of the man bade the 
 
A LOYAL FRIEND 195 
 
 mourners cease. " Let this folly end," he said 
 angrily in Tahitian ; " begone, and get back to 
 work." 
 
 The words stung Talalu to the quick, and with 
 flashing eyes and clenched hands he faced the white 
 man. 
 
 " Thou dog without a heart ! " he cried fiercely, 
 " may thy mother's skin be made into a water- 
 bottle ! Not content with our service and thy wife's 
 devotion, thou would'st harrow the soul of the dead 
 with thy harsh and cruel voice. Shame on thee for 
 a pitiless man ! Go home and leave us with the body 
 and the spirit of our kinswoman. She is nothing to 
 thee now. Thou canst not harm her body, but her 
 spirit is tormented by thy very presence here." 
 
 With a furious gesture Williams advanced towards 
 him, cursing him for an impudent slave, in the coarse 
 language he always used towards the Tahitians. 
 But quick as lightning Mahina intercepted him. 
 "Stop, thou low-born sailor," she said, "and leave 
 us, as Talalu hath desired thee, or it will go ill with 
 thee ! I swear by Oro and Tane and the bones of 
 my father to stab thee to the heart if thou dost but 
 even raise thy hand to Talalu." 
 
 Callous as the white men were, they drew back 
 and muttered to Williams to leave her and her fellow- 
 mourners alone ; and Williams himself blanched before 
 the slight figure of Christian's wife, and with a savage 
 threat of vengeance against Talalu, turned away, fol- 
 lowed by the rest of the mutineers except Young. 
 He, walking apart from them, seated himself on the 
 
196 THE MUTINEER 
 
 trunk of a fallen tree near by, called Alrema, and told 
 her to hasten to his house and bring his fowling-piece, 
 as he intended to shoot some sea-birds. 
 
 As soon as her graceful figure disappeared among 
 groves of breadfruit between the grassy sward and the 
 houses of the white men. Young walked over to where 
 Mahina sat, apart from the others. 
 
 " Dear friend of my heart," he said, taking her 
 hand, " thou knowest that I am thy friend, dost thou 
 not ? " 
 
 " Truly," said Mahina, " always my friend — my 
 friend and my brother, and the friend and brother 
 of my husband." 
 
 A disappointed look swept over Young's face, and 
 he dropped her hand moodily. " Nay, not so now. 
 It is always in my heart that he whom I once loved 
 as a brother hath acted cruelly to thee. Thou art a 
 woman fair and sweet, and to be for ever loved. And 
 because he hath neglected and turned his heart away 
 from thee and thy love hath my friendship for him 
 grown smaller and smaller day by day." 
 
 " By and by, when the evil moods have left him, he 
 will love me again," said Mahina, looking straight 
 before her, and as she spoke, the falling tears belied 
 her hopeful words. 
 
 For many minutes they sat thus, she weeping softly 
 to herself, and Young watching his opportunity to 
 speak again. Presently he saw Alrema returning with 
 his fowling-piece. He rose and touched Mahina 
 lightly on the shoulder. 
 
 " Farewell till to-morrow," he said in a low voice. 
 
f 
 
 A LOYAL FRIEND 197 
 
 " Remember that I am always, always thy friend — 
 and that I love thee — he no longer does." 
 
 She looked up with a low, startled cry, and hastily 
 rising from her seat, went over to the other women 
 and took her child from Terere. The tone of Young's 
 words had filled her with a strange feeling of misery 
 and fear. 
 
CHAPTER XXIII 
 
 THE OPPRESSOR 
 
 FOR some time nothing happened to disturb the 
 uneventful life of the islanders. Mahina, with 
 aching heart, saw Christian daily grow more melan- 
 choly and morose, and was heedless of all else. But 
 as the year drew to a close her saddened face and 
 sorrowful eyes must have touched her husband's heart, 
 and when the birth of her second child was drawing 
 near he left the cave and dwelt v/ith her till the infant 
 was born and she was strong again. 
 
 " Call him Charles," he said to her as she sat with 
 with him one evening nursing the infant ; and the 
 words, simple as they were, filled her still loving heart 
 with a great joy. Twice only had she met Young 
 since the day of Faito's burial, and though he had 
 tried to detain her, she managed to get away from 
 him ; for she now felt that he cared for her more than 
 his loyalty to Alrema justified. 
 
 During the same year others of the mutineers 
 
 became fathers. In addition to Mahina's two there 
 
 were now three other children playing upon the 
 
 198 
 
THE OPPRESSOR 199 
 
 matted floors of their parents' dwellings by day, and 
 lulled to sleep at night by the ceaseless throbbing 
 of the surf that beat against the stern cliffs of their 
 island home. 
 
 The houses occupied by Christian and Mahina, 
 Young and Alrema, and Smith and Terere were a 
 considerable distance from those of the other white 
 men. That of Christian was furthest north-west of 
 all ; indeed, it was quite shut out of view from the rest 
 by a short, abrupt spur which shot eastward from the 
 mountains almost to the verge of the beetling cliffs. 
 
 Williams and Young lived near to each other. 
 Some months after the burial of Faito the former 
 called upon his neighbour and asked him to come 
 outside for a few minutes. Alrema, who had noticed 
 that her husband and Williams were becoming very 
 intimate, gave the visitor an angry glance from her 
 dark, long-lashed eyes, as he sat upon the bench in 
 front of the house. 
 
 " Let's go for a bit of a walk," said Williams pre- 
 sently as Young joined him ; " I want to have a talk 
 with you over that little matter " ; and he laughed 
 coarsely, and by a gesture indicated his own dwelling. 
 
 Young nodded, and Alrema saw the two men 
 saunter off" together along the cliffs. She had always 
 disliked Williams, and thought he was in some way 
 responsible for her husband's manner to herself, which 
 had so altered of late. Passionately fond of, and 
 fiercely jealous of him, her quick perception of the 
 change in his conduct filled her with a vague, un- 
 defined alarm ; and although as yet she did not doubt 
 
200 THE MUTINEER 
 
 his loyalty, she had seen how his face brightened 
 visibly whenever Mahina and her child came to visit 
 them. Of Mahina herself she had no misgivings ; 
 but it seemed strange that whereas in former days she 
 had always accompanied Young to Christian's house, 
 he now frequently went there alone, although she had 
 told him that Christian was in his cave. Mahina, too, 
 seemed different, and her face wore a troubled, nervous 
 look which her friend could not understand. 
 
 After the birth of his second child Christian re- 
 mained, for a time, constantly with his beautiful 
 wife, whose face grew radiant with happiness. But 
 soon his brooding mood returned to him in all its 
 former force, and he resumed his lonely walks along 
 the cliffs and spent his nights alone in his mountain 
 cave. Mahina, Alrema knew, had long since resigned 
 herself to her husband's fits of gloom, yet now she 
 appeared more than ever a prey to melancholy. In 
 some way Williams seemed to be connected with this, 
 and Alrema noticed that whenever Young went to 
 Christian's house Williams had preceded him there. 
 
 Taking up her infant daughter in her arms, Alrema 
 went outside and sat down under the shade of a bread- 
 fruit tree to wait her husband's return. For nearly an 
 hour she amused herself playing with the child, till, 
 overpowered by the soft, languorous morning air, she, 
 pillowing her head upon a rolled-up mat, slept. 
 
 The sun was high when she was awakened by 
 hearing voices near. She at once recognised Williams* 
 harsh, and her husband's cool, quiet tones. As they 
 talked they were passing through the breadfruit grove 
 
THE OPPRESSOR 201 
 
 and stopped quite close to where she lay. Williams 
 was speaking. 
 
 " Well, that's understood. You stand by me and 
 I'll stand by you. I'm going to get the woman I 
 want if I have to shoot every damned red-skinned 
 savage on the island to get her." 
 
 " I'm not going in for anything like that," she 
 heard her husband reply ; " I am quite content to 
 wait till " 
 
 "Till that lunatic jumps over the cliffs and leaves 
 a widow for you," said Williams, with a coarse laugh. 
 " Well, you've got more patience than me. If I 
 wanted her I'd make just as short a job of him as I 
 mean to make of this Talalu. Anyway, I'm going 
 to set you a good example by taking another wife. 
 Man alive ! what are you afraid of ? She'll be willing 
 enough before long to come to you. She ain't the 
 kind of woman to stay by herself while her husband 
 leaves her to live in a cave. I daresay," he added, 
 with another rude laugh, " that Alrema would lend 
 you a hand to talk her over. That's what I'd have 
 made Faito do." 
 
 An angry exclamation of dissent from Young, and 
 Alrema heard him leave his companion and go towards 
 the house. Then, her brain reeling with dreadful 
 suspicions of the man she loved and the friend she 
 trusted, she took up her sleeping infant and followed 
 him. 
 
 Williams, with a wicked look upon his evil face, 
 strode away towards his own dwelling. He had 
 managed to secure one of the best and most fertile 
 
202 THE MUTINEER 
 
 portions of the nine lots into which the island was 
 divided, and by his domineering conduct succeeded in 
 making the islanders perform more labour in its culti- 
 vation than they expended upon any other of the 
 mutineers' land. As he drew near his plantation he 
 saw the gigantic figure of Talalu and the slender, 
 graceful form of Nahi, his gentle wife, moving about 
 in the garden. They were building a low wall of 
 coral stones to enclose the plantation, and Williams' 
 eyes gleamed savagely as he saw Nahi, who had just 
 placed a stone in position, look up at her husband's 
 face with a smile, to which Talalu responded with an 
 endearing expression and a loving caress. 
 
 The white man stood for a while watching them. 
 The woman's lithe, supple figure, her bared bosom 
 and long mantle of black hair falling over her rounded 
 shoulders fascinated and yet irritated his savage, sensuous 
 nature. " That fellow, that cursed, great hulking 
 brute to possess such a woman ! And he only a 
 slave ! " He watched her white teeth gleam, as her 
 lips parted in an admiring smile, when Talalu, raising 
 a huge, jagged stone in his brawny arms, placed it 
 lightly upon the smaller one her slender hands had lifted. 
 
 Williams sat and waited. He knew that at noon- 
 time they would cease working for an hour to rest 
 and wait upon him while he ate his mid-day meal. 
 And then he meant to act. 
 
 Presently, Talalu, glancing up at the sun, spoke to 
 Nahi. They ceased their labours, and walked towards 
 their own little dwelling of thatch. Outside stood a 
 hollowed tree trunk filled with water. Then Williams 
 
THE OPPRESSOR 203 
 
 saw Nahi, dropping the garment of tappa-cloth which 
 encircled her waist, deftly replace it by a girdle of 
 leaves, then her husband talcing a cocoanut shell, 
 dipped it into the water and poured it over her 
 shoulders again and again to wash away the dust 
 which stained her clear, bronzed skin. Nude to the 
 hips, her lissome figure glinted and shone like a 
 polished statue of metal in the bright morning sun, as 
 the water ran down over her back, bosom, and legs, 
 while her shapely arms were raised as she held up her 
 glossy mantle of hair. Her bath finished, she took 
 the coconut shell from her husband's hand and 
 motioned him to stoop ; but Talalu, with gentle, 
 jesting rudeness, pushed her away, and filling the 
 shell poured stream after stream of the cooling water 
 over his own body. 
 
 " That's the last time you'll ever do that for her," 
 said Williams to himself, as his lustful eyes revelled in 
 the beauty of the girl's figure. He got up, went 
 inside and threw himself upon his couch. They 
 would be in presently, he knew, to bring him his 
 dinner of yams, fish, and birds' eggs. 
 
 Nahi came first. In one hand she carried a platter 
 of woven coconut leaves, upon which were a baked 
 fish and some roasted breadfruit, in the other a young 
 drinking coconut. Outside, Talalu, thrusting a pointed 
 stake into the ground, began to husk some more nuts 
 for the white man to drink. 
 
 " Haeri niai " (" Come here "), his master called. 
 
 The Tahitian's huge figure stood in the doorway, 
 holding a half-husked coconut in his hand. 
 
204 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " You needn't do any work to-day, Talalu," said 
 Williams, with a growl of apparent good nature. 
 " Tetihiti and Nihu are going out fishing for Kawin- 
 tali (Quintal). You may go with them. Nahi can 
 stay. Malama (Quintal's wife) will be here soon 
 with her husband, and she can help Nahi to work 
 upon the mat she is making for the floor." 
 
 " Good," answered the unsuspecting Tahitian, with 
 a pleased smile ; " 'tis well, oh Iron-worker, that the 
 mat be soon finished. Then will Nahi and I carry 
 up many baskets of fine pebbles, so that the mat may 
 rest flat and even on the ground." 
 
 '' May you be lucky in your fishing," called Nahi, 
 as her husband, a minute later, passed the door, carry- 
 ing his basket of fishing tackle. Then, the white 
 man's meal being in readiness, she took up a fan and 
 stood by him while he ate. 
 
 For some minutes he ate his food in silence, then 
 motioned to the woman to come nearer. She obeyed 
 him with a timid glance, and a slight tremor quivered 
 her bare shoulders for a moment. 
 
 Suddenly Williams pushed his stool back from the 
 table. Fixing his eyes on Nahi's expectant face, he 
 said to her in English — 
 
 " Nahi, my girl, I've always had a fancy for you, 
 and I want you. You're going to be my new wife." 
 
 With a look of wild terror she shrank back, her 
 hands covering her face. The next instant the man 
 seized her by the wrists. 
 
 " Come, now, none of that, Nahi ! I'm going to 
 have you for my wife, so don't be a fool." 
 
THE OPPRESSOR 205 
 
 " Let me go," she pleaded in Tahitian ; " how can 
 I be wife to thee ? Am I not wife to Talalu ? 'Tis 
 but a poor jest to so frighten a weak woman." 
 
 He laughed fiercely. " 'Tis no jest. Thou art 
 my desire and I will have thee. As for thy hus- 
 band " he made a contemptuous gesture. 
 
 The woman's eyes blazed. She tore her hands from 
 his grasp and faced him. "Thou coward ! He is 
 better than thou art. He is of chief's blood — thou 
 but a slave in thine own land," and with a sudden 
 spring she bounded through the open doorway and 
 ran swiftly in the direction of the other white men's 
 houses. 
 
 With panting bosom and gasping breath she reached 
 Christian's house and darted inside. Mahina was 
 seated on the matted floor crooning to her youngest 
 child ; Christian, as usual, was away at his cave. 
 
 Shaking with fear and anger, Nahi, generally so 
 calm and gentle, flung herself at Mahina's feet and 
 wept. 
 
 " What is this, friend of my heart ? " asked Mahina, 
 laying her infant down and drawing the girl's head 
 upon her lap. She listened in grave silence until Nahi 
 had finished her story, which ended in an earnest 
 appeal. " Kirisiani," she said, " was strong and power- 
 ful, and none of the white men dared face his anger. 
 Surely he would not let the Iron-worker do this 
 wrong." 
 
 " The white men, I fear, care little what becomes 
 of us of Tahiti now," said Mahina sadly ; " yet will 
 we go to my husband and tell him thy trouble. Still 
 
2o6 THE MUTINEER 
 
 do I fear that he will not heed thee ; and then indeed 
 must thou go to the Iron-worker." 
 
 Nahi wept silently ; when she ceased Mahina 
 sought to comfort her, telling her that if the Iron- 
 worker succeeded in taking her away from Talalu it 
 would not be her fault — she would but yield to circum- 
 stances. 
 
 The woman turned her tear-stained face to Mahina 
 in open wonder. 
 
 " What ! Hast thou no other words of comfort for 
 me than these ? Put thyself in my place. How can 
 I do this wrong to the man I love — he who hath 
 toiled and fought for me ? Wouldst thou so wrong 
 thy husband as to listen to words of love from another 
 man ? " 
 
 " My husband ! " — Mahina laughed bitterly. 
 " Little does he care if other men speak words of love 
 to me. His heart is dead, and I am but a leaf in his 
 path." 
 
 " Nay," said Nahi gently, placing her hands on her 
 friend's shoulder, " thy Kirisiani hath still a true heart 
 for thee. He is not as these low-blooded dogs of 
 sailors. He is an arii (a chief) of the same blood as 
 Tuti ; and the sailors fear him. Come then, dear 
 friend, and join thy voice with mine, so that he may 
 save me from the Iron-worker, whom I hate and fear." 
 
 " We will go, Nahi. Yet hope for nothing. 
 Kirisiani's love for us, which was once so strong and 
 hot, has grown cold. For me, who would give my life 
 for his, he cares naught. But a little while ago, when 
 my babe was born, he was kind to me and sat by my 
 
THE OPPRESSOR 207 
 
 side here when the sun sank in the sea, and let his 
 hand rest in mine." Her soft voice trembled in 
 mournful pathos. "But again the black thoughts 
 came to him, and he left me to return to his cave. 
 He careth for me no longer. Yet will we go and 
 pray him to protect thee from this evil man." 
 
 In an hour the two women reached Christian's 
 cave at the furthest extremity of the island. It 
 opened from a high ridge of black, jagged, and 
 almost inaccessible rocks. Near by was a tiny cas- 
 cade, leaping noisily from ledge to ledge as it coursed 
 towards the valley. 
 
 From its situation the cave commanded an extensive 
 view of the horizon round the whole island, and its 
 occupant would see a sail long before any one else on 
 Pitcairn could discern it. Approach was so difficult 
 that, even if a large party succeeded in crossing the 
 dizzy, narrow ledge of rocks connecting it with the 
 mountain spur beneath. Christian could have shot 
 every one of them before they were within a hundred 
 feet of his refuge. 
 
 As they passed through the little settlement on 
 their mission, the two women called at the other 
 houses, and told the story of Williams' design. Just 
 as they reached the ridge they heard some one follow- 
 ing them, and looking back saw the stalwart figure of 
 Smith, who had come to help them in gaining 
 Christian's assistance. Behind him came Young. 
 
 As the sound of their voices ascended to the heights, 
 they saw Christian emerge from the cave. He was 
 dressed in shirt and trousers only, and his long black 
 
2o8 THE MUTINEER 
 
 hair hung, loose and neglected, about his shoulders. 
 For a few moments he regarded them without speak- 
 ing ; then as Mahina in a timid voice said they desired 
 to talk to him, he descended the ridge to meet them. 
 
 "Why is this ?" he asked sullenly, with an angry 
 look at each in turn ; " am I to have no peace, no 
 rest ? Can I not live alone ? " 
 
 Smith's honest, open face flushed deeply, but he 
 said nothing ; the women should speak first, he 
 thought, then he would try. 
 
 Nahi, in a trembling voice, told her story, and 
 sobbingly besought his help, and Mahina joined her 
 in her earnest entreaties. 
 
 He heard them through in moody silence, and 
 turned to Smith. " From the time of our landing 
 here, on this cursed rock, I have avoided all inter- 
 ference with any of you. You have made slaves of 
 these Tahitians, who are better than any white man on 
 the island except yourself and Young. If they 
 retaliate upon you, it will be your own faults. I 
 don't say that you and Young are like the rest ; but 
 yet you have permitted those scoundrels, McCoy, 
 Quintal, Mills, and Williams to oppress these unfor- 
 tunate people. Still, I will make one more effort for 
 the common good, and try to dissuade this ruffian 
 from stealing Talalu's wife." 
 
 "Well spoken, Mr. Christian," said Smith. "By 
 God ! sir, I'll not see Talalu wronged in this fashion if 
 you'll help me ; and I dare swear Mr. Young will 
 join us in clapping a stopper on his game." 
 
 Accompanied by Nahi and Mahina, the three men 
 
THE OPPRESSOR 209 
 
 returned to the settlement. As they walked, Young 
 tried to speak to Mahina in a whisper, but with a 
 nervous look she quickened her pace and caught up to 
 her husband, who was in advance of them all. 
 
 15 
 
CHAPTER XXIV 
 
 THE QUARREL 
 
 WHEN they reached the settlement, they found 
 nearly all the little community assembled 
 outside the large storehouse. 
 
 Williams himself was not among them, neither was 
 Talalu ; but Lunalio, a Raiatean girl, the wife of 
 Martin, whispered to Nahi that he was coming. A 
 look of joy overspread Nahi's face. She knew 
 Williams' savage disposition and feared that Talalu 
 had met with some treachery as he returned with his 
 companions from fishing. And, indeed, Williams, 
 with a loaded musket in his hand, had taken up his 
 position behind a rock on the path leading up from 
 the cliffs, intending to shoot the unsuspecting man as 
 he ascended. But it so happened that Talalu, instead 
 of taking the mountain track, came with his com- 
 panions along the wider and more frequented path 
 leading directly to the storehouse ; and the white 
 man, hiding his musket among the rocks, had waited 
 till the natives were out of sight, and then followed 
 them. A quarter of an hour later he sauntered coolly 
 
THE QUARREL 211 
 
 towards the assembled people, and the babble of excited 
 tongues told him that the Tahitians were discuss- 
 ing with the whites his intention to appropriate 
 Nahi. 
 
 A dead silence ensued the moment he made his 
 appearance. Standing in front of the storehouse 
 were the white men, most of them armed with 
 muskets and cutlasses. Whether they were for or 
 against him Williams could not for the moment tell, 
 but he had no doubt of the feelings of the islanders, 
 whose dark eyes blazed with hatred. A little apart 
 from the rest of them stood Talalu, in his hand a 
 keen-edged turtle-spear, and with a look of suppressed 
 fury upon his face. 
 
 Squaring his shoulders, and placing his hands jauntily 
 upon his hips, Williams bade the white men a mocking 
 good-day. 
 
 " Quite a little gathering, I see. Ain't I got an 
 invitation, or didn't you think my company good 
 enough ? Are you talking about me ? " and he shot a 
 fierce glance at Fletcher Christian, who regarded him 
 with unmoved features. 
 
 "We are talking about you, Williams," said 
 Christian quietly, stepping out from the other white 
 men. "What are you trying to do with this man's 
 wife ? For the peace of our little community — for 
 God's sake — think before you go further." 
 
 " That's all very fine, Mr. Christian," he answered 
 rudely, " but 'tis hard if I can't do as I choose with 
 my own." 
 
 Christian looked at him contemptuously. " Your 
 
212 THE MUTINEER 
 
 own ! What right have you to speak of this woman 
 Nahi as yours ? " 
 
 " Who are you to question my right ? You are 
 not an officer of the 'Bounty now." 
 
 Christian's face paled at the insulting words, but he 
 restrained himself. 
 
 " I do not ask you as a right, Williams, but as a 
 favour, not to attempt this thing. I am sure every 
 man but yourself sees that you will rue it if you do." 
 
 "That is what I told him long ago," broke in 
 Quintal, who, rude and overbearing as he was in some 
 respects to the Tahitians, was never tyrannical, and 
 often tried to check Williams' brutality. 
 
 "I am glad to hear you say this. Quintal," said 
 Christian. " Williams does not seem to know what 
 it is he contemplates." His eye fell upon the stalwart 
 figure of Talalu, who with gleaming eyes and clenched 
 hands was looking at the persecutor of his wife. 
 
 " Come here, Talalu," said Christian. 
 
 The islander looked at him for a moment ; then 
 thrusting the barbed point of his turtle-spear into the 
 ground, he walked slowly over to the white man. 
 
 " What is it thou wouldst say to me, Kirisiani ? " 
 he asked in deep, guttural tones, which quivered with 
 passion. 
 
 "This," and Fletcher Christian's voice rang out 
 loud and clear, as he pointed contemptuously to 
 Williams — " this do I say. This Williams the Iron- 
 worker is but a poor, uncultured slave, who knows 
 naught that is good, and the evil in his heart hath 
 killed all knowledge of what is right and just. I pray 
 
THE QUARREL 213 
 
 thee have patience with him, and we will try to teach 
 him better." 
 
 " What the hell do you mean ? " asked Wiliams 
 savagely, who understood Tahitian sufficiently well to 
 know what Christian had said. " What sort of talk 
 is this ? Do you mean to tell this cursed, naked 
 savage that he is a better man than I am ? " 
 
 " Better than you ! By heavens, you ruffian, you 
 are a thousand times more of a savaffe than he ? And 
 I, who am to blame for bringing such men as him 
 from their homes and exposing them to the danger of 
 contact with such sweepings of the hulks as you are, 
 will take care you do him or his countrymen no more 
 wrong than you have done already." 
 
 " No, no, Mr. Christian, don't talk like that," said 
 Brown. " Williams is as good a man as any of us, 
 and I don't see why you should aggravate him by such 
 words." 
 
 " Damn such talk, I say," said Mills insolently, 
 walking apart from the others and standing beside 
 Williams, "if the man wants the woman, let him 
 have her. He ain't got a wife, and you can't expect 
 a white man to go without one when one can be had 
 for the taking." 
 
 Talalu turned upon him. " I will kill him or any 
 other man who tries to take my wife from me," he 
 muttered with set lips. 
 
 "None of that, my fine fellow," said Brown in 
 English. " Take care what you say about killing 
 people. You will find that we can do some killing if 
 we are put to it." 
 
214 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Williams looked at Christian with rage and hatred 
 in his face. " What do you think of it now, Mr. 
 Christian ? Am I to do as I like and as my ship- 
 mates want me to, or are you going to join with these 
 damned savages and try to stop me ? " 
 
 " I'll tell you plainly what I will do, Williams. I 
 will protect these people at the hazard of my life ; and 
 though I stand alone I will prevent this outrage, even 
 if I fight the whole lot of you." 
 
 " He is mad to say this," whispered Edward Young 
 to Mahina, as he pressed her hand, " but," and he gave 
 her a meaning look, "for your sake, Mahina, I will 
 stand by him." Then he stepped out and stood beside 
 her husband, and said — 
 
 " You'll not stand alone, Mr. Christian, while I am 
 here. While I don't altogether agree with you, I 
 don't believe in Williams taking the woman against 
 her will. Let us come to some arrangement about 
 her." 
 
 "I, too, am with you, sir! " cried Smith. 
 
 "And I ! " "And I! " echoed Quintal and McCoy. 
 
 " Thank you, my lads," said Christian ; " I knew 
 there were some among us with a sense of justice." 
 
 Williams looked at the four men one after another 
 and folded his brawny arms across his tattooed chest. 
 
 " All right," he sneered ; " there's not going to be 
 any fighting over this. But you can make certain of 
 one thing. If you won't give me my own way in 
 this matter you may go to hell, the whole lot of you, 
 before I'll sweat at the bounty's forge making tools 
 for these cursed savages to till your ground. And yet, 
 
THE QUARREL 215 
 
 by God ! rU get my own way all the same in the 
 end ! " 
 
 Then he walked away towards his house. 
 
 " Trouble will come of this, mark my words, Mr. 
 Christian," said Brown. "'Tis a pity you should in- 
 interfere with the man. You'll find he'll have the 
 woman in spite of you, never fear." 
 
 "Then his life will pay the penalty," answered 
 Christian fiercely. " You do not seem to understand, 
 Brown, that while a single girl may be taken by force 
 sometimes the marriage-tie among the Tahitians is 
 held as sacred as among civilised people. But I think 
 Talalu will take care of his wife, and there are three 
 or four men who will help him to do so." 
 
 Then, with a few words of farewell to the islanders 
 who thronged around him with protestations of grati- 
 tude, he turned quickly away with Mahina by his 
 side. 
 
 Before they had gone a hundred yards they heard 
 some one running after them, and Nahi, flinging her- 
 self on the ground before Christian, clasped her arms 
 around his knees and kissed his feet, wetting them 
 with tears of gratitude. 
 
 That night Williams cooked and ate his supper 
 alone, for Talalu and Nahi had taken shelter in the 
 house of Tairoa-Maina, the Tubuaian chief. 
 
CHAPTER XXV 
 
 THE REVOLT OF TALALU 
 
 FOR three days nothing happened. The people 
 of Pitcairn, white and brown, went about their 
 daily occupations as usual, but there was a suppressed 
 excitement and an ominous calmness that augured ill 
 for the future, and the rift between the two parties — 
 those who sided with Christian, and those who sup- 
 ported Williams — widened slowly but surely. 
 
 Ever since the day of the quarrel the islanders had 
 been sulky and suspicious in their manner to all the 
 white men except Christian and Smith. Young, 
 although openly declared as Christian's taio or friend, 
 they regarded with distrust, even though Alrema, 
 doubtful as she was beginning to feel of her husband's 
 loyalty to herself, strove to persuade them of his good- 
 will towards them. 
 
 To them Christian had always been a fair and j ust 
 
 man, refusing to recognise any distinction between 
 
 them and his white comrades. They would have 
 
 fought for and followed him to the death had occasion 
 
 arisen for the sacrifice. 
 
 Tairoa-Maina and the other Tubuaians, being un- 
 216 
 
THE REVOLT OF TALALU 217 
 
 married, lived by themselves in a separate house, and 
 thither went Talalu and his gentle wife for refuge for 
 the time being from the savage Williams. Fearing to 
 remain much longer near his former master, Talalu 
 determined to build himself a new house among the 
 mountains in a secluded little valley about half a mile 
 lower down than Christian's cave. Every morning, 
 axe on shoulder, accompanied by Nahi, he set out to 
 work. 
 
 " I will live like Kirisiani," he said, when his 
 countrymen asked him why he desired to leave them ; 
 " even as he lives so will I. These white men are bad 
 masters ; no longer will I work for them like a slave." 
 
 On the fourth morning after the quarrel, Williams 
 rose from his bunk and began to make preparations 
 for his breakfast. The fertility of the island was such 
 that this gave him little labour. In his house were 
 supplies of breadfruit, yams, and bananas, and overhead 
 on the cross-beams hung strings of dried fish. In 
 addition to these he had his share of the stores from 
 the ^Bounty^ such as wine, biscuit, rice, and salted pork, 
 but his extravagance had left him but little of the meat, 
 and he uttered a savage curse when on lifting the little 
 two-gallon wine keg he found it empty. To procure 
 more meant a walk to the storehouse, some distance 
 away ; and before he could get the wine he would have 
 to ask Quintal, who, by common consent, was in 
 charge of all the stores that remained. He had always 
 been accustomed to drink wine with his food, and the 
 loss of it annoyed him. 
 
 " If that cursed Talalu had been here," he thought. 
 
2i8 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " this wouldn't have happened. What right had the 
 fellow to clear out, and take his wife with him too ? 
 And the breadfruit and yams were cold. If Nahi were 
 here they would have been heated for him. Curse 
 them both, the damned copper-hided savages." 
 
 As he ate he worked himself into a state of savage 
 fury. What right had that fellow to have such a hand- 
 some woman as Nahi for his wife ? If he were out 
 of the way she wouldn't make such a fuss ; would no 
 doubt be proud to become the wife of a white man. 
 Damn that fine-talking fellow, Christian ! Only for 
 him the thing would have been done. Brown and 
 Mills would have stood by if Talalu made a noise 
 about his wife being taken. By God ! he'd stand it 
 no longer. He'd bring the pair of them back to 
 work at once. 
 
 His eye caught his musket, hanging on brackets 
 over his bunk. He took it down, loaded it, and then 
 walked rapidly away in the direction of the house 
 occupied by Talalu and his wife. 
 
 With murder in his heart he reached the dwelling 
 of Tairoa-Maina. Neither the chief nor his two 
 countrymen were visible, but Talalu and Nahi were 
 at work in the garden at the back. They were digging 
 yams, and the white man watched them in sullen 
 silence for a few minutes. Every movement of the 
 woman's graceful figure angered him against her hus- 
 band. What was he ? A slave ; a cursed savage. A 
 man who had no right to possess a beautiful wife. He 
 w^ould not only have the woman, but make the man 
 work for him as well. 
 
THE REVOLT OF TALALU 219 
 
 Creeping along the wall of coral stones that en- 
 closed the garden, he reached a spot not twenty yards 
 from them. Then he stood up and covered the man 
 with his musket. 
 
 " Come back with me, you two," he called fiercely, 
 in Tahitian ; " if you don't come outside at once, I'll 
 kill the pair of you." 
 
 Nahi, with heart full of love, threw herself before 
 her husband, but Talalu said something to her in 
 a low voice, and she turned and faced the white 
 man. 
 
 " Even as thou wilt, master," replied Talalu quietly, 
 and taking Nahi's hand he came outside the wall. 
 
 With his gun over his shoulder the white man 
 followed them, triumphantly smiling to himself at 
 this proof of his power of command. 
 
 Very quietly they walked before him, till they 
 reached his house, then entered it, and Nahi seated 
 herself upon the matted floor. 
 
 Williams stood in the doorway for a moment, 
 regarding them with a smile of victory. He intended 
 to let them feel their position at once. 
 
 "I've a damned good mind to give you a lacing. 
 Mister Talalu," he said in English, " but I'll put it 
 off for a bit and give you another chance. But I 
 want something to eat. You, Nahi, go to Kawintali 
 and ask him for some rice and wine and salted meat ; 
 and you, Talalu " 
 
 He never spoke again. The Tahitian sprang upon 
 him like a tiger, seized his throat with both hands, and 
 squeezing his windpipe, forced him to the ground. 
 
220 THE MUTINEER 
 
 For a minute they struggled fiercely, but the white 
 man, though strong and active, was but as a child in 
 the giant's grasp. They swayed to and fro a little, 
 and then Williams lay upon the ground with the 
 brown man's knee upon his chest, making feeble 
 efforts to free himself from the grasp of death. 
 
 Presently he ceased to struggle, and was only con- 
 scious enough to know that all hope was gone and 
 his time was come. One glance from his bloodshot 
 eyes into the death-dealing face of the man above him 
 told him that. 
 
 For a little while the Tahitian relaxed his hold. 
 Beside him, her eyes dilated with triumphant hatred, 
 Nahi bent over the prostrate figure, all the bitterness 
 of the past reflected in her dark face. She had watched 
 the struggle with a sense of victory. Who in the old 
 days at Matavai could vie with Talalu in wrestling ? 
 And when she saw the huge form of her husband bear 
 the slighter figure of their joint oppressor to the earth, 
 she laughed. 
 
 With the foam of the agony of death flecking his 
 lips, and breathing in awful, fitful gasps, Williams lay 
 before them, one hand of Talalu still gripping his 
 throat. The musket lay upon the floor beside the 
 men. WiUiams had carried it at full cock, and the 
 priming had been spilt when he dropped it to meet 
 the onslaught of Talalu. 
 
 Still keeping his hand upon the sailor's throat Talalu 
 turned to his wife. 
 
 " Take thou the powder horn and prime the gun," 
 he said. 
 
THE REVOLT OF TALALU 221 
 
 She took the horn from the peg upon which it hung 
 and did as he told her. 
 
 " Now put the end of the gun to this dog's 
 temple." 
 
 She dropped upon one knee and pressed the muzzle 
 of the gun to Williams's dark forehead. 
 
 " Now pull the little piece of iron," said Talalu, 
 "and let his black soul depart unto the land of evil 
 spirits." 
 
 There was a flash and the heavy musket-ball dashed 
 out the wretched man's brains, ploughed through the 
 matted floor, and scattered the coral pebbles in a white 
 shower against the furthest side of the house. Then 
 Talalu, with bloodied right hand, rose to his feet and 
 stood regarding the body of his enemy. 
 
 Picking up the lifeless form of Williams, the Tahi- 
 tian motioned to his wife to follow, and walked 
 towards the clifi^s to the same place where, a few 
 months before, he had seen the wife of the dead 
 man fall. 
 
 Standing on the jagged cliff edge, he looked down. 
 Far below him lay the rough, pebbly beach upon which 
 Faito had fallen and dyed the stones with her blood. 
 Then he raised the white man high in his mighty arms 
 and cast him over with a bitter curse. 
 
 "Lie there, thou who slew thy wife with cruel 
 words, and would have stolen mine," he cried, as he 
 dashed the body upon the stones. 
 
 He looked down a while longer at his dead enemy, 
 and then, taking Nahi's hand in his own, turned 
 homewards. 
 
CHAPTER XXVI 
 
 NAHI S MESSAGE 
 
 THE report of the gun which killed Talalu's 
 oppressor was heard by all who happened to be 
 in their houses at the time. Each thought it was but 
 a shot fired at some ocean bird winging its way sea- 
 ward from one of the many islands rookeries, and no 
 one imagined that it was the beginning of a fatal 
 and bloody epoch in the history of their island 
 home. 
 
 But Talalu, as he returned with his wife by his 
 side, knew that his deed would bring forth great 
 things in the near future, and set himself to prepare 
 for whatever might happen. 
 
 Half-way between the cliffs and his own dwelling, 
 he stopped and spoke to Nahi. 
 
 " Hasten, oh pearl of my heart, to the houses of 
 all our countrymen and to that of Tairoa-Maina the 
 Tubuaian, and bid them come to me. And this shalt 
 thou say to them : * Talalu sendeth greeting and saith 
 that " The sun hath risen a bloody red ; and the white 
 men will seek for revenge for what hath been done." 
 
NAHI'S MESSAGE 223 
 
 Talalu saith also "The liand to the club, for death 
 Cometh swiftly and suddenly to men unprepared."'" 
 
 " Oh husband with the strong hand and brave 
 heart, why should'st thou fear ? The white men are 
 just, and will not harm thee for killing the Iron-worker, 
 that man of evil heart and cruel will. If I give 
 this message of thine, will not they think that all the 
 men of our race are plotting to slay them P " 
 
 The giaiit Tahitian placed his bloodstained hand 
 upon his wife's shoulder. " Do as I bid thee. I 
 tell thee the white men will not forgive me the death 
 of the Iron-worker. And it is well that we be 
 prepared for their wrath." 
 
 " Nay," pleaded Nahi, "surely Kirisiani and Etuati 
 and Simetii are our friends." 
 
 "It may be so," answered Talalu bitterly. "Who 
 can tell ? Hast thou not seen that they have no faith 
 in each other ? Dost thou not know that Etuati, 
 whom I once thought the true taio of Kirisiani, 
 hath spoken words of love to Mahina his wife ? " 
 
 " That is but the custom of our country." 2 
 
 Talalu interrupted — " Thou dost not know, Nahi, 
 that this our custom of taio is held in abhorrence by 
 men of chiefs rank and blood in Peretane, such as 
 Etuati and Kirisiani. Often hath Kirisiani told me, 
 when speaking of the customs of white men, that for 
 a man to cast the eye of desire upon the wife of his 
 friend is counted shame." 
 
 » Smith. 
 
 - Of the privileges extended by the Tahitian female to the taio or 
 sworn friend of the husband or male relative the less said the better. 
 
224 THE MUTINEER 
 
 She bent her head in mute obedience to her husband's 
 will. Surely Talalu her husband, who was for ever 
 talking to the white men of the customs of their 
 country, knew what was right. 
 
 So she sped quickly away, first to the house of 
 I Tairoa-Maina, and there told the Tubuaians of 
 
 Williams' death and gave her husband's message. 
 
 Without waiting to be questioned, she added — 
 " And see, oh men of Tubuai, that ye bring with ye 
 guns and powder and lead ; for even as my husband 
 sayeth the sun hath risen a bloody red." 
 
 Then leaving the wondering and excited Tu- 
 buaians she went to the hut of the Tahitians and gave 
 the same warning. As she passed from house to house 
 the wives of the white men saw her and sought to 
 question her, but she evaded them and disappeared 
 among the boscage of the mountain forest towards the 
 dwelling of Mahina and her husband. 
 
 Through the open doorway of the house she saw 
 the figures of Alrema and Mahina. They were 
 seated together preparing their morning meal, and 
 Christian's two children played beside them. 
 
 Panting with excitement, Nahi threw herself upon 
 the couch at the further end of the room and asked 
 for a drink. Alrema opened a young coconut and 
 and brought it to her. 
 
 " Why dost thou breathe so hard, my friend ? " 
 she said with a laugh. " Drink and then come eat 
 with us." 
 
 Nahi drank, but refused to eat. " 'Tis well that I 
 have met thee here, Alrema." 
 
NAHI'S MESSAGE 225 
 
 Something in her face made them rise quickly and 
 asked what brought her. 
 
 She laughed nervously. " Listen thou, Alrema, wife 
 of Etuati, and thou Mahina, wife of Kirisiani the 
 chief. My husband hath slain the Iron-worker." 
 
 Mahina, with a cry of fear, clasped her infant in 
 her arms. 
 
 "Aye, he slew him with his own gun, because he 
 sought to take me. And when the fire leapt from 
 the mouth of the gun, and the lead dashed out his 
 brains, Talalu took up his body and carried it upon 
 his shoulders to the cliffs and cast it upon the stones 
 where Faito died. And this message hath my 
 husband sent to the men of Tahiti and Tubuai 
 * The sun hath risen a bloody red ; be prepared.' " 
 
 The two others exchanged a quick responsive 
 glance of alarm, but Nahi, excited as she was, did 
 not notice it. 
 
 " But thou must not tell Tahinia, nor Malama, nor 
 Lunalio, nor any of the women who have white 
 husbands. Even of thee, friends of my heart, was I 
 frightened, but I remembered that thy husbands have 
 ever been of kind hearts to us of Tahiti. Did not 
 thine, Alrema, and thine, Mahina, and the husband of 
 Terere seek to save me from the dog whom my 
 husband hath slain ? And for that shall no harm 
 come to them or to thee." 
 
 Mahina, with a terrified glance at the exultant face 
 
 of Nahi, turned appealingly to Alrema. What should 
 
 she do to warn Christian ? He was in his cave. 
 
 Perhaps in his lonely morning walk along the cliffs he 
 
 16 
 
226 THE MUTINEER 
 
 might meet some of her countrymen who, never 
 thinking of all that he had done for their welfare, 
 might shoot or spear him. 
 
 Fearful for their husbands, Mahina and Alrema saw 
 the lithe figure of Nahi glide away into the darkness 
 from Christain's lonely dwelling. Despite the know- 
 ledge that Young was wavering in his loyalty to her, 
 his wife still loved him passionately, and never felt 
 anything but friendship for Mahina ; so, urging her to 
 go to Christian and warn him of the impending 
 trouble, she set out in search of Young, who had 
 gone fishing for the night. And Mahina, leading 
 one child by the hand and pressing the other to her 
 bosom, walked quickly along the rocky path towards 
 the cave. 
 
 A strange silence already seemed to deaden the clear 
 morning air. Soon after the first rosy flush of dawn 
 had changed the grey of the wooded mountain sides to a 
 living green, Matthew Quintal, gun in hand, came 
 along the path from his house towards the cliffs, 
 wondering why he had met none of the brown men 
 on their way to their work in the white men's 
 gardens. He was going towards a great toa tree 
 which grew in a little valley near Martin's house, 
 where at early morning many frigate birds roosted, 
 for he had promised Malama to shoot some for her, 
 and wanted Isaac Martin to join him. 
 
 But ere he came in sight of the shipmate's house 
 Martin met him. His thin, sallow face wore an 
 anxious look, and to Quintal's surprise he carried a 
 pistol and cutlass as well as a musket. 
 
NAHI'S MESSAGE 227 
 
 " I was going to look for you, Mat," he said ; 
 " there is something in the wind. One of the Tahiti 
 men was here a little while ago telling my wife that 
 Talalu had killed Jack Williams. Didn't you know 
 it ? " 
 
 " No ! " replied Quintal with a startled exclamation 
 and look of alarm. " What had we better do ? " 
 
 " Let us go and tell the others. There's going to 
 be fighting, I can see. Every one of those fellows 
 thinks a lot of Talalu, and as far as I can make out 
 only we two know that Williams is dead. We'll 
 find them all working at Young's." 
 
CHAPTER XXVII 
 
 ALREMA S SONG 
 
 YOUNG was building a new storehouse upon 
 his ground, and thither went the two men. As 
 soon as they emerged from the forest path upon 
 Young's clearing they could see him with Smith and 
 Brown at work. 
 
 None of the Tahitians had appeared to assist them, 
 and the three men were discussing the cause of their 
 absence. Young, who had been fishing in the 'Bounty's 
 boat all night off the south end of the island, was in a 
 bad temper. He had been obliged to land at an 
 inconvenient spot through the sea rising suddenly, 
 and on returning home just after daylight found that 
 Alrema was away. Such an unusual occurrence 
 mystified and irritated him ; for how could he know 
 that the loving girl had waited at the usual landing- 
 place in Bounty Bay till past daylight, and then 
 returned home, unhappy and anxious at the absence 
 of her husband ? 
 
 But as Quintal and Martin came walking quickly 
 along towards Young and his companions, Alrema 
 
 228 
 
ALREMA'S SONG 229 
 
 appeared on the path, far in advance of them. She 
 was followed closely by the wives of two of the 
 Tahitians, who were plainly watching her move- 
 ments. 
 
 " Beware, Alrema," said one of them, " we know 
 why thou hast come here. Talalu hath done no 
 wrong, and our husbands will stand by him if it 
 Cometh to the shedding of blood." 
 
 *' Aye," fiercely said the other, a short, powerful 
 woman, whose long hair, wetted with the morning 
 dew that had fallen on her head as she came through 
 the narrow forest path, hung black and lustreless 
 upon her brown, naked shoulders, " and I, Toaa, will 
 strike this knife into thy heart if thou goest nearer to 
 the white ^men," and she showed Alrema a short 
 broad-bladed dagger. 
 
 " Ye fools," answered Alrema contemptuously, 
 " can I not labour in my husband's garden without 
 listening to thy silly threats ? What doth it concern 
 me that Talalu hath killed the Iron-worker ? Stay me 
 not, I tell thee. I have but come to dig yams for our 
 morning meal." 
 
 Without further words she entered the walled 
 enclosure, apparently taking no heed of the three 
 white men who were now talking earnestly together. 
 She meant to tell them of their danger, but how to do 
 so with the two women close beside her she knew not. 
 
 " Here, you two, come and help Alrema to dig 
 yams," called out Young angrily in English to the 
 other women . " I'll make some of you work for me 
 to-day." 
 
230 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Fearing to disobey, they silently followed Alrema, 
 and began to assist her in her labours ; and as they 
 worked Alrema sang. Sweet, clear, and loud her 
 voice rang out in the morning air, and the white men 
 looked at one another in surprise, for at the end of the 
 first verse she added in English another line. 
 
 " Listen to my singing, white men." 
 
 The two Tahitian women near her looked up 
 suspiciously. Unlike Alrema, who now spoke the 
 white men's language with perfect fluency, they 
 barely understood a dozen words of English. Still 
 they kept close and Toaa watched Young's wife 
 narrowly. With apparent composure she went on 
 with her song — one of the old Tahitian love songs, 
 half recitative but full of melody, and presently 
 noticed that Young and the other men had drawn 
 nearer, and were listening, though with apparent un- 
 concern . 
 
 The second verse told how a girl of Raiatea, 
 pursuing a phantom lover, journeyed over sea and land 
 moon after moon, till she sank faint and dying under 
 a grove of coconut trees on the beach of an un- 
 known land, whither her quest had led her. 
 
 " So she lay there faint and dying ; 
 Bloodied were her cinnet sandals 
 With her journey long and weary ; 
 And her eyes were raised above her 
 At the young nuts, thick in clusters. 
 Growing close, yet far beyond her ; 
 For her hands, too weak to reach them, 
 Bruised and bleeding 
 Lay upon her aching bosom." 
 
ALREMA'S SONG 231 
 
 With a swift glance at the white men she changed 
 into English. 
 
 "Listen, white men, to my singing ; 
 Dead is Williams, Iron-worker ; 
 He was killed at early morning. 
 Know you not the man who slew him ? " 
 
 " By God ! Do you hear that ? " said Young. 
 
 " Sh ! wait a bit, she'll tell us more presently," 
 whispered Smith ; "can't you see she's afraid of the 
 other women ? " 
 
 Again Alrema's bird-like notes went back into 
 Tahitian. Striking her spade into the ground as she 
 sang — 
 
 " And the heavens swirled about her, 
 With her pain, and thirst, and hunger ; 
 But her heart kept calling, calling, 
 For the lover who had mocked her." 
 
 She raised the end of a yam from the rich black 
 soil, turned round and placed it in a basket behind 
 her ; then her voice, quivering yet strong, took up 
 in English the thread of warning to the listening 
 white men. 
 
 " Do you hear me ? Understand me ? 
 Go away and get your muskets ; 
 All the brown men now are arming, 
 Arming so that they may kill you ; 
 Go away and warn the others." 
 
 " Thou art a vain fool," said the woman Toaa to 
 her in a tone of contempt; "dost thou think to 
 charm the ears of our masters with thy croaking 
 voice ? " 
 
232 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Alrema tried to laugh good-naturedly, and again 
 went on with the Tahitian love-song. The women, 
 however, she feared suspected her, and she sang the 
 next verse quickly, while Young, Brown, and Smith 
 with bated breath listened for her next words in 
 English. 
 
 " See these women working with me, 
 They suspect me, they will kill me, 
 If they know I give you warning. 
 Go away and tell the others, 
 Leave me here to follow quickly." 
 
 "By heavens, that's enough ! " whispered Young to 
 his companions. " Let us get away as quickly as 
 possible. My wife's warning is clear enough. We 
 must go and tell the others." 
 
 "Here's Quintal and Martin coming down the 
 ridge now," said Brown. "They seem to know 
 what's up, too." 
 
 "Go and meet them," replied Young hurriedly, 
 " and tell them to wait till Smith and I come. We 
 must not let these women know that we have any 
 suspicion of what is wrong ; listen, do you hear 
 that ? " 
 
 Alrema was singing again in English, and telling 
 them she was sure the two women had been sent to 
 get powder and ball from Williams' house. 
 
 " Off you go. Brown, but don't walk too quickly. 
 Tell Quintal and Martin that Smith and 1 will be 
 with them in a minute or two. Then slip through 
 the breadfruit grove to Williams' house, and get all 
 his ammunition." 
 
ALREMA'S SONG 233 
 
 Presently Alrema saw with satisfaction that Brown 
 was sauntering away, and as soon as he was out ot 
 sight Young and Smith came over to where the 
 women were working. 
 
 " We are going to McCoy's house," said he, 
 addressing Ah'ema quietly ; "you can stay here and 
 cook us some yams." Then with sudden severity he 
 turned to Toaa and the other woman. "As for you 
 two, stay here and dig till we return, or 'twill be 
 worse for your backs." 
 
 They gave him sullen glances in reply and muttered 
 acquiescence. Smith and Young left the garden and 
 went to join Quintal and Martin, but the moment 
 they were out of the women's sight they ran, and 
 soon reached the other white men. 
 
 For some minutes the three women worked on in 
 silence. Alrema picked up her basket of yams, and 
 was moving towards the house when Toaa called her 
 back. 
 
 " Whither goest thou ? " she asked. 
 
 "Oh fool and dull of hearing," Alrema replied 
 coolly. " Didst you not hear my husband tell me to 
 cook these yams ? I haste to do his bidding." 
 
 " Thou liest," said Toaa fiercely ; " thou hast told 
 him something in thy cunning song," and she sprang 
 at her, knife in hand. 
 
 But Alrema, by an agile movement, escaped the 
 savage thrust, and, seeing that it was now too late for 
 concealment, leapt over the low stone wall of the 
 garden and fled swiftly after her husband. 
 
 With Young leading the way, the three white men 
 
234 THE MUTINEER 
 
 ran quickly towards the houses of the other Europeans. 
 In a few minutes they were overtaken by Brown, who 
 reported that Williams' house was in the possession of 
 Talalu and his friends, and consequently he had not 
 dared attempt to enter it. By the time they reached 
 the summit of the rise overlooking the rest of the 
 houses, they were joined by Alrema, who had cleverly 
 returned unobserved to her husband's house, fearing 
 that Young had not secured all the arms there. This, 
 however, he had done. 
 
 " Where is Christian ? " asked Young, as they 
 gained the top of the hill and stopped to draw breath 
 for a moment. 
 
 "In his cave," answered Martin, "ibut it's no use 
 waiting for him. Alrema says that Mahina has gone 
 to call him. He'll be with us presently. What are 
 we to do ? " 
 
 There was a hurried consultation, and it was quickly 
 resolved that Talalu must be taken prisoner and 
 punished. 
 
 As they talked they were joined by McCoy, 
 Christian, and Mahina. Christian unconsciously 
 assumed the leadership, and after deciding upon their 
 plan of action they proceeded in a body towards 
 Williams' house, determined at all risks to quell the 
 revolt which was threatening their safety. 
 
CHAPTER XXVIII 
 " HIS heart's desire " 
 
 IN less than half an hour the white men reached 
 the low stone wall enclosing Williams' house and 
 garden, and saw that the door of his dwelling was 
 closed ; but the two unglazed windows were opened, 
 and from them half a dozen brown, excited faces 
 peered out upon the Europeans. Each native held a 
 musket at full cock, along the barrel of which his eye 
 glanced. 
 
 Suddenly Christian stopped, and help up his hand to 
 the white men who followed him. Then grounding 
 his musket he spoke. 
 
 " I have come with you, because on the spur of the 
 moment I thought it my duty to make common 
 cause with men of my own colour against a common 
 danger. I forgot that this man Williams deserved his 
 fate. He was a thorough-paced scoundrel, and has 
 met, I have no doubt, his just deserts. Therefore, I 
 will take no part in this aflfeir ; settle it yourselves. 
 I leave it to you to consider, before you harm Talalu, 
 235 
 
236 THE MUTINEER 
 
 what you may bring upon yourselves by becoming his 
 murderers." 
 
 Walking away from his surprised and angry fellow- 
 countrymen, he sat down quietly upon the wall and 
 waited to see what would happen. 
 
 " Very well," said Edward Young contemptuously, 
 " if you won't stand by us in a matter like this we 
 must do without you. For the sake of my wife and 
 child I will not let this fellow escape punishment. 
 You, it is easy to see, care naught for yours," and he 
 glanced quickly at Mahina, who stood near. 
 
 "Right, Mr. Young," said Quintal ; "you lead us 
 and we'll follow." 
 
 Telling the rest of the white men to stand back. 
 Young advanced close to the house and called to 
 Talalu that he wished to speak to him. 
 
 The heavy wooden door swung open, and the 
 gigantic figure of the Tahitian faced the white man. 
 He was stripped to the waist and held a musket in his 
 hand, but, seeing that Young's piece lay on the ground, 
 he put his down also. 
 
 " What is it that ye seek, Etuati ? " he asked quietly. 
 
 "We come to seek thee ; thou hast killed the Iron- 
 worker, and we will see justice done. No one, white 
 or brown, must slay his fellow-man and be allowed to 
 escape," answered Young quickly. 
 
 " He sought to rob me of my wife. Am I a slave 
 to suffer such a wrong as that ? " 
 
 " Let us shoot the beggar ! " called out Martin and 
 Brown together, and Mills, too, urged Young to stand 
 aside and let them end the matter at once. 
 
 i 
 
"HIS HEART'S DESIRE" 237 
 
 But Young begged them to have patience. He 
 wished to avoid unnecessary bloodshed. 
 
 Talalu listened quietly, his eyes fixed upon Christian, 
 who sat with his chin upon his hand, regarding the 
 two parties with an aspect of utter indifference. 
 
 " Listen," said the Tahitian to Young, " so that 
 there may be peace between the white men and the 
 brown, I swear by the god of the white men, and by 
 the god Oro, to do in this matter as Kirisiani wills. 
 I know that he is a just man and will do no wrong 
 either to me or to thee." 
 
 " Be it so," answered Young, " speak to him and 
 tell him this ; for but a little time ago he told me he 
 cared naught for any of us." 
 
 He fell back to the white men, and told them of 
 the Tahitian's proposition. To it they all consented, 
 feeling sure that, however much Christian kept him- 
 self aloof from them, he would never actually take 
 sides against them with the islanders. 
 
 "Very well," said Christian coldly, when Young 
 asked him to speak to Talalu. " As I have said, I 
 will take no side, but if Talalu wants my opinion I 
 will give it. Whether he acts upon it or not will not 
 trouble me." He walked through the little gateway 
 up the path to the door of the house, but half way he 
 stopped ; for the big Tahitian with hands outstretched 
 advanced towards him. 
 
 " Thou art a just man, Kirisiani," he said, "as just 
 as Tuti, and I, Talalu, son of Totaro, have no fear of 
 thee. This do I say — mine was the hand that slew 
 the Iron-worker ; and thou art a just man, and will 
 
238 THE MUTINEER 
 
 not let these thy countrymen kill me because I did 
 that which was right." 
 
 For a moment or two Christian hesitated, and then 
 with a bitter laugh replied in a cold voice — "Thou 
 foolish man, dost thou think my countrymen care for 
 thy wrongs ? Thou hast killed their comrade — a 
 man who was useful to them because of his skill. 
 Thou art but a savage ; thy skin is brown, theirs is 
 white ; and in their eyes he of the brown skin hath 
 neither rights or wrongs. Therefore, oh man with 
 the brown skin, who hast no heart to feel, and no soul 
 to suffer, lay down thy weapon and feel the justice of 
 these thy masters." 
 
 The mocking bitterness and contempt which rang 
 through his voice cut the faithful Talalu to the 
 heart. 
 
 "Is this thy justice, Kirisiani ? Thou, the husband 
 of Mahina ! Thou, for whom we of the brown skins 
 and loving hearts would lay down our lives ! Thou 
 of whom Nahi my wife said, when I cast the Iron- 
 worker over the cliffs, * Kirisiani is thy friend and will 
 stand to thee ! ' Hast thou no other answer for me 
 but this ? " 
 
 ^' Talk to me no more," Christian replied passion- 
 ately ; " I care neither for thee, nor for these white 
 men, nor for myself. Do as thou wilt — it matters 
 not to me ; so that none of ye trouble me, I care not. 
 Farewell," and with angry impatience he turned away 
 and was soon lost to view. Mahina, with her infant 
 in her arms, quickly followed, endeavouring to over- 
 take him. 
 
"HIS HEART'S DESIRE" 239 
 
 Then Talalu, with his hands clasped together and 
 downcast head, returned to the house. 
 
 "Give me my gun," he said sadly, to Tairoa-Maina. 
 
 Holding the weapon up over his head, he turned to 
 Young, who had by this time with the help of Smith 
 succeeded in quieting the most turbulent of his 
 comrades. 
 
 Throwing his musket at Young's feet the gigantic 
 Tahitian spoke — 
 
 " Do with me as it seems best to thee. I swore by 
 Oro my god that Kirisiani should decide between us. 
 But his heart has turned to stone. Do with me as 
 you will." 
 
 Something in the despairing accents of Talalu's 
 voice touched even the callous heart of Young, and 
 he could not help admiring the loyalty to his word 
 which made the Tahitian, savage as he was, surrender 
 so quietly. 
 
 " This is well," he said, picking up the man's 
 musket from the sward. " Come with me ; I promise 
 that no harm shall befall thee till this thing that thou 
 hast done hath been well considered. But say this to 
 thy friends in the house — if before the sun sets they 
 do not lay down their arms and bring them to my 
 house, I will kill thee with my own hands." 
 
 " Tell them that thyself," said the Tahitian proudly ; 
 " how can I, a man, say this to them ? " 
 
 Advancing to the house Young gave the natives his 
 warning, but ere one of them could reply Talalu 
 sprang to his side with a haughty gesture. 
 
 " Heed him not, my friends. The words are his, 
 
240 THE MUTINEER 
 
 not mine. I, Talalu, give my life because of the 
 oath I swore to Kirisiani, who hath deserted me. 
 Am I a dog to buy my life from these white men 
 because of thy friendship for me, oh men of Tahiti 
 and Tubuai ? If I die, do thou, Tairoa-Maina, friend 
 of my heart, take Nahi for thy wife." 
 
 The door was shut again with a cry of defiance, 
 and again the musket barrels protruded through the 
 windows. 
 
 " Leave them alone for the present," commanded 
 Young ; and with their prisoner walking calmly before* 
 them, the white men marched away. 
 
 ^ ^ ¥^ 7^ ¥^ 
 
 Clasping her child to her bosom, Mahina followed 
 her husband as quickly as her strength would permit. 
 The events of the past few days had exhausted her in 
 mind and body, and she began to fear her husband's 
 morbid behaviour was turning into actual madness. 
 Thrice as she caught sight of him in the rough ascent 
 of the rocky path had she called his name and asked 
 him to stop, but he seemed to take no heed. At last 
 when she gained the summit of the ridge which over- 
 looked the valley wherein his house stood, she saw 
 him standing, his gaunt figure silhouetted against the 
 sky-line, with folded arms, and head sunk upon his 
 chest. As she came near he seemed to be asleep, for 
 he made no sign to show he knew of her presence. 
 
 Setting the sleeping child gently down upon a 
 mossy cleft in the rock, she stepped softly to him and 
 touched his arm. 
 
 "Kirisiani," she said, panting from the long and 
 
"HIS HEART'S DESIRE" 241 
 
 hurried walk, " I pray thee, come home to thy house 
 to-night. I fear to be alone, so far from thee." 
 
 With a savage oath, and the light of madness 
 gleaming in his eyes, he thrust her rudely away. 
 
 With a despairing, heart-broken cry she staggered 
 and fell upon the jagged rocks, and Christian, without 
 even looking behind, resumed his journey to his cave. 
 
 An hour later, when Mahina awoke to the con- 
 sciousness of her misery, she was alone in her husband's 
 house with her head pillowed against Edward Young's 
 bosom, whilst he kissed her again and again. 
 
 " Thou art my heart's desire," he said. 
 
 >7 
 
CHAPTER XXIX 
 
 THE TONGUE OF A WOMAN 
 
 DARKNESS fell on the lonely island, and the 
 muffled roar of the breakers beating against 
 the cliffs of Afita was the only sound that disturbed 
 the silence of the night. 
 
 In the big living-room of Edward Young's house 
 Talalu sat moodily upon a mat in one corner, won- 
 dering what had become of Nahi. His captors, at 
 Young's request, had not bound their prisoner, but 
 had left Alrema on guard over him with a loaded 
 musket and pistol. 
 
 " Where was Nahi ? " he wondered. " Why was 
 
 she, the faithful, loving wife, not with him now ? " 
 
 Alrema, by Young's direction, had given him food, 
 
 but it lay beside him untasted. Young himself was 
 
 absent ; for soon after bringing Talalu to the house 
 
 he had quietly left again. Alrema sat at the open 
 
 doorway, her pale, handsome face wearing a disturbed 
 
 expression. Where was her husband ? Why was he 
 
 so eager to get away at such a time as this, when 
 
 243 
 
THE TONGUE OF A WOMAN 243 
 
 men's minds were disturbed and the scent of blood 
 was in the air ! But for her proud and haughty 
 nature she would have watched his movements, and 
 would now have gone in search of him. But 
 Mahina's soft, gentle face rose before her, with her 
 pleading eyes, and Alrema lowered her head and wept 
 silently. How could she kill Mahina, who had ever 
 been her friend, and who had eyes and heart for Kiri- 
 siani alone ? And yet — ah ! she could think no 
 longer. Perhaps her husband was gone elsewhere, 
 and Mahina slept alone with her children. 
 
 The long, long hours passed slowly away till mid- 
 night ; then a step crunched upon the pebbly path, 
 and Young entered the house. His face was calm, 
 but Alrema saw that his dark eyes burned with 
 unusual brilliancy. 
 
 As he seated himself, Smith came in. 
 
 " Mr. Young," he said, "the others have just held 
 a sort of meeting at Brown's house, and are now 
 coming up to demand that we wait no longer for the 
 Tahitians to surrender. They say their lives are in 
 danger while the natives have arms in their possession. 
 I have tried to persuade them to leave the matter to 
 you, but they won't listen." 
 
 " All right," answered the other quietly ; and 
 Alrema noticed that he spoke somewhat brokenly, as 
 if out of breath. " I can do no more, but if they 
 insist in pursuing this quarrel to the bitter end, I must 
 see it through with the rest of you." 
 
 Alrema handed him a young coconut to drink. 
 He took it from her hand, but his eyes avoided his 
 
244 THE MUTINEER 
 
 wife's face. Then, taking his musket and putting a 
 pistol in his belt, he spoke to Talalu. 
 
 " You must come with us," he said, not unkindly 
 to the Tahitian, " so that your countrymen may see 
 that no harm hath been done thee. I will try and 
 reason with them." Then, leaving Alrema with her 
 child, the three men stepped out into the darkness to 
 meet the others. 
 
 Nahi had not deserted her husband in his ex- 
 tremity. While he sat a prisoner in Young's house, 
 wondering why she had not come near him, Nahi 
 was busy with her tongue. Since nightfall she had 
 been in Williams' house talking to her countrymen, 
 and with passionate eloquence stirring their hearts to 
 the doing of a great deed ; and the Tahitians and 
 Tubuaians, as they watched her flashing eyes sparkle 
 and glow like diamonds in the faint light and listened 
 to her fiery appeal, shifted uneasily and muttered to 
 one another in low tones. 
 
 " Why dost thou urge us to such a bloody deed, oh 
 Nahi ? " said Manale, a short, stout man, who, with 
 his musket upon his knees, sat cross-legged on the 
 floor. " 'Tis not for blood we seek, but for the right 
 to live and work for ourselves, and no longer remain 
 slaves. Thou art but a woman, and shouldst not 
 urge " 
 
 " A woman ! " and she clenched her hand fiercely 
 round the hilt of the knife she held — " a woman, yes. 
 But thou, Manale — bulky as thou art in body, thy 
 
THE TONGUE OF A WOMAN 245 
 
 heart is as the heart of a tiny fish. Will ye five 
 be slaves to these cruel vi^hite dogs ? Shame on ye 
 all ! Is there no one among you better than a 
 Mahu ? " I 
 
 " Nay, insult us not, Nahi, with such bitter w^ords," 
 said Tairoa-Maina ; " we are men. It is in our minds 
 that Kirisiani will help us." 
 
 She laughed bitterly. " Kirisiani ! He whom my 
 husband trusted before other men — only to be be- 
 trayed ! He has turned from our people, and cares 
 not if his countrymen rid themselves of us. Death 
 is before ye all, I tell thee. Will ye let these white 
 men slay ye one by one ? Have ye not guns in thy 
 hands ? Five pieces of iron, and death lieth within 
 them, ready to leap out with flame and smoke. Live 
 and be slaves ! Act and be men ! " 
 
 She ceased ; the lamp of tui tui nuts flickered, 
 wavered and died out, and darkness fell upon them. 
 
 " Let us talk," said Tairoa-Maina in a whisper to 
 the other four. 
 
 " Aye, talk," said Nahi, " talk. And think that 
 even now my husband lies dead because ye have 
 proved cowards ! " 
 
 Five minutes passed ; then Nahi, with fierce joy, 
 saw them rise. 
 
 " Come thou and see us act," said Manale to her, as 
 he touched her arm, and they all filed out in silence. 
 
 Young and Smith, with Talalu walking between 
 them, had scarcely gone a hundred yards from the 
 
 ' A class of degraded Tahitians, now happily extinct, who affected 
 the dress and manners of women. 
 
246 THE MUTINEER 
 
 house when they met Quintal and McCoy coming 
 down the rugged path towards Young's dwelling. 
 
 " Mr. Young," said McCoy, " we have determined 
 to clap a stopper on this mutiny at once. We can't 
 let these fellows take charge of the island any longer, 
 and we want you to come along with us and surprise 
 them before daybreak." 
 
 " Very well, I'm agreeable. But at the same time" 
 — and Young laughed ironically — " it does me good 
 to hear you — or any of us — talk about putting down 
 a mutiny." 
 
 "Call it by any name you like," said McCoy, 
 roughly. " But it won't do for us to let this thing 
 go on. We came to you because we know you won't 
 leave us in the lurch, like Mr. Christian has." 
 
 " All right ; lead on. Where are the others ? " 
 said Young. 
 
 " They've gone on ahead slowly ; we'll overtake 
 them before they reach the house." 
 
 Following Young in Indian file, the three white 
 men and the Tahitian walked as quickly as the night 
 would permit along the narrow path which wound 
 gently up a hill thickly covered with hibiscus shrubs. 
 So sinuous was their course, however, that objects 
 even a few yards ahead could not be perceived. 
 
 No sound disturbed the silence of the island night, 
 save for the throbbing of the ever-restless surf and the 
 strange, plaintive cries of the young sea-birds in their 
 rookeries on the cliffs. 
 
 Suddenly there rang out, and echoed and re-echoed 
 in quavering reverberations in the hollows of the hills. 
 
THE TONGUE OF A WOMAN 247 
 
 three musket shots in quick succession, followed by 
 the hoarse, weird clamour of tens of thousands of birds 
 as they rose and circled in wild alarm. 
 
 " By God ! " cried Young, " we must run ; that's 
 our men firing." 
 
 " This comes of too much palavering. While we've 
 been paying out fathoms of talk the fight has begun," 
 said Quintal, angrily ; and the four white men, leaving 
 Talalu to his own devices, took to their heels and ran 
 excitedly in the direction of the firing, which seemed, 
 however, to be nearer the white men's houses than to 
 that of the Tubuaians. 
 
 " Looks as if our fellows had grabbed 'em while 
 they were asleep, and court-martialled 'em on the 
 spot while we've been arguing over the thing," said 
 McCoy as he ran with the others. 
 
 But their surmises were entirely wrong. Before get- 
 ting more than two hundred yards further Smith, who 
 was in advance, stumbled and fell over something in the 
 darkness ; the hands he put out to save himself plunged 
 into a pool of blood which was oozing from the body 
 of Brown, who lay dead in the middle of the track, 
 with a jagged bullet-hole through his chest. 
 
 " By God, it's Brown ! " cried Smith, feeling the 
 man's face, " and he's dead ! " 
 
 "There's been a fight. Come on, men, for heaven's 
 sake ; we may be in time to save the others " ; and 
 Young, followed by McCoy and Quintal, rushed 
 along the track in search of their comrades, and in 
 a few seconds had left Smith many yards behind. 
 
 Stooping down again over the body of the murdered 
 
248 THE MUTINEER 
 
 man, Smith felt his heart to satisfy himself that he was 
 dead. He lifted the still bleeding figure, carried it a 
 few yards away from the path, and proceeded to grope 
 for his own musket, which he had dropped. 
 
 As he stooped a dark form silently stepped out from 
 the thick undergrowth lining the path. A clubbed 
 musket was raised in the air, and Smith fell and lay 
 unconscious close to the corpse of his fellow-country- 
 man. 
 
 " Aue ! " said Manale the Tubuaian to Nihu the 
 Tahitian, who accompanied him, " 'tis Simeti whom 
 I have slain. And I would not have harmed him, for 
 he hath ever been good to us. But this dog" — and 
 he spurned the body of the other white man — " was 
 our enemy, and my hand was strong with hate when 
 I slew him." 
 
 Young and the others ran on, but only for a short 
 distance, when again an exclamation of horror burst 
 from them ; this time two dead men lay in their 
 path — Mills and Martin. 
 
 Then, before they could realise what had happened, 
 five muskets blazed out from a rocky ridge above, and 
 several naked figures sprang from their ambush with 
 savage yells. 
 
 None of the white men were struck, but Quintal 
 and McCoy, terrified out of their wits, dropped their 
 muskets and fled. The intense darkness favoured 
 them. They succeeded in evading the rush of their 
 opponents, and were soon clambering down the moun- 
 tain side in the hope of finding better shelter in the 
 dense scrub of the valley. Young alone stood his 
 
THE TONGUE OF A WOMAN 249 
 
 ground, and fired his musket at the first of the natives 
 who sprang upon him ; but he missed his mark, and 
 before he could club the weapon Nihu struck him a 
 blow on the head with a musket, and laid him sense- 
 less. 
 
 The five figures bent over him for a moment, and 
 talked hurriedly among themselves. 
 
 " 'Tis Etuati," said Tetihiti ; " he lieth as one 
 dead. For the sake of Alrema, his wife, who is of 
 my blood, let him live, oh friends " ; and he warded 
 off the musket of the savage Manale, who had pressed 
 the muzzle of the weapon to Young's heart. "But 
 the other two, Makoi and Kawintali, must die." 
 
 So they sped away in pursuit of Quintal and McCoy. 
 
CHAPTER XXX 
 
 AFTER THE STORM 
 
 FOR some minutes Edward Young lay stunned 
 upon the rocky path, a stream of blood oozing 
 from a severe cut in his head. Presently the cool 
 night air brought him back to consciousness, and, 
 as by slow degrees his senses returned he feared that 
 he alone was left alive of all the white men on the 
 island, and it was likely enough that even his hours 
 were numbered. With a struggle he rose slowly and 
 painfully, dragging his footsteps along the road until 
 he reached his house. Fearful of again encountering 
 the enraged islanders he proceeded with the greatest 
 caution, stopping suddenly, when at a turn in the 
 narrow track he saw three figures in a crouching 
 position. 
 
 He dropped upon his hands and knees and scanned 
 them carefully. Presently he recognised Nahi, Alrema, 
 and Terere. The three women were supporting 
 Smith, who was too badly hurt to stand upon his feet. 
 As Young watched, doubtful whether to approach or 
 not, he saw a fourth figure join them, and knew Ma- 
 
 250 
 
AFTER THE STORM 251 
 
 hina by the black mantle of hair falling down her 
 back. 
 
 " Is he dead, I wonder ? " he muttered to himself. 
 " Better for him if he is. I will never surrender her 
 again." 
 
 He rose to his feet and advanced towards them. The 
 women gave a startled cry, and Smith fell back upon 
 the ground with a groan of agony. 
 
 Alrema's arms were round Young's neck in an 
 instant, and her fearful, panting bosom pressed to 
 his lovingly. " My husband, my husband," she 
 murmured, " thou art wounded ; yet Nahi said thou 
 wouldst be safe." She turned fiercely upon the wife 
 of Talalu, who covered her face with her hands and 
 wept. 
 
 " Alas ! what have I done ? " said Nahi, " the fire 
 of anger in my countrymen's hearts was kindled by 
 me, and in their wrath they knew not friend from foe." 
 
 Mahina drew near, trembling from head to foot ; 
 and Alrema, with an agonised heart, saw her husband's 
 hand steal out to her friend's and give it a quick, warm 
 pressure. Then Mahina sank upon her knees in the 
 darkness and wept silently. Did Alrema know that 
 she, her friend, had yielded, and that Edward Young no 
 longer cared for the brave, loyal wife who had fought 
 and bled for him in the days gone by in Tubuai ? 
 
 Alrema did know. But maddened as she was by 
 the discovery of her husband's faithlessness, she was yet 
 true to Mahina ; and all her love for Young welled up 
 fresh and strong in her heart when she felt him sway- 
 ing to and fro on his feet from weakness. 
 
252 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " Thou cruel Nahi," she cried bitterly, " dost thou 
 think that thy husband is more dear to thee than mine 
 is to me " — a sob choked her utterance — "he for whom 
 my life is ever ready to be given ? If he comes to 
 further harm I sw^ear I w^ill kill thee, thou false and 
 wricked Nahi." 
 
 Nahi sprang to her feet, and her black eyes gleamed 
 with fire as she threw her arms wide out. "What 
 I have done was for the love of Talalu ! But let 
 us not waste time in words ; hide thy husband and the 
 husband of Terere until the fury of our people hath 
 spent itself." 
 
 It was now agreed that Young, who was only just 
 able to walk, should go on ahead and conceal himself 
 in a cave in the mountains, known only to the women, 
 who would bring him food and water until he was safe 
 from pursuit or further vengeance from the brown 
 men ; and, supported by Alrema and the trembling 
 Mahina, the wounded man set out, and the three 
 toiled slowly along. Then Young began to talk. 
 
 " Leave me by myself," he said weakly in English. 
 "You, Alrema, return home and see to our child. 
 Maybe she has come to harm. You, Mahina, look for 
 your husband, he may be dead." 
 
 " What matters it to me ? " burst from Mahina. 
 "Would that I, too, were dead." 
 
 " Take thou my husband to the cave, Mahina." 
 
 It was Alrema who spoke, steadying her voice 
 through unseen tears. " Take him to the cave whilst 
 I seek out thy husband and bring him to thee — to thee 
 and to his friend — his true and good friend." 
 
AFTER THE STORM 253 
 
 The bitterness of the words, "his true and good 
 friend," pierced the anguished heart of Christian's wife 
 like a knife-stab. 
 
 " Nay, nay, Alrema, leave me not, I pray thee. See, 
 thy husband needs us both. Stay with me ; for the 
 love I have always borne thee, stay with me." 
 
 But Alrema only answered her with a sob, and 
 in another instant was gone, to fall upon her face 
 a few yards away and weep out her shame and 
 bitterness of heart. " For the sake of my child," 
 she moaned, "for the sake of my child, neither 
 his blood nor hers shall redden my hand." 
 
 Then rising to her feet she went to seek Christian. 
 
 Smith had fainted. His wife, as soon as he returned 
 to consciousness, assisted him to his feet ; they set out 
 towards the cave where Young was gone, and in 
 another hour their journey was successfully accom- 
 plished. 
 
 The wives of McCoy and Quintal — Puni the 
 Huahine woman, and Malama — meantime sat alone 
 in their houses, weeping at the thought of the fate 
 which they felt sure had overtaken their husbands. 
 Nahi, on her way to seek Talalu had called in and 
 spoken words of encouragement which somewhat 
 allayed their fears. She promised that she would 
 restrain her countrymen from further attacking the 
 white men ; then still fearful as to what had become 
 of her own husband, she quickly ran the rest of 
 the distance to her little dwelling in Williams* 
 
254 THE MUTINEER 
 
 enclosure. When she entered she found the gigantic 
 Tahitian quietly seated cross-legged upon a mat, with 
 his musket beside him, eating his supper. She em- 
 braced him tenderly and began to tell him of all that 
 had happened. 
 
 He interrupted her in the middle of her recital. 
 " I know all, Nahi. I was hidden in a clump of trees 
 and saw all that took place between thee and the 
 wounded white men. And now that thou hast 
 returned in safety I myself will go to Manale and 
 the others, and stay their hands from further killing. 
 Enough blood has been shed." 
 
 Towards dawn the islanders returned from their 
 fruitless search for McCoy and Quintal, and as they 
 filed one by one into Williams' house they were met 
 by Talalu, who had just missed them in the dark- 
 ness. 
 
 In a few words he so worked upon their feelings 
 that they readily agreed to do no further harm to the 
 remaining white men, and consented to meet and dis- 
 cuss their future relations towards each other. 
 
 Christian, slumbering in the loneliness of his moun- 
 tain cave, had heard the report of the muskets and 
 guessed what was happening ; but he was perfectly 
 indifferent as to how the quarrel might end, and 
 so remained where he was. About two or three hours 
 before dawn he felt a touch upon his arm and saw 
 a woman's figure bending over him. 
 
 "What now?" he said angrily, thinking it was 
 Mahina who had disturbed him. 
 
 "I have come, Kirisiani, to tell thee that three 
 
AFTER THE STORM 255 
 
 of the white men are dead, and Simeti and Etuati 
 wounded. Didst thou not hear the guns ? " 
 
 " I heard them, Alrema, but it is naught to me." 
 
 " Naught to thee ? Hast thou no thought to ask 
 if Mahina and thy children be alive or dead ? " 
 
 He laughed bitterly. " None. What care I for 
 Mahina ? Dost thou think I am blind ? Hast 
 thou not seen what I have seen ? " 
 
 The woman sank on her knees beside him, and, 
 taking his hand in hers, wept passionately. ** Aye, 
 I know it now. But yet Mahina is my friend, else 
 had I killed her. And because of that and for my 
 great friendship for thee have I brought thy two 
 children, so that thou mayest take them to their 
 mother." 
 
 " Where is she ? " asked Christian as he rose, and 
 with steel and flint lit the rude lamp of coconut oil. 
 
 " She is waiting for thee in the cave with Simeti and 
 my husband. And see, this do I swear — only because 
 I bade her stay and help the wounded men did she 
 remain away from thy house and children. Else would 
 she have come, and with them sought thee here." 
 
 Christian regarded her for a moment or two in 
 silence. He admired her intense loyalty and devotion 
 to Mahina, which was put to such a test, and so 
 restrained himself from sneering at her weakness. 
 
 "Where are my children ? " he asked. 
 
 " They wait outside. I feared to bring them to 
 thee till we had spoken together a little." 
 
 "Bring them in," he said, "and stay with then: 
 here till I return." 
 
256 THE MUTINEER 
 
 She placed her hand upon his shoulder. "Thou 
 wilt hurt neither my husband nor Mahina ? " she said 
 beseechingly. 
 
 "No," he said in a low voice, "neither. For 
 the sake of these, my children, I will not." 
 
 She took his hand and kissed it again. " Forgive 
 her, Kirisiani. When thou didst cast her aside from 
 thee on the cliffs she became in the hands of my 
 husband, who is a cunning man, as a twig that is bent 
 by the fingers of a child. Only for this she had 
 remained true to thee and he true to me." 
 
 Again he laughed with bitter scorn. "All women 
 are alike, and all men are false to their friends and their 
 duty when a woman's face comes between. Stay here 
 till I return." 
 
 Just as dawn broke. Christian, guided by the direc- 
 tions Alrema had given him, found and entered the 
 cave, and was greeted with an exclamation of joy from 
 Smith ; Young, who lay upon a couch of leaves, 
 merely nodded to him and said nothing. Mahina was 
 not visible. 
 
 " I am glad to find you both alive — both^^ he added, 
 with a steady glance at Edward Young, whose eyes 
 dropped before his, "although if every white man on 
 the island had been killed it would have been but 
 justice. How can these people trust men who, even 
 among themselves, are guilty of the blackest treachery 
 to each other ? " 
 
 For a little while no one spoke ; then came a murmur 
 of voices outside, and Talalu stood before the three 
 white men. 
 
AFTER THE STORM 257 
 
 "This is my message to ye, oh white men who 
 were once my friends ; these are the words of Temua, 
 Nihu, the men of Tubuai, and I, Talalu. Let there 
 be peace between us. We sought not blood ; only 
 when it was forced upon us did we fight and kill. Let 
 there be peace." 
 
 "I blame neither thee nor them," said Christian 
 quietly, "and now I tell these two men here, who 
 were once my friends, but whom I wish to see no 
 more, that they will do well to make peace with thee 
 and thy countrymen." 
 
 Without a word of farewell he turned and left them 
 with Talalu, who, as both Young and Smith saw, was 
 unfeignedly glad at their escape ; and they in their 
 turn were relieved to hear that McCoy and Quintal 
 were safe. 
 
 As the sun rose they heard plaintive notes of wailing 
 for the dead rising from the valley below, and soon 
 after, Nahi and some of the Tahitian men came, 
 unarmed, to tell them that their comrades' graves were 
 being dug. 
 
 Still weak from loss of blood, Young and Smith 
 managed to leave their retreat and, assisted by the now 
 friendly Tahitians, reach the valley, where they saw 
 standing round the three bodies a little group of brown 
 people. As they drew near, Manale stepped out from 
 the others and offered his hand to Young. 
 
 "Is it peace between us ? " he asked. 
 
 " It is peace," said Young and Smith, both taking 
 his hands. 
 
 Presently they were joined by McCoy and Quintal ; 
 18 
 
258 THE MUTINEER 
 
 and the bodies of the slain men, having been wrapped 
 in mats by the women, were placed in their graves in 
 silence, broken only by the sobs of their wives. 
 
 Walking slowly away from the cave, Fletcher 
 Christian, with white, despairing face, went first to his 
 house, intending to bring away some further articles 
 for his own use in his retreat. The door was closed, 
 but not fastened on the inside. Pushing it open, he 
 saw the figure of his wife upon her couch. She had 
 been weeping, and as he entered the room trembled in 
 every nerve ; then, ere he could restrain her, cast 
 herself at his feet and flung back her head. 
 
 "Kill me," she cried ; "kill me, else will I die as 
 did Faito." 
 
 He drew back from her coldly. " Thou art but a 
 woman, and men do not kill women in my country, 
 even though they be false to their husbands. Listen 
 to me. So that I never see thy face again I am 
 content. But still would I see my children some- 
 times. Therefore with thee they shall remain, and 
 sometimes will I come to them." 
 
 In another moment he was gone, and Mahina looked 
 wildly after his retreating figure. Then she swayed 
 and fell, and an hour after Alrema, with tears of pity 
 filling her star-like eyes, came in with the children and 
 embraced her friend lovingly. 
 
 " He will yet love thee again," said the loyal girl — 
 " 'tis but a black cloud that will vanish. And see, I 
 too forgive thee." 
 
CHAPTER XXXI 
 
 MINE THE HAND 
 
 A MONTH had elapsed. To Mahina it was a 
 month of misery. 
 
 With her children she passed her days and nights in 
 solitude, broken only by visits from Talalu and Alrema, 
 who both knew the secret of her suffering. Once or 
 twice only had she caught sight of Christian as he 
 wandered about his cliffs at dusk, and had been impelled 
 by her love to follow and speak to him ; but with a 
 cold gesture of indifference he had waved her back and 
 walked slowly on, oblivious to her heart-wrung sobs. 
 
 And not to Mahina alont. had come suspense and 
 grief; Alrema suffered too, for her husband now neg- 
 lected her for the company of McCoy and Quintal. 
 Since the deaths of Brown, Mills, and Martin, a period 
 of incessant watchfulness and suspicion had ensued — 
 the white men dreaded the brown, the brown suspected 
 the white. Edward Young, fearful of more blood- 
 shed, had tried to persuade the islanders to give their 
 arms up to him ; but this, though they repeated their 
 
 259 
 
26o THE MUTINEER 
 
 assurance of good will towards the seamen, they refused 
 to do. 
 
 " To Kirisiani alone will we give up our guns," 
 said one of the Tubuaians, "for in him alone have we 
 faith. And Kirisiani himself saith that there is no 
 faith or honour in any among ye. Thou, Etuati, who 
 wert once his sworn taio^ knowest if he speaketh truth." 
 
 Young winced at the native's words, but said 
 nothing. His mad infatuation for Mahina still remained, 
 yet he was sensible of his own degradation and treach- 
 ery to Christian, and a sense of shame kept him from 
 approaching Mahina since that fatal evening. Mahina 
 herself, though the man had acquired a strange power 
 over her, forcing her to believe his passionate declara- 
 tion of love, trembled with fear lest she should see him 
 again. 
 
 Talalu, ever; faithful both to her and her husband, 
 was the one man on the island with whom Christian 
 now held converse, and the big-hearted fellow more 
 than once sought him out in his retreat and tried to 
 induce him at least to meet and speak to his wretched 
 wife. 
 
 " She is but a woman, Kirisiani ; and see, oh friend, 
 her heart is eaten up for love of thee. Canst thou not 
 take her to thee again ? Thou art strong ; she is weak. 
 Are women of Peretane never unfaithful ? " 
 
 But Christian, though he listened to the friendly 
 Tahitian, would answer, " Let it be as it is — she is 
 nought to me, nor I to her." 
 
 One night as the two sat together on the edge of 
 the cliffs, looking over the wide expanse of star-lit 
 
"MINE THE HAND" 261 
 
 ocean, the Tahitian began to talk of the condition of 
 affairs between his countrymen and the whites, and 
 urged Christian to destroy, if possible, the growing 
 unrest and suspicion which disturbed both parties. 
 
 "Thy countrymen," he said, "go about in fear of 
 us, with their muskets ever to their hands. Thou, who 
 art a chief among them, canst still make them listen to 
 thee ; then will they forget all that is past, for we of 
 Tahiti and Tubuai do not seek more bloodshed." 
 
 "I can do nothing for thee, Talalu. Bitterly do I 
 repent the misery and death that I have wrought to 
 white men and brown ; but I can do nothing — no 
 longer will I interfere between thy people and my 
 countrymen." 
 
 One night all that remained of the mutineers 
 assembled in Young's house. The last to enter was 
 Smith, accompanied by Terere, whom he placed out- 
 side to watch. The door was carefully closed, and the 
 men sat on the rough wooden benches which, with a 
 table, formed the furniture of the living room. For 
 some minutes they conversed in low tones ; then 
 Young rose and spoke. 
 
 "We can delay no longer," he said. "The Tahitians, 
 my wife will tell you, intend to attack us at daybreak. 
 They firmly believe that we shall not rest until we 
 have avenged the murder of our countrymen." 
 
 The other men looked at each other and nodded 
 acquiescence. 
 
 *' Yesterday, so Alrema says, they came to the 
 horrible resolution of killing us all except Christian. 
 Him they look upon as mad, and, as you know, they 
 
262 THE MUTINEER 
 
 have a curious feeling of regard for mad people. They 
 consider the insane as inspired and protected by the 
 gods, and their lives are held sacred. Now, God 
 knows, I have no wish to see more bloodshed on this 
 island ; but," and here Young's face paled and his 
 words came slowly, " it seems to me that my wife's 
 advice, however dreadful it may appear, should be 
 followed. Either they or we must die." 
 
 McCoy struck the table with his huge, heavy fist. 
 " Speaking for myself and Mat Quintal, I think we 
 ought to have done it long ago. Mr. Christian's 
 damned fine ideas about the rights o' these bloody- 
 minded savages is all very well when you haven't got 
 to live with them. I am for settling it at once." 
 
 " I don't agree with you," said Smith, " but I sup- 
 pose my opinion won't alter the matter one way or 
 another. Since Mr. Christian won't have anything 
 to do with us, I am willing to look to Mr. Young as 
 our leader. If he considers it necessary for our safety 
 to murder these people — why I've gone too far to hold 
 back now." 
 
 "Murder is an ugly name. Smith," said Young 
 quickly, "and I've no mind to accept your help. 
 McCoy, Quintal, and myself can do what is to be 
 done without you. We must either kill or be killed." 
 
 "Aye, aye, Mr. Young," said Quintal approvingly. 
 " Smith had better go to his friend, Mr. Christian, 
 and live in his cave. We three can settle this business. 
 We don't want any white-livered man among us at 
 a time like this." 
 
 With a fierce glance Smith sprang to his feet. 
 
"MINE THE HAND" 263 
 
 "Damn you, Quintal, you are too ready with your 
 tongue. I'm no more white-livered than you are. 
 You knew that when we took the ship off Tofoa. 
 If Mr. Young says the word I am ready to fight, or 
 murder, or whatever you like to call it, all the Tahi- 
 tians myself. To my mind he's a King's officer still 
 — leastways so far as my obedience to him goes. Say 
 what is to be done, and I'll have a hand in the doing 
 of it." 
 
 " Words, words, idle words, and nothing is done. 
 In a little time it may be too late. While ye talk, 
 and talk, I, Alrema, will alone do the deed. Mine 
 shall be the hand to strike." 
 
 Alrema was sitting in a corner of the house, her 
 dark eyes watching with intense interest each move- 
 ment of the white men, and listening to every word 
 spoken ; and her husband, as he turned towards her, 
 saw in her eyes the look he had seen long ago on 
 Tubuai, when she held in her hand a blood-stained 
 cutlass. 
 
 " I alone will do it," and seizing an axe from a tool- 
 rack on the wall she waved her hand to the whites, 
 opened the door, and was gone. 
 
 Picking up their muskets the four men hastily 
 followed Alrema along the narrow track which led 
 to the dwelling of her countrymen and the house of 
 Williams. 
 
 At the doorway of Williams' house sat the huge 
 Taialu, musket in hand, keeping watch while his 
 countrymen slept. For some weeks they had never 
 rested without setting a watch, for their wives warned 
 
26+ THE MUTINEER 
 
 them continually that the white men were dangerous 
 and were plotting mischief. Nahi, who seemed ani- 
 mated by the bitterest feeling of hatred against all the 
 whites save Christian, had continually declared that 
 sooner or later the remaining Englishmen would 
 avenge the deaths of their comrades by a sudden 
 massacre. Her repeated warning had so worked upon 
 the fears of her countrymen as to force them into 
 believing its truth, and they resolved to be beforehand 
 with the white men. 
 
 " Kill them, kill them," she urged. " Only when 
 their blood runs shall we be safe." 
 
 So they sat together in the darkened room and 
 agreed to make an attack next morning at daybreak, 
 in which Nahi and the wives of the Tahitians were 
 to take part. After arranging the details, the plotters 
 lay down to sleep, leaving Talalu on watch. He was 
 to call them at dawn ; and as the brown men spread 
 their mats upon the gravelled floor, Nahi whispered 
 in his ear, " To-morrow, my husband, those who 
 sought thy life will be silent for ever." 
 
 But Nahi little knew that Alrema, ever on the 
 alert, had learned from Puni the danger that overhung 
 the white men, and had guarded against it. 
 
 Talalu, sitting dreamily on the doorstep of the 
 house, with his musket across his knees, woke with a 
 start. Surely a footstep rustled the dead pandanus 
 leaves that lay along the path ? He opened his half- 
 closed eyes and listened. Nothing broke the stillness 
 but the murmuring hum of the surf, and the strange 
 weird rustle of the wind as it soughed through the 
 
"MINE THE HAND" 265 
 
 groves of pandanus and coco-palms. He bent his 
 head again and dozed, then in an instant was upon 
 his feet. Some one was approaching, for this time he 
 heard clearly the crackling of dead leaves underfoot. 
 
 Leaning on his musket his keen eye eagerly 
 scanned the darkness of the night. A soft footfall 
 behind him — and it was too late. Before he could 
 rise and face the intruder, or call an alarm, Alrema's 
 axe had cleft his skull in halves, and the watcher's cry 
 of warning mingled with his dying groan. 
 
 Swinging the weapon over her head, Alrema, fol- 
 lowed by the white men, dashed into the house, and 
 then, in the dim light of the flickering lamp, began a 
 horrible slaughter of the sleeping men. Manale, who 
 lay nearest the door, fell as he rose, beneath a blow 
 from Alrema's axe, which sank deep into the broad, 
 naked bosom ; and three shots from the white man's 
 muskets did the rest of their bloody work. 
 
 One of the Tubuaians alone succeeded in leaping 
 past his assailants and gaining the door ; but Young 
 drew a pistol from his belt, sprang before him and 
 pointed the weapon at his head. 
 
 " Shoot ! " cried Alrema, " shoot ! spare none, so that 
 we may have peace afterwards." 
 
 The savage thirst for slaughter in her voice steadied 
 the wavering hand that but for her would have spared. 
 For a moment he hesitated, then aimed the pistol at 
 the Tubuaian's breast, pulled the trigger, and the last 
 of the brown men fell upon his face on the blood- 
 stained mats. 
 
CHAPTER XXXII 
 
 NAHI S REVENGE 
 
 TOO terrified to aid their husbands, and each 
 moment expecting to share their fate, the wives 
 of the murdered men crouched together in horror at 
 one end of the room, nor could all the endeavours of 
 the Englishmen soothe their fears. At last Young 
 and his companions went away and left them with 
 their dead. »Alrema, fearless as she was, went with 
 them, for there was in Nahi's face a look of such 
 deadly hatred that even her iron-souled nature quailed 
 before it. 
 
 At sunrise next morning two people alone on the 
 island knew nothing of what had happened — Fletcher 
 Christian and Mahina. That morning she sat beside 
 him in the cave, fanning his flushed face and aching 
 head, for he was ill and suffering in mind and body. 
 Two days before, at sundown, as he wandered along 
 the wild and rugged track leading to his mountain 
 retreat, she had watched him unseen, and saw that he 
 staggered as he walked and had scarce strength enough 
 to drag his weary feet along. She waited till darkness 
 
NAHI'S REVENGE 267 
 
 set in and then followed, her heart beating fast in an 
 agony of hope and fear. Peering cautiously in she 
 saw her husband fling himself upon his couch and 
 mats and lie there, his face turned away from her, 
 breathing heavily and painfully. For some minutes 
 she stood and watched him with tears of loving pity 
 filling her eyes. Her husband ! He whose love was 
 once hers, and might yet be again ! And he 
 was ill and weak. Surely he would not curse her 
 now ? 
 
 Softly she crept in through the darkness and sat near 
 him, longing yet fearing to speak ; but soon she knew 
 by his low mutterings and the way in which he flung 
 his arms about that he was ill of fever. She had sur- 
 mised as much when she saw him going towards the 
 cave, and knew how perfectly helpless even a strong 
 man became in a few hours from the first attack. 
 
 Quickly she made her way in the darkness back to 
 her house, filled a small basket with some ripe limes, 
 roused her children, and, leading one and carrying. the 
 other, returned as quickly as possible. 
 
 Short as was her absence, she knew as soon as she 
 entered the cave by the sound of Christian's breathing 
 that he was much worse. Placing the children — of 
 whose fretful cries her husband seemed quite uncon- 
 scious — by themselves in a corner, she quickly cut 
 some of the limes in halves and squeezed them into 
 a coconut-shell, with a little water. Then she raised 
 Christian's head upon her knees, and the fever-stricken 
 man, suffering from the agonies of a burning thirst, 
 eagerly drank the life-giving draught. All that night 
 
268 THE MUTINEER 
 
 she sat beside him, cooling his aching head and giving 
 him at short intervals a mouthful of lime-juice. To- 
 wards morning the violence of the fever abated. He 
 slept, and Mahina vi^as happy as she vv^atched. 
 
 The dawn came, and Christian's breathing grew 
 soft and regular. Mahina took his hand in hers, and 
 raised it to her lips ; then, overcome by weariness, she 
 lay beside him and slept too. 
 
 As the first streaks of sunlight, piercing the mountain 
 mists, lit up the dark and jagged rocks which hid the 
 cave within their bosom. Christian awoke, and knew 
 that the fever was gone. Then a cry escaped him, 
 as he saw the sleeping figures of his wife and children ; 
 and the basket of limes and the wet bandage just fallen 
 from his temples told him all. She had come to him 
 when he was ill and suffering ; come to him when his 
 last words to her had been a curse. A great pity 
 welled up in his heart as he looked at her pale, worn 
 face, so full of pain and suffering. Her thick mantle 
 of black hair seemed like a funeral pall to her body, 
 now so weak and thin. 
 
 A blade of yellow sunshine shot in through the 
 mouth of the cave ; it touched her face and glorified 
 it with a strange radiance, and P'letcher Christian's 
 better nature came back to him once more. 
 
 Sinking quietly back upon his pillow he reached out 
 his hand and placed it gently upon her head. 
 
 « Mahina ! " 
 
 A broken cry of trembling happiness, then in an 
 instant she was on her knees before him, with her 
 hands clasped tightly together, and a look of unutter- 
 
NAHI'S REVENGE 269 
 
 able yearning in her dark, sad eyes. He drew her to 
 him and kissed her lips. 
 
 " Thou art my wife," he said. 
 
 With streaming eyes she flung her arms round his 
 neck and sobbed out her joy to live again upon her 
 husband's bosom. 
 
 All that morning she remained in the cave, for 
 Christian was still weak from the fever. In the after- 
 noon, to her great joy he told her that henceforward 
 she and the children should remain with him there, 
 as he had no desire to return and live in the valley. 
 Mahina eagerly set about removing all their possessions 
 to the new home. When she returned, the sight of 
 Christian playing with and caressing her children 
 filled her with a wild sense of happiness, and already 
 her face was glowing with all the old beauty which 
 had once fascinated the man she loved. 
 
 In her excitement about removing the contents or 
 their old house, Mahina did not notice the absence 
 of the people from the village. That night, however, 
 when after so many months of misery she and her 
 children lay beside her husband, she talked with 
 Christian of the growing suspicion and hatred now 
 again rending the life of the little community. 
 
 " Only thee of all the white men do my people 
 trust," she said. " Wilt thou not yet come and decide 
 between them and thy countrymen, ere it be too late ? 
 Is it not better, my husband, for all men to dwell 
 together in peace ? A hot word leadeth to a blow, 
 and the hand toucheth the musket, and death leaps 
 out from the hollow iron." 
 
270 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " True, Mahina," he answered mournfully ; " I 
 alone am to blame for the bloodshed in Afita. But 
 never more will I interfere." 
 
 How long they had slept they knew not, when 
 suddenly they awoke to the report of firearms. 
 
 " What new horror is this ? " muttered Christian to 
 himself, as he hastily rose and dressed. 
 
 " 'Tis my countrymen who have again attacked the 
 white men," answered Mahina, trembling with fear 
 lest her people should seek Christian's life in their mad 
 lust for slaughter, and her newly-found happiness come 
 to a sudden end. 
 
 " 'Tis as likely that the white men have attacked 
 the brown," answered Christian bitterly. " Are we 
 not all rebels and murderers ? " 
 
 Determined to shoot the first man who should 
 attempt to enter with hostile intent, he took a stool 
 to the mouth of the cave, and sat there musket in 
 hand, waiting for the dawn. No further sound reached 
 them from the valley, and they were beginning to 
 hope that they had heard only the Tahitians discharg- 
 ing their pieces to frighten away "evil spirits," but 
 as the day broke, they saw the figure of Alrema 
 clambering up the path along the ridge. 
 
 "What has happened?" cried Mahina to the 
 girl. 
 
 " Alas ! Mahina, the white men are well, but all or 
 our countrymen and the men of Tubuai are dead ; 
 the white men have slain them all. And their wives 
 have now fled in fear and hidden themselves." 
 
 In a few words she told her dreadful story, and 
 
NAHI'S REVENGE 271 
 
 added how, when daylight came, the wives of McCoy 
 and Smith, going to comfort the widows of the mur- 
 dered men, found nothing there but the cold bodies 
 of the victims — the women had fled. So while the 
 four seamen buried those whom they had slain, their 
 wives went in search of the missing women, and 
 Alrema had come to the cave, thinking that they 
 might have taken refuge with Christian. 
 
 "Thou cruel murderess," said Christian sternly to 
 Alrema, "so thine was the bloody hand which took 
 the life of Talalu ! May the gods punish thee, thou 
 cruel and wicked woman ! " 
 
 His savage words terrified her, and she shrunk 
 back in alarm. Disdaining further speech with her. 
 Christian turned to Mahina. 
 
 " Come, Mahina, let us seek for these poor creatures 
 who in the madness of their despair and terror may do 
 themselves injury." 
 
 Leaving the sleeping children, and closely followed 
 by Alrema, Christian and Mahina began to descend 
 the mountain by the narrow and intricate path winding 
 to the plain. Sometimes it led through huge crevices 
 in the rock, which shut out the light on either side, 
 and left only a patch of blue sky overhead ; sometimes 
 it ran sharply over the dizzy summit of the broken 
 mountain, from whence they could see the surf-beaten 
 beach below. 
 
 Suddenly the quick seaman's eye of Christian detected 
 moving figures on Bounty Beach, and he stopped and 
 gazed intently down. Away from the wash of the 
 waves the 'Bounty's boat lay bottom uowards, rapidly 
 
272 THE MUTINEER 
 
 falling into decay from disuse ; and the figures he had 
 seen were turning it over upon its keel. 
 
 Even while he looked he saw the three women, the 
 moment they had turned the boat over, begin to drag 
 her towards the water ; but they were not strong 
 enough to make much progress in their efforts. 
 
 A cry of pity escaped Mahina. 
 
 " What would they do ? " she said. " The boat 
 is old and rotten, and they seek to drag it to the 
 water ! Save them, my husband, ere they die by 
 the sharks." 
 
 " Nay, it is I who have filled them with fear, and 
 'tis I who will save them from death ! " And Alrema 
 bounded down the dangerous path, her long, black 
 hair flying about her naked shoulders as she sprang 
 from ledge to ledge, thoughtless of danger to herself 
 in her effort to avert this last calamity. 
 
 Christian and Mahina followed closely, but when 
 Alrema gained the beach the women had succeeded in 
 floating the boat and, using her bottom boards as 
 paddles, had sent her some little distance from the 
 shore. 
 
 " Come back, come back, thou foolish Nahi ! " 
 Alrema cried frantically from the beach. " Come 
 back ; I swear by the gods that no harm shall come 
 to thee ! " 
 
 A heavy roller lifted the boat and carried her back 
 for some distance shoreward, and the women had all 
 they could do to keep her from broaching to ; but 
 Nahi while she paddled looked over her shoulder at 
 Alrema and cursed her bitterly. 
 
NAHI'S REVENGE 273 
 
 "Thou murderess!" she cried, "rather will we 
 drown or go into the bellies of the sharks than live 
 in this bloody land of Afita with thee." 
 
 Alrema took no heed of her words, but cast off 
 her waist-cloth of tappa and plunged into the sea. 
 She could see that there was a brief lull in the 
 succession of rollers tumbling in upon the beach, 
 and that, poor as their boards were, the women 
 would succeed in getting out to deep water unless 
 she managed to reach the boat quickly. 
 
 " Paddle, paddle," panted Nahi to the others ; 
 "let not the red-handed woman touch the boat!" 
 and she plunged her board into the water with 
 all her strength — it broke in halves, and the boat 
 broached to. 
 
 She stood up in the stern, with despair in her eyes, 
 and looked round her. Already Alrema was within a 
 few feet of the boat, and in imploring tones was 
 calling to the women to return, when Nahi spoke 
 to her two companions in a low voice. They looked 
 inquiringly at her, and she answered their looks with 
 an impatient gesture to cease paddling. 
 
 Panting, and now almost exhausted, Alrema at last 
 gained the boat, put out her right hand and grasped 
 the gunwale. 
 
 "Come," she said faintly, "come back with me, 
 Nahi." 
 
 Looking down at her with savage hatred, the wife 
 of Talalu smiled cruelly at the pleading face. 
 
 " Aye," she answered, " I come." And, without 
 another word she sprang out of the boat, clasped her 
 19 
 
274 THE MUTINEER 
 
 arms round Alrema's neck, and uttering a curse 
 
 with her last breath, dragged her enemy to death 
 
 with her beneath the water. 
 
CHAPTER XXXIII 
 
 THE BREW OF DEATH 
 
 A FORTNIGHT after the last of the tragedies 
 which had marked the life of the island dwellers, 
 Christian withdrew himself for ever from all associa- 
 tion with the rest of the white men, and spent his 
 whole time in the cave, scarce speaking even to his 
 now heart-broken wife, though her patient, winning 
 ways won from him sometimes a mute caress. 
 
 By day she watched with the tenderest solicitude 
 over her husband's lonely wanderings ; by night she 
 listened to the strange mutterings which broke his 
 sleep ; torturing her mind with dread that the end 
 of her brief happiness was near. 
 
 The other women still lived in constant fear of 
 some new horror, and when the white men's wives 
 had performed their daily round of tasks for their 
 husbands' homes, they gathered together in the dusk 
 of the evening with the widows of the murdered men, 
 and tremblingly asked each other what the morrow 
 would bring forth — would it be death for all ? 
 Nothing that the white men could say could quiet 
 275 
 
276 THE MUTINEER 
 
 their fears ; and at last in their extremity they came 
 to the resolution to poison all the white men who 
 remained, lest their masters should plan some new 
 attack upon them. 
 
 But as soon as they had come to this determination, 
 some of them, fearful that their plans might miscarry, 
 and their intended victims retaliate upon them with 
 some dreadful punishment, secretly informed Young, 
 Smith, McCoy, and Quintal of the plot. At first the 
 white men listened incredulously, and when they did 
 believe the story they understood that the women 
 had been driven to this horrible device through fear 
 alone, and not from any desire for vengeance upon 
 their husbands' murderers. And so when one by one 
 the plotters confessed and begged for forgiveness. 
 Young and the others not only readily granted it, 
 but tried hard to persuade them that their terror was 
 groundless. 
 
 Worn with the results of a fever which, soon after 
 the tragic end of his wife, had wasted his once great 
 strength and muscular frame, Edward Young was 
 now greatly changed. As he listened to the women's 
 tale he raised his hands above his head, and swore by 
 their gods and the Christ-God of the white men that 
 no harm should come to them. 
 
 *' Let us who are left dwell together in peace," he 
 said. 
 
 With fresh hope kindled in their bosoms, the poor 
 women bent their heads to the ground and kissed his 
 feet, and swore to work for and obey him and the 
 other white men to the end of their lives. 
 
THE BREW OF DEATH 277 
 
 So the months went by in quiet and uneventful life, 
 and although the little community at the settlement 
 sometimes saw Mahina and her two children, her 
 husband never came near them. Twice he and 
 Young met, and the latter's face flushed deeply at 
 the memory of the past, but Christian spoke to him 
 calmly, without a sign of either anger or bitterness, 
 and then went on his way indifferent to all around 
 him. 
 
 Young himself had now so far succeeded in con- 
 troUing his passion for Mahina as to marry the widow 
 of one of the murdered Tahitians, and sought by his 
 conduct to make her and the other women feel that 
 their lives were in no danger. The terrible fate of 
 Alrema had had a good and lasting effect upon his 
 reckless nature, and there now seemed no likelihood 
 of a further tragedy breaking the monotony of 
 existence on the lonely island. Christian lived entirely 
 in his cave, but occasionally worked with Mahina in 
 the garden of their deserted house, and cheerfully gave 
 part of its yield to those of the community whose 
 lands were not so fruitful. 
 
 Three years passed, then there came a change. 
 One evening McCoy walked over to Quintal's house, 
 accompanied by Puni, his Huahine wife. Quintal 
 and his wife Malama were rolling into a cylindrical 
 shape a bundle of wild tobacco leaf, while their little 
 half-blood son lay asleep. 
 
 Seating himself cross-legged on the matted floor 
 
278 THE MUTINEER 
 
 beside his comrade, and briefly nodding to Malama, 
 McCoy said, " I'm sick of this damned life. Mat ; the 
 same round day after day, night after night — no 
 change, no pleasure. Young and Smith don't have 
 much to say to us, and Christian is as good as a dead 
 man, for all he has to do with us." 
 
 " I'm as tired of it as you are, Bill," answered 
 Quintal ; " but what are we to do ? We can't 
 leave here even if we had a good boat — we dare 
 not." 
 
 " No, I know that well enough ; but I've an idea 
 how we can make life a little pleasanter — for us two, 
 at any rate." 
 
 " How ? " 
 
 " Do you remember once I was telling Brown 
 about a ship's company that was cast away at Mar- 
 tinique, or some island near there, who found a plant, 
 out of which they made barrels and barrels of good 
 grog?" 
 
 " Well, this isn't Martinique." 
 
 " No ; but the same plant grows here. Just before 
 poor Will Brown was killed he told me — it's the 
 thing the women call ti.^ Why, it's growing all 
 over the island — there's acres of it in the little valley 
 at the back of Tautumah." 
 
 " How are we going to make it ? " said Quintal, 
 with sudden interest. " It would be a glorious thing 
 to have a taste of grog again." 
 
 "With the Bounty's copper boiler and my know- 
 ledge of the thing. I worked in a distillery in Dublin 
 
 ' Cordyline terminalis. 
 
THE BREW OF DEATH 279 
 
 when I was a boy, and it'll go hard if I can't make a 
 still." 
 
 " I'm with you, my hearty. Come on, it's a fine 
 night — let us go and get the copper out of the store 
 house. We'll make a cradle for it, and Malama and 
 Puni here can carry it up at once. If you can make 
 grog out of ti root I'll say you're a damned clever 
 fellow." 
 
 A week later McCoy rushed into Quintal's house, 
 " It's done, Mat, I've got good spirit ; come and try 
 it." 
 
 Quintal did try it, not once, but several times. An 
 hour afterwards he and his comrade reeled up to 
 Young's house, where Smith was seated at the table, 
 receiving instruction in reading and writing from 
 Young. Of late this manner of passing their 
 evenings had become a settled thing between them. 
 What few books were on board the 'Bounty when 
 Christian had run her ashore had been quietly taken 
 possession of by Smith, and from these, with the aid 
 of Young and his own intelligence, he was rapidly 
 improving himself. 
 
 As he and Young sat together at the table their 
 women occupied themselves in stitching clothes made 
 from tappa cloth, and as they worked they spoke in 
 low tones, lest they should disturb their white 
 husbands. 
 
 With a drunken laugh, McCoy, followed by 
 Quintal, staggered into the dimly-lighted room, and, 
 steadying himself with one hand on the table, addressed 
 Young and Smith. 
 
28o THE MUTINEER 
 
 "Come and have a glass of grog, Mr. Young," he 
 hiccoughed. 
 
 " Yes, come along and drink confusion to the King, 
 and bring the women with you," cried Quintal, leering 
 amiably at Terere and Young's wife, who had sprung 
 to their feet in alarm ; " it's good liquor we've got — 
 none of your bounty slops, none of Old Grog's slush, 
 but the real thing." 
 
 " Why, these fellows are drunk or mad," exclaimed 
 Young, with a look of astonishment at Smith. 
 
 " Where could they get drink ? " answered Smith, 
 looking first at one and then at the other. They met 
 his expression of wonder with coarse guffaws. 
 
 " Get it ! Why, you damned fools, we made it ! 
 I made it ! What's your book learning amount to ? 
 It couldn't teach you to make prime liquor like it," 
 said McCoy, who was ready to quarrel with any one. 
 
 " If you have found a way of making spirit, it is 
 about the worst thing you could have done. You'll 
 kill yourselves with it," said Young, who remembered 
 that both McCoy and Quintal were several times 
 punished while on the 'Bounty for drunkenness. 
 
 McCoy answered with a curse, Quintal made a 
 threatening gesture, and a desperate quarrel would 
 have ensued, but Smith interfered ; and finally, to 
 pacify the drunken men, he and Young went across 
 to McCoy's house to taste his brewing. 
 
 It was fortunate for both Young and Smith that 
 each conceived a dislike for the fiery liquor at the first 
 taste. When McCoy and Quintal, with drunken in- 
 sistence, urged them to make a night of it, and kept 
 
THE BREW OF DEATH 281 
 
 swallowing drink after drink, the other two surrepti- 
 tiously threw theirs on the ground. Promising to 
 return later on, they at last managed to escape, and 
 get back to their frightened wives. 
 
 On the following evening the drunkards, who had 
 slept till near noon, again appeared. Tliis time they 
 were so savage in their demeanour, and threatened 
 such fearful villainies, that the other two men feared 
 bloodshed, and hid themselves with their wives in a 
 thicket near the house. For two days and nights the 
 two seamen continued their drinking bout ; each even- 
 ing their drunken yells and horrid blasphemies reached 
 even the dwellers in Christian's cave, and made Mahina 
 tremblingly press her infant to her bosom. 
 
 On the morning of the third day, McCoy in his 
 frenzy, rushed from his house, followed by the equally 
 maddened Quintal, took the path along the edge of 
 the cliffs, and, reaching the highest peak, threw himself 
 headlong upon the rocks below. 
 
 A hideous laugh of approval came from Quintal as he 
 saw McCoy leap to death, then, with a look of insane 
 cunning, muttering and gibbering to himself, he re- 
 turned to the settlement, and went inside his house. 
 There he poured out a pannikin of the fiery liquid, and 
 tossed it off; then, picking up an axe and a burning 
 brand, set off at a run towards the other houses. His 
 dreadful appearance and the wild curses he shouted 
 upon every one sent the Tahitian women fleeing before 
 him to seek refuge with Smith and Young, who rushed 
 to the doorway and saw the demented creature destroy- 
 ing Williams' house with his axe. In a few minutes 
 
282 THE MUTINEER 
 
 he had utterly wrecked it, and then, flinging down his 
 weapon, he advanced towards Young's house, waving 
 the firebrand in his hand. 
 
 Apparently unconscious that his movements were 
 watched, he sprang over the low stone wall and made 
 straight for the house, looking at the thick drooping 
 thatch, and grinning like a fiend. 
 
 " Stand back," cried Young, as musket in hand he 
 pushed past Smith and the terrified women, and faced 
 Quintal, "stand back, Quintal, and throw away that 
 firestick, or, as God is above me, I will shoot you ! " 
 
 A mocking laugh was the wretch's answer ; he 
 staggered past, and seizing a bunch of the light, dry 
 thatch in his left hand thrust the firestick into its 
 centre. 
 
 " I'm going to burn your " He never finished, 
 
 for Young, raising his musket, fired, and shot the 
 miserable man dead. 
 
CHAPTER XXXIV 
 
 "try to forget the past" 
 
 CHRISTIAN, as soon as he heard of the death of 
 Quintal, bitterly reproached himself as the cause ; 
 his old brooding manner returned to him in all its 
 former intensity, and, nothing that Mahina or Smith 
 said could soften the feeling of passionate remorse 
 which now took possession of him." 
 
 " God knows, Mr. Christian," said Smith to the 
 mutineer in an endeavour to rouse him from his 
 melancholy, " you have nothing to reproach yourself 
 with. You are not responsible for what led to the 
 death of these men. If my musket had been loaded I 
 would have shot Quintal myself ; and I am no lover 
 of bloodshed." 
 
 Christian made no answer, but buried his face in his 
 hands ; and presently Smith, seeing that he seemed to 
 have become unconscious of his presence, returned to 
 his house. Descending the ridge he met Young 
 coming up. His face was very pale, and Smith saw 
 that he was suffering deeply. 
 
 283 
 
284 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " You shouldn't overtax yourself like this, Mr. 
 Young," he said. " Where are you going ? " 
 
 A deep flush dyed Young's sallow face. " I am 
 going to Christian. Do you think he will see me ? " 
 
 Smith looked at him curiously for a moment, then 
 held out his hand, " I am sure he will, sir. God 
 knows you have done him bitter wrong, but he said 
 to me only the other day, when he was speaking of 
 his wife, that he had too many sins upon his own head 
 to judge either you or her." 
 
 Edward Young's hand trembled a little as he leaned 
 upon his stick ; and without another word he turned 
 and went towards Christian's cave. 
 
 The dead silence of the place oppressed him, and 
 the sight of Christian's figure, as he satjwith his hands 
 to his face at the entrance to the cave, made him 
 hesitate and shook his resolution, but only for a 
 moment. He took a few quick steps and touched 
 the man who had once been his friend on the 
 shoulder. Christian raised his head and looked at him. 
 
 " I have come to you, Christian, for the last tim.e. 
 I am not a sentimental fool, but I feel that if you 
 would once more give me your hand and think of me, 
 not as the cowardly scoundrel I have proved, but as 
 your old and trusted messmate of days gone by, I 
 should be less miserable. I feel that I am a dying 
 man — will you forgive and forget ? " 
 
 Only the sound of Young's panting breath was 
 heard for a few moments, and then Fletcher Christian 
 stood up and held out his hand. 
 
 " I forgive you freely, Young. Not for the sake or 
 
"TRY TO FORGET THE PAST" 285 
 
 our comradeship in crime, but in the knowledge that 
 I, too, need forgiveness in the sight of God for the 
 bloody deeds that my mad folly and hasty temper have 
 brought about. There is my hand." 
 
 For a little time neither of them spoke. Young, 
 looking at the gaunt figure of his old shipmate, v/o.s 
 filled with pity. 
 
 His memory flew back to the days at Matavai 
 when the young officer had vanquished in friendly 
 contest the picked wrestlers of Tahiti, and Tina and 
 the gentle Aitia had praised his strength and courage. 
 And Christian, as he listened to Young's laboured 
 breath and almost whispered tones, knew that his 
 time was not far off, yet that for them both there 
 was at least some hope of a brighter future, short as it 
 might be. 
 
 Presently Young, with his hand on Christian's 
 shoulder, broke the silence. 
 
 " Let us try, old friend, to reconcile ourselves to our 
 lot. I have not long to live, but by God's help will 
 try to lead a better life than I have done. I think it 
 is Smith's teaching. . . . And so I want you to come 
 down to the settlement and live with us again. . . , 
 The men who were ever a disturbing influence here 
 are dead — one by my hand. . . . You alone can 
 inspire all that are left of us with hope for the future. 
 What is there to keep you from us now ? " 
 
 " Remorse, Young — the misery of my thoughts — 
 the constant dread — but there, my dear fellow, leave 
 me to myself. You and Smith alone, of all the fated 
 wretches who participated in my villainy, have striven 
 
286 THE MUTINEER 
 
 to lead decent lives. If the others had been like you, 
 our life here would have been different. It is too late 
 novv^ ; I cannot bear to think of it. My crime was 
 bad enough when I saw it in all its hideousness five 
 minutes after that morning off Tofoa, but now " 
 
 "Christian," and Young's voice took a deep earnest- 
 ness, " you suffered under Bligh as none of us sufiFered. 
 I, aye, and Smith too, were equally guilty with you 
 and the mutiny was no crime." 
 
 "No crime ! Is it no crime to have been the 
 murderer of nineteen persons ? — nineteen of my fellow- 
 countrymen turned adrift to die of the horrors of 
 hunger and thirst in an open boat ! " 
 
 "They may have reached land." 
 
 A faint light came into Christian's eyes — 
 " Young, if I could but dare to hope it ! God knows 
 I would give my life twenty times over to know it. 
 But, even if they did, all England knows the infamy 
 of Fletcher Christian, the disgraced mutineer. . . . 
 But what difference does it make ? Have I not the 
 blood of those who landed here with me upon my soul ?" 
 
 He rose from his seat and paced to and fro in the 
 gathering dusk, and Young could see that his emotion 
 had for the time mastered him. 
 
 " Come," he said at last, " try to forget the past. 
 Once more I implore you, Christian, to return to the 
 settlement. Your wife" — and he turned his face 
 away as he spoke as if fearful that even darkness 
 could not hide the burning flush of shame upon his 
 cheeks — " your wife is in no fit state to live here. 
 The dreadful loneliness of it is killing her." 
 
"TRY TO FORGET THE PAST" 287 
 
 A step sounded near, and the next moment Smith 
 joined them. 
 
 " Aye, indeed, Mr. Christian. She was never a 
 strong woman, and her time is near. Surely you will 
 let her come and be tended by our women ? " 
 
 The sincerity of the appeals touched him at last. 
 " You are right, Smith, God bless you, old friends 
 both, for making me think of her a little. Yes, we 
 will come and dwell in the settlement till the child 
 is born." 
 
 The next day Mahina came down from the cavern 
 with a great joy in her heart ; for the loneliness of 
 her life, even with her husband to watch over her, 
 robbed her of both health and strength, and she loved 
 to hear the sound of her countrywomen's voices. 
 
 A few weeks afterwards her third child was born ; 
 and while the other two played with the children of 
 McCoy, Quintal, and Young, Mahina was tenderly 
 nursed and cared for by the Tahitians till she grew 
 strong again. 
 
 But soon, unable to conquer his aversion to the 
 society of his fellow-men, Christain again left her to 
 return to his cave, bidding her to follow him when 
 she was well enough. 
 
 The first day of the nineteenth century came in as 
 did most days at Pitcairn — a flush of sunlight melt- 
 ing the mists of the mountain tops, piercing the dark 
 shades of the wooded valleys with broad blades of 
 golden light, and rousing the sleeping rookeries of 
 
288 THE MUTINEER 
 
 sea-birds into clamorous life. Long ere the glittering 
 dews of the night that hung in beady drops from every 
 leaf and blade of grass had quivered and fallen to the 
 first breaths of the trade-wind, Christian awoke from 
 his broken slumbers, and was moodily taking his 
 accustomed walk along the eastern cliffs. 
 
 What had happened in the world he had left 
 behind ? he thouo-ht. Was he accounted as long since 
 dead ? Was there one living soul in all England 
 whose thoughts went out to him sometimes ? Slowly 
 he paced along buried in thought. When he reached 
 the end of his walk he sat on a jutting ledge of rock 
 overhanging the boiling surf three hundred feet below, 
 where his eye ranged over the wide expanse of spark- 
 ling ocean. Day after day, for years he had looked 
 out thus upon the bosom of the sailless sea, and had 
 seen nothing but the swift flight of the blue-billed 
 kanapu and fierce-eyed frigate birds as they sailed to 
 and fro or plunged from aerial heights into the deep ; 
 or far above, the snow-white tropic birds, floating with 
 motionless wing and gazing down at the human figure 
 below. Was it likely, he thought, that his refuge 
 would ever be discovered ? Would 
 
 He started to his feet and w^ith dilated eyes looked 
 at the horizon. There, clearly within view, were the 
 topgallant sails of a ship ! 
 
 Crouching — he knew not why — upon his knees, he 
 clutched the ledge of rock with shaking hands and 
 watched for nearly a quarter of an hour. The trade- 
 wind was fast bringing the ship nearer, and before 
 long her courses rose to view. A few minutes more 
 
"TRY TO FORGET THE PAST" 289 
 
 he gazed, then, struck by a sudden impubc, he ran 
 along the ledge till he reached the pathway to Bounty 
 Bay. He bounded down the steep and fearful descent 
 to where the Bounty s boat was hauled up upon rough 
 skids laid down by Young and Smith many months 
 before. Old as she was, the boat was not now un- 
 seaworthy, as she had been when Nahi and the other 
 Tahitian women attempted to escape in her ; for 
 Smith had put her in a fair state of repair, so that she 
 might be used for fishing when the surf did not 
 break too heavily upon the shores of the little 
 bay. 
 
 Christian tugged vainly at the boat and rocked her 
 from side to side in an endeavour to start her down 
 the skids ; but his strength was not equal to the 
 task. 
 
 He ceased his efforts, and then looked seaward, 
 but the ship was not visible from where he 
 stood. 
 
 " Oh ! for some help," he muttered," " but that I 
 cannot, dare not seek ; neither Young nor Smith 
 must see me." He thought for a moment, then with 
 excitement, began again to ascend the path to his 
 cave. Panting with his exertions he soon gained the 
 top of the cliff's, and ran along the dangerous path till 
 he reached the cavern. He darted inside and quickly 
 reappeared with his musket and a block and tackle, 
 which he had often used to drag weights to his retreat. 
 With this he hoped to launch the boat by making one 
 end or the tackle fast to a point of rock just at tjie 
 water's edge, and the other to her stern ringbolt. 
 
 20 
 
290 THE MUTINEER 
 
 The musket he intended to fire to attract notice from 
 the ship should other means fail. 
 
 Returning to the beach he was soon exerting all 
 his strength to start the heavy little boat down to 
 the water. 
 
CHAPTER XXXV 
 
 THE LAST SHOT ON AFITA. 
 
 BY this time the ship was within three or four 
 miles of the island, and had been seen by one of 
 the Tahitian women. She ran back to the settlement, 
 and roused the little community to a state of wild 
 excitement by her loud cries of "A ship ! a ship ! 
 A ship is coming." 
 
 Soon Young and Smith reached the clifFs, and one 
 glance at the ocean showed them the vessel — a ship of 
 war, they were quick to perceive, by the cut of her 
 canvas and her lofty spars. 
 
 Young was scarcely able to walk, and his excitement 
 at first prevented him from speaking, but when he 
 could control himself he held a hurried consultation 
 with Smith, who then set off for Christian's cave to 
 inform him of the ship's approach, while Young 
 returned to the settlement and told Mahina to prepare 
 to leave the house and, with the other women, be 
 ready to hide herself if necessary. 
 
 They had resolved, as a first step towards safety, 
 
 that every person on the island should assemble near the 
 
 291 
 
292 THE MUTINEER 
 
 cavern. The difficulty of access and the remoteness of 
 its situation, they thought, would afford them all a safe 
 retreat from such people as might land. It was hoped 
 by Young and Smith that, unless the vessel was a 
 King's ship specially sent to search for the missing 
 mutineers, those who placed foot on shore would not 
 easily discover that the island was inhabited. As a first 
 precaution, however, some of the women were sent to 
 remove all traces of human occupancy from the two 
 little beaches, and to cover up the bounty $ boat with 
 dead coconut branches and bushes. 
 
 Four of them departed to do this, while Mahina and 
 her children, with the remaining women, set out for 
 Christian's cave. 
 
 But when they reached the cavern they found it 
 deserted by both Christian and Smith, and saw that no 
 preparations had been made to defend the narrow path 
 leading to the stronghold. 
 
 Frightened at the absence of the two men, the terri- 
 fied women ran hither and thither, calling loudly, and 
 seeking for traces of them ; till presently Mahina, 
 wildly excited, sped down the path and looked over 
 the edge of the cliffs to the beach below. Then a cry 
 of alarm broke from her. 
 
 Beckoning to the others, she flew down the perilous 
 path to the shore. Half-way she stumbled and, but 
 for a projecting pinnacle of rock, would have pitched 
 headlong to the beach. Before she recovered herself 
 the other women overtook her, and were peering down 
 to discover what it was that had so agitated her. But 
 from where they clustered together they could see only 
 
THE LAST SHOT ON AFITA 293 
 
 the billows bursting in foam upon the black rocks 
 below ; and while they waited for Mahina to explain 
 there came the report of a musket from beneath. 
 
 Too far down on their way to turn back, as their 
 rears dictated, Mahina's companions stood trembling 
 and hesitating, their hearts filled with an undefined 
 apprehension that some fresh tragedy had occurred. 
 
 Smith, filled with anxiety for his leader, had hurried 
 along the rocky track to Christian's cave. The dreaded 
 hour had arrived at last — the hour that he and the 
 other mutineers had so often feared. A King's ship ! 
 Yes, she could be no other ! His seaman's eye told 
 him she was a ship of war. Perhaps she was a French- 
 man ? That was not likely. She was English — sent 
 to search for them ; and even if she were not, she 
 evidently intended to send a boat ashore. Once a 
 landing party from the ship ascended the cliflFs they 
 could not fail to see the houses, and would not take 
 long to find those who lived in them. Then would 
 come discovery and a disgraceful death. 
 
 But, thought he, Christian will never be taken alive ; 
 and even if the presence of white men upon the island 
 should be discovered, the cave was hard to find. And 
 still, even if the ship were in search of Christian and 
 his companions, the identity of the inhabitants might 
 not perhaps be suspected. If the worst came to the 
 worst, they could make a fight of it to the death in 
 such a place as Christian's stronghold. 
 
 So ran the quick current of his thoughts as he 
 
294 THE MUTINEER 
 
 panted up the ridge to the cave — then, with an ex- 
 clamation of dismay, he saw that it was untenanted. 
 
 As loudly as possible he called Christian's name, but 
 only the countless reverberation of his cries answered 
 him from the desolate solitude. A hurried glance 
 down the path which he had just ascended showed no 
 human being in sight. Surely Christian could not be 
 far off? He must either be coming along the ridge 
 and hidden from view, or lying asleep somewhere 
 along the edge of the cliffs. Perhaps he had gone to 
 the beach ? 
 
 Hastily descending again, Smith struck across to the 
 eastern side of the island, till he came to a spot which 
 overlooked Bounty Bay. He knew that Christian, in 
 his lonely wanderings, sometimes visited the place, and 
 sat for hours upon the wreckage of the Bounty $ spars. 
 A thick, stunted growth of matted scrub and vines 
 grew to the very edge of the cliffs, but hastily pushing 
 through it, the seaman looked down. There, far below, 
 he saw the man he sought, bending his tackle to launch 
 the bounty's boat ! 
 
 The next moment, too anxious even to lose time 
 by descending the regular path Smith, at the hazard of 
 his life, began to scramble down the almost precipitous 
 face of the cliff. At last, with bleeding feet and hands, 
 he reached the shore. 
 
 "In God's name, Mr. Christian, what are you 
 trying to do ? " he demanded, breathlessly. 
 
 "What am I trying to do?" repeated Christian 
 fiercely — " I am about to end it all. That is a King's 
 ship, and I am going to give myself up." 
 
THE LAST SHOT ON AFITA 295 
 
 "You must be mad to talk like this. Come away 
 at once and let us get back to the cave, or we shall all 
 be discovered." 
 
 " It will be your own fault ifyou are ; you and those 
 with you may do as you please, but I will board that 
 ship," answered Christian wildly, and Smith saw that 
 he was nearly mad with excitement. As he spoke he 
 still strained with all his might on the tackle, and the 
 boat, once started, slid down the skids till her stern 
 touched the pebbly beach. 
 
 " By God, you shan't do this ! Our lives as well as 
 yours depend upon your hiding with us " ; and Smith 
 laid his hand on the fall of the tackle so as to prevent 
 Christian from unshipping the hook. 
 
 " Stand back, Smith ! Stand back, I say. I swear 
 that no longer shall justice go unsatisfied. I will go ! " 
 As a wave dashed up, the boat lifted and floated ; he 
 sprang past Smith, jumped in and cast off the tackle. 
 
 Seizing hold of the gunwale. Smith exerted all his 
 strength and drew the boat broadside on to the beach. 
 
 " Beware, man, beware ! " and Christian's eyes 
 blazed with sudden fury — " let go your hold, I say. 
 I am dangerous ! " Smith recognised it was no time 
 for words ; he released his hold, jumped into the boat, 
 and threw himself upon the desperate man. They 
 went down together, and the boat rocked from side 
 to side with the violence of their struggle. No 
 word was spoken, but there was in Christian's face 
 such a look of savage determination to overcome his 
 friend, that Smith at last aimed a blow at his head, 
 thinking to stun him for a time. 
 
296 THE MUTINEER 
 
 Nerved with a madman's strength, the blow only 
 seemed to rouse him to greater fury ; with a mighty 
 effort he freed himself from Smith's left arm, which 
 was wound about his waist, and in another moment his 
 hand grasped the barrel of the loaded musket, which he 
 drew towards him by the muzzle. 
 
 Then Smith again threw himself upon him. There 
 was a short, fierce struggle, a report, and Fletcher 
 Christian sank back with a groan — the ball had passed 
 through his chest. 
 
 Sick with horror. Smith staggered to his feet and 
 raised the dying man in his arms. He lifted him out 
 of the boat and carried him to the beach, where he 
 placed him in a sitting posture ; then tearing off 
 his shirt he sought to stanch the fearful rush of 
 blood. 
 
 " My God, sir ! my God, sir ! you don't think 'twas 
 my doing ? " he asked in anguished tones. 
 
 " No, no, my good fellow," gasped Christian, " you 
 are not to blame. My foot must have touched the 
 trigger. ... I was mad." 
 
 Smith knelt beside him, overcome with grief and 
 blinded by tears. He took his leader's hand in his and 
 tried to speak, but one look at the gaping wound told 
 him that the end was near. 
 
 And then there echoed from the cliffs a cry of heart- 
 broken agony. Mahina, springing from rock to rock, 
 had reached the overhanging ledge under which her 
 husband lay, and, looking down, saw him. 
 
 Leaping to the ground, she turned upon Smith. 
 " Thou murderer ; thou hast slain him ! " she cried. 
 
THE LAST SHOT ON AFITA 297 
 
 and pushing him away, threw herself upon her knees 
 beside her husband. 
 
 " Nay, nay, Mahina," he said ; " not so. My foot 
 struck the gun. . . . He hath ever been my friend. 
 . . . Listen to me ... for in a little time I die." 
 
 Slowly and gaspingly the words came, and Mahina, 
 with a sob of misery, saw the grey shadows of death 
 dimming the eyes of him she loved so well. 
 
 " He shall not die ; he shall not die ! " she cried 
 wildly to Smith and Young, who had now joined them, 
 and was overcome at the scene before him. " Save 
 him, save him, lest ye both die accursed ! " then burst 
 into anguished weeping, as she bent her face upon her 
 husband's knees. 
 
 " Is that you. Young ? " asked Christian faintly — 
 " my time is nearly run, old friend," and he put out 
 his brown, sun-tanned hand. " But, quick ; listen to 
 me. . . . Save yourselves while there is yet time. 
 . . . The ship must be near now." 
 
 " No," said Young, pressing his hand, " she kept oft 
 quite suddenly when within a mile of the land. I saw 
 her stand away again to the westward. In another 
 hour she'll be hull down." 
 
 "Thank God!" he murmured. "Mahina . 
 wife . . . come closer to me, . . . and you. Young 
 and Smith, give me your hands. Promise me that no 
 one but yourselves shall ever know where I lie. Let 
 no other white man point to my grave and say, 
 ' Fletcher Christian . . . mutineer.' " 
 
 He ceased, then by a dying effort, opened his arms 
 wide. 
 
298 THE MUTINEER 
 
 " Mahina ! My wife ! Mother of my children ! 
 • • • it is all over now," he sighed with his last breath, 
 as his arms closed gently round her neck. 
 
 She pressed her cheek to his ; his head sank upon 
 her shoulder, and then lay there in the quietness of 
 death. 
 
 * * * * * 
 
 Years later, when Pitcairn was " discovered," the 
 venerable man, loved and revered by the children of 
 the mutineers under the name of John Adams, revealed 
 his identity with Alexander Smith, and tremblingly 
 waited to hear his fate from the lips of the naval 
 officers who had landed on the island. The story of 
 the death of Young from consumption soon after that 
 of Christian, as well as the deaths of the others of the 
 ill-starred company, was told by him ; though, faithful 
 to his promise, he refused to show his leader's last 
 resting-place ; and the listeners heard for the first time 
 the fate of the Bounty mutineers. 
 
 THE END. 
 
 UNWIN BROTHERS, PRINTERS, WOKIXG A.\D LOXDOX. 
 
14 DAY USE 
 
 RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 LOAN DEPT. 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 
 Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. 
 
 ^^^^l -' S^ Q l^ 
 
 ^c:C'D Lit) 
 
 007 3 1991 
 
 AIIIflDISCJANll'91 
 
 OEC 2l9ftJ 
 
 220ct^^^ 
 
 f^EC'D LD 
 
 OCT 20 '65 -8 am 
 
 jm B 
 
 lEC. CIH. Mv 
 
 LD 21A-50to-3,'62 
 (C7097sl0)476B 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of California 
 
 Eierkeley 
 
U C BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 cossattifiQ 
 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY